Magix Video Pro X5 Instruction Manual EN
User Manual: magix Video Pro - X5 - Instruction Manual Free User Guide for Magix Video Pro Software, Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 387
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
2
Copyright
This documentation is protected by law. All rights, especially the right to duplicate,
circulate, and translate, are reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in the form of copies, microfilms or
other processes, or transmitted into a language used for machines, especially data
processing machines, without the express written consent of the publisher.
All copyrights reserved.
All other product names are trademarks of the corresponding manufacturers. Errors in
and changes to the contents as well as program modifications reserved.
Copyright © MAGIX Software GmbH, 2008 - 2013. All rights reserved.
MAGIX is a registered trademark of MAGIX AG.
Created under license from Dolby Laboratories
Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories.
© 1992 - 2013 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
Other mentioned product names may be registered trademarks of the respective
manufacturer.
This product uses MAGIX patent pending technology.
Preface
Preface
Thank you for choosing MAGIX Video Pro X5! Your new software offers video editing
and postproduction on a professional level, comprehensive format support, powerful
performance, high-end audio editing and all options for DVD authoring and export.
The fully developed MAGIX Video Pro X5 operating concept helps you get top results
after only a short familiarization period. This documentation offers you an overview
and a quick start at the beginning. The sections at the end provide a detailed and
systematic description of the numerous functions.
Have fun with your projects and MAGIX Video Pro X5 from
Your MAGIX Team
3
4
Table of Contents
Copyright
2
Preface
3
Support
11
Before You Start
Package Contents
Installation
Serial number
System requirements
13
13
13
14
15
Introduction
What is MAGIX Video Pro X5?
Features
Notes for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro users
Projects, movies and scenes
16
16
16
18
20
Quick start
Program start
Select, load, and play back videos
Import video material from memory card
Video editing
Publish videos
22
22
23
26
28
34
Edit mode
Standard mode
Basic mode
Switching between standard and basic modes
36
36
37
40
Work screens
Activate main screen
"Edit" screen
The "Burn" screen
41
41
42
67
Video recording
Select the recording method
AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra
HDV camera
68
68
69
72
Table of Contents
DV camera
Video
Audio
Single frame
Screen
Edit after recording
72
79
82
85
88
89
Objects
Insert object into the project
Select and group objects
Duplicate objects
Move Objects
Extract sound from videos
Object handles
Object borders
Trim Objects
Transitions (fades)
Search for gaps
Simple cut
Two-point cut
Three-point editing
Four-point editing
Move the contents of trimmed objects
Zoom preview
91
92
94
94
95
95
96
97
97
100
102
103
103
105
107
107
107
Markers
Playback marker
Project markers
Ranges (in and out points)
Chapter markers
Scene markers
108
108
108
109
110
112
Multicam editing
Preparation
Source tracks and preview images
Multicam edit functions
Synchronize video objects using the audio track
113
113
114
115
116
Title
Title editor
117
117
5
6
3D Text
Advanced settings
Creating titles using a template
Create titles without a template
Edit titles retroactively
Position titles
Fade in date as title
Timecode
118
119
120
120
121
121
121
122
Effects
Apply effects to objects
Preview rendering
Video effects in the Media Pool
Movement effects in the Media Pool
Stereo3D in the Media Pool
Audio effects in the Media Pool
Design elements in the Media Pool
My Presets in the Media Pool
Additional Effects
Animate objects, effect curves
Create effects masks
Attach to picture position in the video
Create overlay graphic/animation
Image stabilization
Image improvements for the entire movie
Image improvements for individual objects
123
123
125
128
137
142
143
144
144
144
147
152
158
158
159
161
163
Stereo3D
3D basics
Record 3D
Prepare 3D editing
Set playback mode for 3D
Align videos and pictures for 3D
Turn camera movements into 3D videos
Export and burn 3D videos
164
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
Audio editing
Load and edit audio files
Audio effects
172
172
173
Table of Contents
Mixer
5.1 Surround
Set multiple sound tracks
Scrubbing
190
193
198
201
Edit disc menu
Preview and editing
Menu
Templates
Edit disc menu
Edit DVD menus with Xara Xtreme Pro or Photoshop
202
202
203
204
205
212
Burn disc
Burning wizard
The burn dialog
Memory
Encoder settings
Use Quick Sync Video, Open CL or CUDA for rendering
220
220
221
222
224
226
Export movie
Video as AVI
Video as DV-AVI
Video as MPEG video
Video as MAGIX video
Video as QuickTime movie
Uncompressed movie
Video as MotionJPEG AVI
Movie as a series of individual frames
Windows Media Export
Video as MPEG-4 video
Export as media player
Audio as MP3
Audio as wave
Export as transition...
Single frame as BMP file
Single frame as JPG
Animated GIF
Export movie information as EDL
Upload to Internet
227
227
228
228
228
228
229
229
229
229
230
231
232
232
232
233
233
233
233
234
7
8
Upload to Internet (MAGIX Online Album)
Export to device
Output as media player
Output as video file
235
236
236
237
Settings for and management of video projectors
Movie and project settings
Program settings
Proxy and Preview Rendering
Backup copy
Load backup project...
Importing & exporting EDL files
Clean-up wizard
238
238
246
253
255
256
256
257
Special functions and wizards
Proxy editing
Automatic scene detection
Musical cut adjustment
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker
Slideshow Maker
Produce panorama pictures
Batch conversion
Blackmagic Design video cards
Use movie templates
258
258
259
260
264
266
270
271
274
275
Menus
File Menu
Edit Menu
Effects Menu
Windows Menu
Help Menu
277
277
284
292
298
301
Context menu (right click)
Video objects
Image objects
Transitions
Audio objects
Text objects
MAGIX 3D Maker objects
Project folder
303
303
307
310
310
313
315
318
Table of Contents
Track
318
Problems and solutions
File will not load
Choppy or uneven playback
Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto Remix Assistant
Activation problems
320
320
320
320
321
Online functions
Integrated browser
MAGIX News Center
Embed Flash videos into your own web page
322
322
324
324
Keyboard shortcuts
Playback functions
Scroll and zoom
Monitors
Arranger view
Move view
Mouse Modes
Context Menu
File menu
Edit menu
Effects menu
Windows menu
Help menu
Edit keyboard shortcut
326
326
327
327
327
328
328
329
329
330
331
332
333
333
Activate codecs
Free activation of codecs
Fee-based DVCPRO and AVC-Intra activation
335
335
336
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
MPEG Compression
General notes on AVI videos
Overview of the different disc types
337
337
337
338
MPEG-4 encoder
Video codec
Audio codec
Multiplexer
341
342
349
351
9
10
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
General settings
Video settings
Advanced video settings
Audio settings
352
352
353
354
355
MPEG glossary
Motion estimation
Bit rate
Block
Chroma format
Field
Frame
GOP
I frames
Interlace
P frames and B frames
Prediction
Quantization scaling
357
357
357
358
358
358
358
359
359
359
361
361
362
Glossary
364
If you still have questions
Tips for program help
379
379
Index
380
Support
Support
Dear MAGIX customer,
Our aim is to provide fast, convenient, solution-focused support at all times. To this
end, we offer a wide range of services:
• Unlimited web support:
As a registered MAGIX customer, you have unlimited access to web support
offered via the convenient MAGIX service portal on http://support.magix.net,
including an intelligent help assistant, high-quality FAQs, patches and user
reports that are constantly updated.
The only requirement for use is product registration at http://pro.magix.com
• The online community, on-the-spot support and a platform for exchange:
MAGIX customers have free and unlimited access to the online community at
www.magix.info, which includes approx. 150,000 members and offers the
opportunity to ask members questions concerning MAGIX products as well as
use the search function to search for specific topics or answers. In addition to
questions & answers, the knowledge pool includes a glossary, video tutorials and
a discussion forum. The multiple experts, found round-the-clock at
www.magix.info guarantee quick answers, which sometimes come within
minutes of a question being posted.
• Email support for MAGIX products:
For every new MAGIX product you will receive, as of date purchase, 12 months of
email based customer service.
Premium email support:
For priority support, or if you want the MAGIX support team to help with nonMAGIX related hardware problems you can purchase a Premium email support
ticket. Log in at http://support.magix.net and click on "Purchase access code",
the ticket is for a specific problem, and is valid until it is solved, it is not restricted
to an email.
Please note: To be able to use the Premium email support and free product email
support via the Internet, you have to register your MAGIX product using the serial
number provided. This can be found on the CD case of your installation CD or on the
inside of the DVD box.
• Additional telephone service:
Besides the large number of free customer service offers, we also offer a feebased telephone customer service.
11
12
Here you can find a summary of our technical support telephone numbers:
http://support.magix.net/
Mail (Europe): MAGIX Development Support, P.O. Box 20 09 14, 01194 Dresden,
Germany
Mail (North America): MAGIX Customer Service, 1105 Terminal Way #302, Reno,
NV 89502, USA
Please make sure you have the following information at hand:
• Program version
• Configuration details (operating system, processor, memory, hard drive, etc.),
sound card configuration (type, driver)
• Information regarding other audio software installed
MAGIX Sales Department
You can reach the MAGIX Sales Department workdays for help with the following
questions and problems:
•
•
•
•
Orders
Product consulting (pre-purchase)
Upgrade requests
Returns
Europe
Monday - Friday, 09:00-16:00 GMT
U.K.: 0203 3189218
Denmark: 45 699 18763
Sweden: 46 852 500713
Finland: 35 89 42419023
Norway: 47 210 35843
North America
9 am to 4 pm EST Mon-Fri
Phone: 1-305-722-5810
Before You Start
Before You Start
Package Contents
Installation & multimedia content DVD
The MAGIX Video Pro X5 installation manager is included on the installation DVD.
Printed and PDF manuals
The printed manual contains an overview of the most important functions of MAGIX
Video Pro X5.
If you have further questions, please read the complete documentation and a shortcut
pdf located in the program folder of MAGIX Video Pro X5. To read it, you will require
the free Foxit Reader program.
Installation
Step 1: Insert the program disc into the drive. The installation program starts up
automatically in Windows. If the disc doesn't run automatically,
• open the Windows Explorer and click the letter of the CD/DVD drive.
• Now double-click on "Start.exe" to start the installer.
Step 2: To begin the installation of MAGIX Video Pro X5, click on "MAGIX Video Pro
X5". The MAGIX Video Pro X5 installation program will appear.
Simply follow the instructions on screen to complete the installation process, and
then click "Continue". All files are copied onto the hard drive.
Step 3: Once the installation is complete, confirm by pressing "Finish". You can start
the program at any time using the Windows "Start" menu
13
14
Serial number
A serial number is included in each product. This serial number is required for the
installation of the software and enables usage of additional bonus services. Please
store this number in a safe place.
What can a serial number do?
With a serial number your MAGIX Video Pro X5 is clearly assigned to you and only
you. This way improved and more targeted customer service is made possible. Abuse
of the software can be prevented with a serial number, which ensures that optimum
the price/performance ratio continues is guaranteed.
Where can the serial number be found?
The serial number can be found on the reverse side of your CD/DVD case. If your
product is packed in a DVD box, then you'll find the serial number on the inside.
For the versions that have been especially optimized for the Internet (download
versions), you'll get your serial number for activating the software directly after
purchasing the product via email.
When will you need the serial number?
The serial number is required when you start or register MAGIX Video Pro X5 for the
first time.
Note: We explicitly recommend registering your product (free), since only then are
you entitled to download updates and use MAGIX support (view page 10) services.
Unlocking MAGIX Video Pro X5
After MAGIX Video Pro X5 has been installed and the serial number has been
entered, the software can be used for 30 days. After these 30 days have expired,
MAGIX Video Pro X5 must be activated.
Before You Start
System requirements
For Microsoft Windows XP | Vista | 7 | 8
Minimum configuration:
• Processor: Intel Core Duo with 1.83 GHz, AMD Dual-Core with 2.0 GHz
• RAM: 1GB
• Graphics card: Onboard graphics card with a screen resolution of at least 1024 x
768
• Sound card: Internal sound card
• Hard drive space: 1 GB (for minimum installation)
• Optical drive: DVD drive
Minimum requirements for HD/3D editing:
• Processor: Intel Core 2 Quad-core processor with 2.83 GHz (Intel Core i7
recommended), AMD Quad-core processor with 2.8 GHz
• RAM: 4 GB
• Graphics card: Dedicated graphics card with 512 MB VRAM or more
• Sound card: Multi-channel sound card recommended for Surround sound editing
• Hard drive space: 4 GB
• Optical drive: Blu-ray burner to create Blu-ray Discs
15
16
Introduction
What is MAGIX Video Pro X5?
MAGIX Video Pro X5 is a professional video editing program for Windows PC. All
common video formats can be imported directly without any conversion into a
proprietary format in an open timeline. The Hybrid Video Engine supports GPU
processing with OpenCL, CUDA and QuickSync. Editing options include realtime
effect editing, efficient three- and four-point cuts, intelligent mouse modes for fast
editing and a Multicam mode with auto synchronization on up to nine tracks. Based
on the high end audio engine from Samplitude, perfect synchronization of audio and
image is realized in realtime. Finished projects can be exported using efficient batch
rendering into broadcast formats to DVDs, AVCHD- and Blu-ray discs or uploaded
directly to common video portals and mobile devices.
Features
Recording
MAGIX Video Pro X5 features the following recording options:
• AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra/Video-DSLRs/XDCAM/NXCAM (and other
drives)*
• HDV camera: HDV camcorder
• DV camera: Mini DV camcorder or DV video recorder
• Video: Analog TV, video input, VCR, webcam
• Audio: Microphone, cassette recorder, MiniDisc player, record player
• Screen: PC monitor.
• Single frame: Single and series images from webcams, video recorders, video
cameras, or TV cards
*Import of AVC-Intra and DVCPRO possible after fee-based activation (view page
336)
Analog capture requires capture cards compatible with DirectShow. DV capture can
be performed through an OHCI-compatible IEEE 1394 host adapter (FireWire or
iLink). A TV card can be used to record programs from TV or from your video
recorder.
Introduction
Import and export formats
Supported import formats:
Video: AVI, DV-AVI, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, M2TS, MJPEG, MKV, MTS, MXF,
MXV, QuickTime, WMV(HD), VOB
Audio: AAC, Dolby®Digital Stereo/5.1 (downmix to stereo), MIDI, MP3, OGG, WAV,
WMA
Photo: BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, TIF, TGA
Supported export formats:
Video: AVI, DV-AVI, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, MXV, MJPEG, Quicktime,
WMV(HD)
Audio: DolbyDigital Stereo, DolbyDigital 5.1 (with video), MP3, WAV
Photo: BMP, JPEG
Note: For copy protection reasons, MPEG-4, MPEG-2, and Dolby Digital Stereo
must first be activated. Initial activation is free of charge. MP3 export requires
installation of Windows Media Player version 10 or higher.
Multicam editing
MAGIX Video Pro X5 enables multicam editing (view page 113) for up to 9 tracks. The
different camera recordings can be played back in sync and edited together as a single
version.
Editing
• Program and source monitors: To provide an optimal overview, these two
separate preview monitors are integrated for the source material and movie
arrangement respectively.
• The project folder is used for storing your material. It's useful for selecting the
necessary media for your current project. Use it to store video, audio, titling files,
and even edited versions or sections of films for use later in your projects.
• Picture optimization: This includes color improvement (RGB, saturation),
sharpness (focus, feathering), brightness regulator (brightness, contrast), and the
anti-flicker filter.
• Sound optimization: The equalizer allows you to manipulate the frequency
spectrum, which is useful for reducing peaks, for example. The compressor limits
the signal's dynamics. The StereoFX processor controls the position of the sound
within the stereo panorama. The De-noiser and De-hisser are professional noise
reduction tools for removing noise and hisses.
17
18
• Video effects: Such as creative filters, distortion, video mix (chroma key),
movement effects (e.g. camera/zoom or rotation), cropping, picture-in-picture
collages, video effect plug-in support, etc.
• Automatic scene recognition
• Slideshow Maker turns photo collages into spectacular multimedia shows
automatically.
• MAGIX Soundtrack Maker creates background music automatically.
Burnable disc formats
You will find the following burning options in the "Burn" area:
• DVD
• Blu-Ray disc
• AVCHD disc (on DVD and Blu-ray Discs)
In the "File" menu you can make and burn backup copies.
Multimedia editable disc menus
Included are many disc menu templates which offer selection options for movies and
chapters on the screen. Many of these are also available in 16:9 format. They can be
included during burning and give the disc a professional appearance.
Every menu template may be customized with personal photos, thematic animations,
3D captions, sound, intro videos, etc.
Notes for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro users
If you are used to working with MAGIX Movie Edit Pro, you can change the window
appearance to MAGIX Video deluxe "classic" view by going to "Window"> "Window
appearance" > "Minimal".
For all those who haven't used MAGIX Movie Edit Pro before, we recommend the
"Standard" window appearance. You have the most options available in this mode.
Below you will find a rough overview of the differences between MAGIX Video Pro X5
and MAGIX Movie Edit Pro.
Video monitors
• In the "Minimal" mode you will see only one preview monitor like in MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro, which is used as both a program and a source monitor. When the
project is stopped, you can select files in the Media Pool and play them back
using the transport controls. To play the arrangement again, you first must click
on the arranger.
Introduction
• The "Standard" appearance offers two preview monitors: a program monitor for
project preview in the arranger and a source monitor for preview of Media Pool
files. Both preview monitors have separate transport controls, so that Media Pool
preview and project playback can be controlled separately. For additional
information about the preview monitors, please read the corresponding section of
the "Interface" (view page 64) chapter.
Keyboard layout
The preset keyboard shortcuts are different and can be displayed in both modes via
"File -> Settings -> Keyboard shortcuts". MAGIX Video Pro X5 also allows familiar
shortcuts from Movie Edit Pro to be loaded if they are easier to work with. More
information about keyboard shortcuts can be found in the chapter "Keyboard
shortcut" (view page 325) and in the shortcut pdf located in the program folder of
MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Load files
• In MAGIX Video Pro X5, files are dragged (drag&drop) to the desired position in
the arranger or loaded via the commands from the insert menu. To learn more
about the paste menus, please read the "Paste Modes" section in the "Interface"
chapter.
• In Movie Edit Pro, files can also be loaded form the Media Pool by double clicking
them. Videos and images are placed in the first track at the position of the
playback marker. If another object is already located there, the new object will be
placed after the last object in the first track. Titles will appear on tracks 3 and 4,
additional audio material on track 5.
You may also change this behavior under "File -> Settings -> Program" via the tab
"System" and under "Behavior on double click".
Space bar behavior
In either program, use the space bar on your keyboard to start and stop. Pressing the
space bar again produces different effects according to the respective program:
• In Movie Edit Pro, the playback marker is placed at the last stop position.
• In MAGIX Video Pro X5, the playback marker is kept at the current position. This
corresponds with the functionality of a tape recorder when stopped.
Playback behavior may be switched via "File -> Settings -> Program" and then the
"Playback" tab.
Project folder
• In Movie Edit Pro, the project folder function is not available.
• MAGIX Video Pro X5 features the project folder as a separate folder on the right
side, which serves as an intermediate store or catch-all for all kinds of project
19
20
material. More information about this is available in the section "Project folder
(view page 62)" in the chapter "Workspaces".
Projects, movies and scenes
MAGIX Video Pro X5 works with "Projects", "Movies", and "Scenes". In order to work
quickly and intuitively, is it important to know the differences between these three
hierarchically-ordered terms.
Project
Movie
Scene
A "Project" includes everything that you want to include on a disc.
Normally this means one or more movies and a menu structure for
selecting movies for playback. Projects can be saved as "MVP" files on
your hard drive and can be loaded later to do further editing to the
movies.
A "Movie" can be one single video clip or a combination of clips and
photos. It can also include music, titles, transitions and much more.
Each movie can be exported individually as a video. The "project" can be
considered a type of drawer into which you can put multiple movies that
will be edited together and burned to the same disc.
Scenes are the main components of a movie. They may contain
integrated photos that are displayed as still shots or animated images.
Along with photos and videos, a movie has many other elements such as
titles, transitions, decorative elements, music, voiceover commentary
etc.
Summary: „Projects“ contain „Movies“ and „Movies“ contain „Scenes“. When you
burn a disc, the movies of a project appear as menu items and the scenes are the
menu items for each movie.
Introduction
Project management
The "Edit" area can be used for editing films and also for managing your projects, i. e.
here you can sort the order of the movies, add new movies, remove existing movies
from the project or rename the movies.
Each film in a current project can be controlled through its own tab above the tracks.
To rename, sort, load or delete movies, the easiest way is to right-click on one of the
tabs. You can then select the action you want from the context menu that appears.
21
22
Quick start
This chapter explains the basic functions of MAGIX Video Pro X5 with a step-by-step
introduction. A systematic description of all program functions can be found in the
following chapters.
Tip: Use the online tutorial videos that can be accessed in the "Help" menu. This
feature requires an Internet connection.
The program keyboard shortcuts (view page 325) for commonly used processes and
functions are also very helpful.
Program start
When you start MAGIX Video Pro X5 for the first time, the start dialog will appear.
This dialog allows you to either "Load an existing project" or "Create a new project".
You can also "Create a new project folder". All files belonging to this movie will be
saved there.
Additionally, you can also use movie templates (view page 274). Movie templates
offer a structure for quickly developing certain standard projects with the help of
included placeholders.
If you are looking for a quick start into the basic functions of MAGIX Video Pro X5, we
recommend switching into the "Basic mode" (view page 37), which can be found
under "Editing mode".
Quick start
We're still at the very beginning, so let's stick with keeping an overview of everything.
Click "OK" to end the dialog and continue.
Select, load, and play back videos
In the beginning, it's probably best to load a video file for test purposes and to get to
know the program functions.
• The Media Pool appears at the top right; four tabs provide access to all important
elements that are required for video projects. The first tab displays all usable files
(besides movies, also photos, images, audio files, and even RTF text files for
captions) in the current folder.
• Navigation works just like in other file managers: folders can be opened with a
double-click. Arrow buttons allow you to go one level up or down. You can also
display a folder tree featuring the folder hierarchy and then use the search
function (view page 57) to locate files according to different criteria.
• All files opened in the file list can be loaded and used. Find a video file, e.g. in the
format *.mpg, *mxv, or *.avi.
23
24
• In the upper-left area, you will see two preview monitors.
• The left program monitor is responsible for playback of objects in the arranger.
The right source monitor displays a preview of files in the Media Pool.
• To enable playback of movie files from the Media Pool in the right source
monitor, double-click the file in the file list first. Double-clicking loads the file in
the monitor first.
• This method lets you select and play back different video files. Drag the selected
file (hold down the mouse button) from the Media Pool down into the arranger.
An object appears at the location on the track where you release the mouse
button to represent this video file.
• Each object can be moved in any way in the arranger with the mouse, horizontally
on a track as well as vertically between tracks. Drag the video object on the first
track all the way to the left to the beginning of the track.
Note: If the video also has an audio track, it will be displayed in the same track. You
can learn how to separate image and sound in the "Objects" (view page 95) chapter.
Quick start
• Now the first file is in the Arranger, where it can be cut, edited and exported.
Now you can load additional files and videos and combine audio files on the
tracks.
• To play back the arranger, click the play button on the transport console under
the program monitor to the left.
Tip: An even easier way to control playback is by pressing the space bar on your
keyboard.
• During playback, a vertical line will move across the Arranger: this is the playback
marker that displays the current position. It can be set directly with a mouse click
in order to jump to certain positions.
• You can also define playback ranges, e.g. to freeze a certain position independent
of the playback marker. Clicking in the range bar above the first track lets you
define an in-point, i.e. the starting point of the playback range. If you right-click
further on, the end marker will appear to indicate the end point of the playback
range. The length of the playback area is shown in the center of the section
display.
• The in and out points can be moved with the mouse: Left-clicking positions the
in-point, and the right mouse button sets the out-point.
• To play back the range, click the "Play back range" button on the transport
control under the program monitor.
Now you know how to load and play back media files in different ways. Would you
like to try to make your own movie now?
• If you want to continue with your own video footage, select the "New movie"
option from the "File" menu and read the following chapters about video import.
• If you want to continue working with the test file, simply skip the following import
tutorial and begin reading the "Video editing (view page 28)" section.
25
26
Import video material from memory card
• Connect your memory medium (camera, USB stick, SD card or other) to the PC.
You may have to first turn your camera on.
• Click on the red button below the source monitor to open the record dialog.
• In the record dialog, click on "AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra".
Quick start
• The AVCHD import assistant will then open. Select your connected storage
devices as "video source". A file list will appear.
• In the file list, select all the recordings that you've imported from the device.
• You can preview all your recordings using the preview monitor in the middle of
the dialog in order to decide if they are suitable for your movie.
• After selecting all videos, in "Import options" you can select whether the
recordings should be directly placed into your movie project or simply copied to
your computer's hard drive (you can select the location in the next dialog). You
can also automatically delete your recordings after import.
27
28
Video editing
Timeline mode
All editing takes place in the arranger. All movies and scenes are represented in
accordance to their duration in the "Timeline mode": The longer the symbol is, the
longer is the scene represented by it.
Handles: All objects may be shortened by placing the mouse on one of the lower
object corners until the mouse cursor turns into a stretch symbol. You can now
squash the object as much as you like. At the top corners of every object you’ll find
two fade handles that can be adjusted to fade an object in or out. The handle at the
top center can be used to adjust the volume of audio objects and the transparency of
video objects.
Note: Video objects with a sound track will automatically be displayed on one track.
These have six, not five handles. For more information, read the "Objects" chapter.
Object selection: For advanced effects editing, the objects must be selected first.
Individual objects can be selected with the mouse. Objects will change color to show
Quick start
that they have been selected. Multiple objects can be selected by holding down the
"Shift" key. If you click next to an object, you can draw a rectangle with a held-down
mouse key. All objects contained therein will be selected.
Effect editing: Selected objects may be edited with the help of effects sound in the
Media Pool.
Settings for each effect may be found directly in the Media Pool. Most effects can be
controlled using keyframe animation or effect curves. Effect intensity is controlled
dynamically using single points (keyframes) or a drawable curve (effect curve). All
buttons for keyframe and effect curve animation can be found in the lower part of the
Media Pool after selecting the effect.
Note: To activate the effect curve, the first keyframe must be set first.
Context menu: The context menu also offers a number of object editing options. It is
opened by right-clicking on an object. Different trim editors can be opened which
enable an exact cut with different transition parameters. For video objects, there is
another context menu than for audio and title objects.
29
30
Remove unusable scenes
One of the most important work steps during import of your footage is cutting out
unusable scenes from the material. There are two options for this:
• Variant 1: The complete material is loaded into your project first and the unusable
scenes are cut out.
• Variant 2: Cut the material prior to importing it, and then proceed to import only
the scenes you need. This process is recommended for long movies with a lot of
editing; it functions either via the Media Pool or the project folder.
Cut videos in the project
Let's assume that you have already imported your film material into a project and
would now like to edit it.
• Play back your video by clicking "Play" on the program monitor's transport
control (or simply press the space bar on the keyboard).
• If during playback you have reached a scene which you would like to cut out, click
on the playback button again. The playback marker stays near the start of the
scene to be removed.
Tip: For long movies or for quick browsing, you can let the movie play fast forward
and follow the action on the program monitor. To do so, drag the playback marker
while holding down the mouse key across the timeline (but not too fast!).
• Set the playback marker at the start of the unused material. To get a better view,
we recommend using the zoom function (the +/- buttons at the bottom right of
the arranger).
• Press "T" on the keyboard. This will have the effect of cutting the current scene
into two sections at the position of the payback marker.
Quick start
• Repeat these steps for the end of the unusable scene. Find the end of the scene,
place the play marker as close as possible to the end point, and then press the "T"
key on the keyboard again.
• Now you have "isolated" the unusable scene and can simply delete it from the
movie using the "Del" key. Before this, the scene must be selected by clicking it
with the mouse.
• If you didn't work accurately during cutting, then don't worry; you can use the
object handles to stretch or shorten the remaining objects to recover or exclude
material from the deleted section.
31
32
• After deleting, a gap remains in your movie where the removed scene once was.
How do you remove gaps out of the film? Easy: You can drag the following
scenes back until the end of the first scene "docks" to the later material.
Remember to "take" all objects that are further behind, otherwise the gap will just
be "passed" to the end. To pull up later objects, use "All tracks" mouse mode,
since this automatically takes the objects on all tracks found later on the timeline
along with the object being moved.
Note: If your project has both a video and an audio track, it is usually necessary to
cut both tracks synchronously. After camera import, image and sound tracks are
combined into one object, so all cut and move actions effect both in the same
manner. However, if you have created a separate sound track, which isn't connected
to the image material, it is recommended that you create a group before your editing
operations. To do so, select the video object and the audio object via "Ctrl" + click,
and in the "Edit" menu select the "Group" option (or click the group tool).
All cutting functions (as well as all other editing processes in MAGIX Video Pro X5)
are non-destructive. This means that the original material on your hard drive will not
be altered.
Importing individual scenes from longer movies
If you have saved a longer video as a file on your hard disk and only want to use a
section of it for your project, then proceed as follows:
• Double click the desired file in the Media Pool. Double-click the file to load it in
the source monitor and play it back using the transport controls.
• Find the range which you would like to import. Position the playback marker
above the transport control at the start position of the range and click the "Set in
point" button.
Quick start
• Next, position the playback marker at the end of the section and click the "Set out
point" button.
• The currently selected range appears highlighted in blue in the range display. You
can playback this range separately with the "Playback range" button.
• All range limits can be moved by holding down the mouse button and dragging.
Once the range matches the section that you want to import, click on the preview
monitor and drag the section onto the track. An object will appear featuring the
material you wanted to import. If you're not sure where you would like to use the
section in the project, you can drag it into the project folder instead of onto the
track.
Tip: You can also edit files that are located in the project folder in the same way. A
shortened file also contains information in the project folder about in and out points
so that you don't always need to reset these in case the video needs to be reimported at a later time. You can also drag each file directly from the Media Pool
into the project folder.
Regroup scenes
You will often want to move specific scenes or even groups of scenes to a different
place within a film. This happens completely intuitively: Single scenes can be selected
in any view by clicking them and moving them to the desired position (drag & drop).
You can also create scene groups which can be moved together: "Ctrl" + mouse click
lets you select more than one scene, "Shift" + mouse click lets you select all of the
scenes that lie in between.
Finally, here are three tips for more extensive arranger work:
• With the mouse modes "All tracks" or for "One track" (view page 45) doesn't just
move the selected scene, but all objects that are located behind the object (one
track) or all tracks (all tracks).
• The commands "Group" (view page 287) and "Ungroup" (view page 287) let you
combine any scenes into groups which can then be moved together as a block.
33
34
• If cutting and moving around parts of your project has left it a little unorganized,
try using the project folder. The project folder is better suited for intermediate
storage of all of the objects you want to use in your movie. You can either move
all of the objects directly from the arranger into the project folder by dragging
them there (they will be removed from the corresponding track), or you can copy
the objects and paste them into the project folder. Hold down "Shift" while you
click to select multiple files. You can also drag sections of files or files from the
Media Pool and drag them directly into the project folder.
Note: Please ensure that the project folder is reserved for the respective project at
hand. The contents will be saved together with the project and made available the
next time the same project is opened, but not when another project is opened.
Publish videos
Burn DVDs and Blu-ray discs with interactive menus
You can burn your projects onto DVD or Blu-ray discs with an interactive menu.
Note: Authoring for DVDs and Blu-ray discs is the same for both formats.
For multiple films that are subdivided into individual chapters, the disc selection menu
becomes even more important, allowing you to jump to each movie or chapter using
your remote control. To make sensible chapter divisions in your movie, it should be
split into sensible sections. Place the play marker where you'd like to have it and
choose the option "Chapter marker" from the "Edit" menu (keyboard shortcut: Shift +
Enter). If you select the option "Automatic chapter markers", a chapter marker is
automatically placed at the beginning of every scene.
Quick start
You can switch to the "Burn" screen by pressing the corresponding button at the top
right.
The "Burn" screen has two views: "Preview" and "Edit". The "Preview" screen provides
fast loading for a menu template followed by burning. More detailed editing such as
activation/deactivation of menu entries, creation of new menu pages, or
individualization of templates takes place via the "Edit" screen.
Once the menu is finished, you may burn a disc to watch via your player.
Export video as file
Besides burning the project, it may also be exported as a video file. During export, the
entire arrangement will be recalculated into a single file, which will be saved in the
indicated folder on the hard drive. The available export formats are listed in the menu
"File -> Export film".
To place a video on the Internet, you fill find a direct connection to MAGIX Online
Album and platforms such as YouTube, Vimeo, Facebook and Videocloud under "File"
> "Online".
35
36
Edit mode
In the standard mode, MAGIX Video Pro X5 offers plenty of menus, toolbars and
controls, which can confuse beginners.
For simple video editing tasks, such as a rough cut or format conversion, the full range
of function in MAGIX Video Pro X5 isn't necessary. For this reason, the MAGIX Video
Pro X5 interface can be switched to a simplified, or basic mode. In this mode control
elements, menus and toolbars are reduced to the basic necessities.
Standard mode
The standard mode offers all MAGIX Video Pro X5 functions for advanced project
editing.
• Program and source monitor
• Complete Media Pool with "Fades", "Titles" and "Effects" tabs.
• The arranger which can be activated as scene overview, timeline mode and
multicam mode.
• Complete menus and toolbars
• Project folder
Edit mode
Basic mode
In basic mode all elements, menus and toolbars are reduced to a minimum.
• The window layout corresponds to the arrangement in Movie Edit Pro with
program monitor, Media Pool and project.
• The Arranger is replaced by a one-track Storyboard (view page 37). Here,
imported video material can be cut and arranged. Controls and menu commands
for effects and audio editing are hidden.
• Only standard fades and simple titles in preset fonts are possible.
• The Media Pool can be used solely for file import. The fades, titles and effects
tabs are hidden.
• Next to the buttons used for switching between the main screens Edit and Burn
(view page 220), there is an additional button Export (view page 39). Along with
the export dialog, the finished movie can be saved in various formats and
uploaded to Internet platforms.
• In the Burn screen, the control elements for menu template editing are missing.
37
38
Storyboard in basic mode
In the "Edit" screen in basic mode, the Arranger has been replaced with a Storyboard.
Pictures and video footage (including the audio track) are displayed as scenes in the
Storyboard. The scenes are all displayed the same way, irrespective of how long they
really are in the movie.
Note: With this kind of display, the playback marker moves in the movie at different
speeds during playback. Correspondingly, it moves slower in longer scenes.
You can load a video or image file by dragging it into the Storyboard from the Media
Pool using the mouse. To generate a preview of the video, drag the file into the
program monitor. The transport console no longer applies to the Storyboard, but plays
the video from the Media Pool.
A loaded file is made up of a single long "scene", which can be split into several
smaller scenes. You can do this manually using the Cut button (view page 46) in the
lower toolbar or using the function Automatic scene detection (view page 259)
(Shortcut Shift + Z).
You can then re-arrange the scenes using drag & drop and delete unwanted scenes.
The following buttons are found on every scene:
Add titles and text: Click on the "T" button to add a title. Enter your
text straight into the program monitor. You can also change the size
of the title. The title is added at the beginning of the scene and is
displayed for 5 seconds.
Set volume: The volume in the soundtrack of each scene can be set
with the loudspeaker button.
Edit mode
Effects menu: This button provides access to a menu with
copy/paste functions, some special functions ("Scene recognition",
Audio/video offset for videos, "Cut automatically to fit screen" and
"Change photo length" for pictures) and Object properties.
Transitions/Fades: Click on the large button between the scenes and
select a scene transition (or "Fade"). You can choose between a
"Crossfade" and a "Thru black" that each last one second. Selecting
"Cut (no fade)" removes the fade.
Rotate image (only with image files): If an image or photo is on its
side or upside down, click on this button. The photo will rotate 90
degrees.
Display duration: The display duration for each scene is shown here
in [Minutes]:[Seconds]:[Frames]. With image files, you can click the
time display and adjust the display duration in the dialog that appears.
This duration can be applied to all photos in the movie.
Export
The "Export" button opens a dialog containing the most
important export functions. With it, the finished movie can be
saved in various formats, exported to various devices and
uploaded to Internet platforms.
Save on computer (view page 226)
Place on MAGIX Online Album (view page 235)
Export to device
Upload to Internet (view page 234)
Export as Media Player (view page 236)
39
40
Switching between standard and basic modes
To switch MAGIX Video Pro X5 into basic mode, select "Window" > "Editing mode" >
"Basic mode".
Note: If you switched into basic mode by accident and your MAGIX Video Pro X5
project contains cut and edited audio and video material on multiple tracks, this
arrangement will not be changed. However, it is not recommended to work in basic
mode because the effects on other tracks during editing in Storyboard aren't
predictable. For this reason, in this case you should switch back into standard mode.
Tip: If you switch from basic mode back into standard mode, by going to "Window"
> "Window arrangement" > "Resent window arrangement" you can restore the
previous arrangement of MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Work screens
Work screens
This chapter will provide an overview of the the screens that available in MAGIX
Video Pro X5.
Activate main screen
MAGIX Video Pro X5 contains two views where all work is executed:
• The "Edit" screen is the main view. Load the videos here and edit them in a
project window.
• The "Burn" screen is a special view for burning discs. This especially involves
design on a selection menu, for example as used by DVDs and other storage
devices.
The above right allows you to switch between these screens.
41
42
"Edit" screen
1
Top toolbar (view page 43): Here you will find buttons for quick access to
important commands.
2 Menu bar: This contains important MAGIX Video Pro X5 functions.
3 Program and source monitor (view page 64): Video and image objects are
displayed here.
4 Media Pool: Using the four tabs, you can reach your PC's folders, various
transitions, titles and effects.
5 Switch for overview mode and Multicam mode: Here you can switch into
overview mode. In it, all objects on the first track are displayed, allowing quick
scene re-sorting. The right button activates the Multicam mode (view page 113).
6 Lower toolbar: In Timeline mode, here you can select between various mouse
modes for various edits, among others.
7 Timeline: Here you can define the playback range. It is equipped with a time
scale.
8 Peakmeter: The peakmeter shows the sum soundtrack volume at the moment.
9 Project clipboard (view page 62): Here you can collect all files needed for the
project.
10 Arranger (view page 50): All files can be dragged from the Media Pool or project
clipboard via Drag & Drop onto the tracks.
11 Scroll bars: The lower scroll bar can be stretched and contracted for zooming
with the mouse. The right scroll bar zooms into the tracks vertically. Click on the
edge of the scroll bars while holding the mouse button to change the visible part
in the arrangement window.
Work screens
Note: Various interface elements are only available in the default, "Standard" display
mode ("Window" > "Window arrangement").
Toolbars
Upper button bar
The upper button bar can be found in the monitor to the top left. It has the following
functions:
New project
Creates a new MAGIX Video Pro X5 project. A dialog with settings for a new
disc project or a new film (view page 245) opens to get started.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + N
Load project
With this option you can load a project or a media file. Please note that all
media files associated with it must be loaded along with a project. MAGIX
Video Pro X5 will search for all used sounds and video files in the folders in
which they were located when the move was saved.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + O
Save project
The current movie is saved with the name displayed in the project window. If
you have not yet specified a name for your project, a dialog will open wherein
MAGIX Video Pro X5 asks you to do so.
Please note: In the project file (*.MVP), all information about the used media files,
cuts, effects, and titles are saved, but not the picture and sound material itself. This is
found in the recorded or imported media files that remain unchanged during the entire
MAGIX Video Pro X5 editing process. To save the full movie into a dedicated
directory, for instance to continue editing on a different PC, please use the command
"Copy movie and media into directory".
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + S
43
44
Undo
With this command you can undo the last changes you made. This way, it's no
problem if you want to try out critical operations. If you don't like the result,
then you can always revert to the previous state by using "Undo".
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until now,
allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings. In
general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Z
Redo
This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until now,
allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings. In
general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + Y
MAGIX News Center
The MAGIX News Center features links to current online tutorials and tips & tricks on
the software application examples. The "News" is indicated by color according to
content:
• Green indicates practical tips & tricks for the software
• Yellow reports the availability of new patches and updates
• Red for special offers, contests and questionnaires
If no new messages are present, the button will appear gray. When the MAGIX News
Center is clicked, all of the available information will be displayed. Click the messages
to reach the corresponding website.
Work screens
Lower toolbar
The lower toolbar is located just above the first track. It has the following functions:
Object
This is the preset mouse mode for individual objects that is used the most
often.
Left clicking selects an object. Holding down the mouse button moves the selected
object. Right clicking opens the context menu.
Shortcut:
6
One track
This mouse mode behaves similar to the mouse mode "All tracks". When
moving objects, only those objects will be moved that are located on the same
track after the selected object.
Keyboard shortcut:
8
All tracks
This mouse mode behaves similar to "Object" mouse mode. However, when
objects are moved, all of the objects behind the selected object are also
moved.
The complete background component of the arrangement, i.e. all objects and gaps on
all tracks, will therefore be maintained during any movement.
This is useful for moving a complete arrangement, e. g. to insert new opening credits
or to close gaps.
Keyboard shortcut:
7
Mouse modes
MAGIX Video Pro X5 offers special mouse modes for different kinds of editing.
These may be selected using the small arrow next to the button.
45
46
Stretching
This special mode enables the length of objects to be adjusted. The object is
played back completely and the playback speed is adjusted to the stretched
object length.
Video objects are therefore accelerated or decelerated accordingly. Audio objects are
stretched or pinched via timestretching, but without creating any changes to the pitch
itself.
Attention: If the object is to be animated with effects curves, then the option
"Connect curve length with object length (view page 150)" should also be set.
Shortcut:
0
Curve
This mouse mode is used especially for drawing effects curves.
Effects curves control the level of the effect: The higher the curve point is, the more
intense the respective effect parameter will be at this position. These may be used for
the video and image objects of the image tracks as well as for the audio objects of the
sound tracks.
More information about this can be found in the chapter "Animate objects", section
"Editing object effects curves".
Shortcut:
9
Preview audio
This mode allows you to preview audio objects (as long as the mouse button is
held down).
In this mode, objects cannot be moved or changed.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + 6
Cut button
MAGIX Video Pro X5 offers various modes for video editing. They can be
opened using the small arrow next to the button.
Work screens
Split
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker is
positioned. This way, two free-standing objects are created.
Shortcut:
T
Remove start
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker is positioned and
removes the material before the playback marker.
Keyboard shortcut:
Z
Remove end
This command cuts a selected object at the playback marker position and
removes the material behind the playback marker.
Shortcut:
U
Hint: If the commands "Split" and "Remove beginning/end" are applied without a
selection, all objects at the position of the playback marker are cut.
Remove scene
This command allows you to completely remove selected objects. The parts
that follow will be automatically moved to the end of the object in front of the
object to be removed.
Shortcut:
Ctrl + Del
Split movie
Splits movie at the playback marker position into two sections within one
project. These can be individually controlled using the "Window" menu or the
button "Select movie for editing" (see above).
Shortcut:
Alt + Y
Special functions to insert new objects
MAGIX Video Pro X5 has various modes for inserting new objects from the
Media Pool. They can be opened using the small arrow next to the button.
Before inserting new files, the insertion mode should be checked or set. There are two
options for using the modes:
47
48
• You can either first select one or several files in the Media Pool and then click on
the insert button in the lower toolbar
• Or you can hover the mouse over the file to be inserted and click on one of the
import buttons in the window that appears.
Apply automatically
Pastes the file selected in the Media Pool into the arranger. Video and image
objects will always be placed behind the last object into the first track; audio
and text objects are separated into different tracks.
Single-track ripple
Inserts an object from the Media Pool at the position of the playback marker
and simultaneously moves the objects on the track following it.
• In contrast to automatic placement, with track ripple, all objects will be placed at
the position of the playback marker. Objects on the target track are automatically
moved behind the inserted object. Bordering tracks are unchanged.
• Videos and images will be loaded to the first track, as usual. If another object is
found at the playback marker position, then it will be cut continued at the end of
the inserted object (so that the inserted object can start exactly at the point of
insertion).
Multitrack ripple
The object selected in the Media Pool will be inserted on the target track at the
position of the playback marker. All objects found at the playback marker
position will be split and moved down the length of the inserted object. All
objects on the track located further on will also be moved.
• In contrast to automatic insertion, all objects will be inserted at the position of the
playback marker.
• Videos and images will be loaded to the first track, as usual. If another object is
found at the playback marker position, then it will be cut continued at the end of
the inserted object (so that the inserted object can start exactly at the point of
insertion).
• If other objects are located at the playback marker position, these will also be
separated and moved further along the track.
• Objects lying further along on all tracks will be moved further down.
Replace
Replaces the selected object with an object selected in the Media
Pool.
Work screens
Overwrite
Overwrites the object in the target track at the position of the start marker
with the object selected in the Media Pool.
Hint: In contrast to "Replace", no length adjustment takes place. With "Replace", any
downstream objects are moved, while "Overwrite" overwrites downstream objects
as well (sometimes only partially), depending on the length of the object being
inserted in comparison to the object being overwritten.
Title editor
Opens the Title editor for the selected photo, video, or title object.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + T
Set chapter marker
Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This creates a
chapter entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being burned to disc.
You can rename the chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename". The
new name will appear in the chapter menu (view page 203).
Shift + Enter
Keyboard shortcut:
Object grid
Use this button to switch the object grid on and off. When the object grid is
switched on, the objects snap into place beside one another so that everything
fits in seamlessly.
Form group
All selected objects are assigned to a group which may then be selected and
edited jointly by clicking the mouse.
Shortcut:
G
Ungroup objects
This command splits an object group into separate objects.
Shortcut:
Shift + G
49
50
Mute button
This button mutes the sound output. Clicking the triangle provides access to
settings for scrubbing (view page 201) and selection of the audio track for
multi-audio tracks (view page 198).
Mixer
With this option you can open and close the real-time mixer. Further information can
be found in the Mixer (view page 190) chapter.
Shortcut:
M
Arranger
The arranger offers a professional editing screen for post-production.
Overview mode
The “Scene overview” mode is a special view that improves manageability and
categorization of scenes. All scenes are listed one after the other (in multiple lines,
like in a text program) and can be copied, cut, moved, deleted and inserted.
Work screens
"Overview" mode does not indicate start, playback, or end markers. The scene which
is currently being played has a frame around it.
The zoom slider enables the view
to be enlarged or reduced.
This controller also specifies how many scenes are displayed. The smaller the preview
pictures, the more will fit onto the overview.
Maximize: Use this button to maximize the scene overview to fullscreen mode.
Timeline mode
In the Timeline mode, your movies and scenes are shown in proportion to their length:
The longer the object in the track, the longer the corresponding movie.
You also have direct access to all media files such as titles, effects, etc. currently
being used in the movie.
Multicam mode
The Multicam mode is an expanded timeline mode, where you can edit together
scenes shot with different camera perspectives, a process called Multicam editing
(view page 113). The top two tracks serve as target tracks for copying sound and video
from two different source tracks.
Tracks
The arranger offers tracks for multimedia material positioning and editing. The
number of displayed tracks can be defined in "File" > "Settings" > "Movie".
In principle, any object type may be placed on any of the tracks. Video and image
objects may also be combined with MIDI and audio objects on any of these tracks.
The maximum length of a movie is restricted to 6 hours.
At the start of every track there is a track header.
51
52
Lock symbol: With this symbol you can lock the complete track and all objects
located on it.
Track number: For quick orientation, all tracks are numbered.
Maximize track: Enlarges the track. This way, you can easier edit details, such
as edit transitions.
Solo: Switches the track into "solo". Only this track will be played during
arrangement playback.
Hide video, image and title objects: All visible objects become transparent.
Audio objects remain audible.
Transparency slider: Here you can set the transparency for the entire track.
Mute: Switches all audio objects on the track to mute. Video, image and title
objects will continue to be played back.
Volume control: Sets the volume for all audio objects on the track.
Track name: The name of the track. You can freely select the name by clicking
on the name field and typing the name. To apply, press the enter key.
A right-click on the track header opens the context menu, where you will find the
following options:
• MultiCam > Source track: Here you can activate/deactivate a track as a source
track.
• Multicam > Master audio track: Here you can define the master audio track for
Multicam editing (view page 115).
• DVD audio track: If you are planning to burn several audio tracks (for example,
for multiple languages) to a DVD or Blu-ray, for tracks containing only audio, you
can determine the position on which the current track should be found. As soon
as you select an option from a submenu, a dialog opens, where you must give
your audio track a name (such as "English"). For more information, read the
"Audio editing" (view page 198).
• Track height: Set whether the selected track or all tracks should be displayed as
small, large or in standard size.
You can also adjust the size using your mouse. To do so, drag the lower border of
a track box downward using a mouse.
Work screens
Zoom
The vertical zoom function sets the number of
visible tracks. On many tracks zooming is useful
for selectively editing a track or an object in full
view.
Use the horizontal zoom functions to set up the visible section of the arrangement on
the timeline.
Clicking and dragging on the bottom border of a track allows you to adjust the height
of the display.
Object zoom: Vertical and horizontal zoom stages are enlarged so that all of
the selected objects are displayed at maximum size.
Optimize view: Displays the complete arrangement in full width. Zoom will
be set to 100%.
When the function is turned off, the old zoom level will be reactivated.
Scroll
The scroll bars serve to navigate in the arrangement. This enables the visible section
of the arranger to be moved.
The zoom level may be changed via the horizontal scroll bar by clicking the bar's edge
and dragging.
Tip: To zoom and scroll, it is recommended to use keyboard shortcuts (view page
326).
53
54
Grid
The arranger surface features a frame-exact snap grid. This ensures that video and
image objects snap exactly to the borders of a frame.
The snap stages depend on the frame rate specified in the movie settings ("File ->
Settings -> Movie"). Choose between Europe's conventional frame rate for PAL (25
frames per second) and America's and Japan's conventional frame rate NTSC (29.97
frames per second) or any other manually set frame rate.
When moving an object, the position display indicates at which frame the first image
of the object is shown.
The position is displayed in the form of a
tooltip when moving the object.
It indicates
"Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames".
Note: Audio objects may be moved sample-precise. That means that they do not
move along a frame grid if they are not grouped with a video object.
In addition to the constantly active frame grid, an object grid may also be activated.
This ensures that two consecutive objects will seamlessly snap together even if they
are on different tracks. This avoids undesired gaps or overlaps.
The object grid may be activated/deactivated via the magnet symbol in the
lower toolbar.
Preview rendering
You can access the preview rendering options by pressing this button.
Work screens
Media Pool
The structure and functioning of the Media Pool is similar to Windows Explorer with
the only difference being that the Media Pool only displays usable files. This is used to
access and load multimedia files of all kinds: photos and other image files, video files,
audio files, transitions, titles, effects, and also complete projects.
Note: The Media Pool displays the files on your hard drive. If you delete files here,
you won't be able to find them again using Windows Explorer.
If you hover the mouse pointer over a media file, three icons for the options will
appear: preview, range import and complete import.
• Preview: All available media can be previewed using the preview function. If you
click on the playback icon, the file will be played back in the preview monitor.
Video and image files are displayed and audio files are played back through the
sound card. There are previews for the templates and effects included to make it
clear how they will function.
• Range import: You can define an import range using buttons for setting an in- and
out-point in the source monitor.
• Complete import: This button will import the complete file into the Arranger.
55
56
When importing using the import buttons, you can set (view page 47) various
insertion modes.
You can also load files from the Media Pool by dragging & dropping them. You can
even drag & drop entire folders into the Arranger. If you want to load several files
simultaneously, you first have to select them in the Media Pool.
• Click on the selected entries one after the other while holding down "Ctrl".
• If you want to load a sequence of files, hold the "Shift" key and click on the first
entry and then on the last. All entries in between will be selected.
• By holding down the left mouse button you can drag out a selection box over
multiple image files to select them. "CTRL + A" selects every entry contained in a
Media Pool folder.
Tip: Improve access to your media folder by creating a link in the "Import" area of
the Media Pool. You can do this by right-clicking on one of the entries and selecting
"Create link". Select the media folder and click "OK" to confirm.
Note: All links are automatically deleted if the function "Reset standard program
settings" ("Edit" menu > "Settings") is used.
Preview function
A preview function for all of the files in the Media Pool can be started by double
clicking or by pressing the playback button on the source monitor.
The transport control function in the source monitor allows you to select sections
from a longer video file in the Media Pool and load them. Read the "Add objects into
the project" (view page 64) section.
Importing
Navigation buttons
The navigation buttons let you navigate through your computer’s drives and folders.
Forward/
back
These buttons access the previously viewed folders.
Higher
directory
This button accesses the next highest folder level.
Folder tree
Here you can activate a folder tree to navigate through
your computer system.
Search
The search function allows you to find specific files
quickly. You may specify your search according to file
type, date, or certain folders.
Work screens
Browse
history list
and path
details
Options
The path information for the current folder is displayed in
the center above. Use the arrow button to open the
menu to find the folders you previously visited.
Display
options
Settings for how detailed the entries should be listed
may be specified here.
Zoom
A zoom slider can be used to set the number and size of
visible symbols in the "Large symbols" view.
All functions of the context menu (switch views,
rename, or delete files, etc.) can also be accessed
via the options button.
Search
The Media Pool has an easy search function for finding files on the computer. It may
be activated and turned off again with the shown button.
File name: Enter any part of the name of the file you are looking for in the "File name"
field. The X symbol deletes the entry. A "?" may be used as a placeholder for a single
character, and "*" for any number of characters.
File type: Here you can enter a file name extension. Multiple entries are separated
using a semicolon. Below the entry field, various presets may be selected for oftenused file name extensions.
Date: Here, you can set time period limits on your search. Choose an entry from the
list.
Folder: If you don't want to search the entire computer, but only look on certain drives
or in a single folder, you can define a certain search path.
Search depth: Here you have various options that determine whether additional
locations should be searched.
• Search indexed locations and the selected folder
• Search indexed locations, the selected folder and personal files.
• Search indexed locations, the selected folder, personal files and the project file.
57
58
"Indexed locations" are folders, which are searched and cataloged in Windows via the
index list. If the index list is activated, the files in the indicated folders will be indexed
while the computer is idling, so that the user's search query may be completed faster.
Note: In Microsoft Windows XP, the indexing service is usually deactivated by
default. The search functions in Windows Vista® may be installed with the current
version of "Windows Search". They make it possible to easily add to the indexing
service. Please refer to the installation instructions from Microsoft.
Computer
The link button "Computer" displays the drives in the Media Pool. All drives will be
listed along with their drive letters and can be opened with a double click.
User directory
The second button featuring the user's name opens their personal folder in the Media
Pool.
My media
The "My media" button lets you select "Projects", "My videos", "My music", "My
images", and "Recordings".
Projects: Here you can switch to the folder where your projects and films are usually
stored.
You will find the "Show project contents" function in the context menu of a project.
Using this function, you can display all objects of a project and copy them into the
current project, retaining the editing and effect state of the object. This means that
you don't have to edit the objects again to keep the status of the "old" project. But you
can certainly continue editing the transferred object. These changes will be then
saved in the current project.
My videos: Displays all usable files found in "My documents\My videos."
My music: Displays the contents of the "My Documents\My Music" folder. MAGIX
Music Manager also suggests this folder for importing your music collection into the
database.
Slideshow music: This features the music that is included for dubbing.
My pictures: Switches to the "My documents\My pictures" folder. This folder is often
used by digital cameras and scanners to store transferred images by default. The
included MAGIX Photo Manager program also uses this folder (e.g. during image
import).
Work screens
Recordings: MAGIX Video Pro X5 specifies standards for all recordings.
MAGIX tools
The "MAGIX tools" link selects links to "Downloads", "Database", "Online Album",
and "Internet Media".
XAR animations: Here you will find various elements, which you can design with the
help of Xara Designer Pro and use in your projects. As soon as you drag one of the
elements into the Timeline, Xara Designer Pro will automatically open with the
corresponding element. You can find additional information about Xara Designer Pro
at http://pro.magix.com.
Downloads: This buttons gives you access to media files downloaded with Catooh.
Data base: This button opens the program-spanning database view. Right clicking
opens the database search. The database first has to be created using the supplied
additional program, MAGIX Photo Manager.
Online Album: With this button you can access MAGIX Online Album directly. This
provides a shortcut to uploading and deleting data. To do this, you must first register
on MAGIX Online Album.
There are many ways to upload data:
• While holding "Ctrl" down, select the data to be uploaded in the Media Pool, and
select "Copy" in the context menu (opened by right clicking). Switch to the
MAGIX Online Album screen, open the desired folder, and select "Paste" in the
context menu.
• In the Media Pool, click on "Online Album", and go to the desired directory. Open
the Windows Explorer, select the desired data with "Ctrl" held down, and drag it
into the Media Pool.
Both options will result in your desired data being uploaded to your MAGIX Online
Album.
Note: This function requires Internet access. To gain access, make sure you have
your log in information (email address and password) ready.
Internet media: Opens the integrated browser (view page 322) from MAGIX Video
Pro X5. It offers you the option of collecting media directly from the Internet, for
example for use in your current project.
59
60
Fades
Here you can find all fades from MAGIX Video Pro X5, sorted into various categories.
One click on a category displays all of the fades that are contained.
To load a fade, drag it with a held-down mouse key onto the object, into which you
would like to fade.
You can find additional information in the "Fades" section of the "Objects (view page
100)" chapter.
Title
This displays the title settings and the title editor. These presets are sorted into
different categories and may be loaded by double-clicking or drag & drop. The 3D title
templates are also located here.
The text featured by title objects may be changed directly in the program monitor by
double-clicking.
Effects
This provides access to the effects that are sorted into the various categories. Read
more about this in the chapter "Effects" (view page 123).
Video effect templates
Here you can find pre-configured effect templates that can be dragged-and-dropped
onto a video or image object. These effect templates consist of a combination of
various effect settings which you can adjust in the appropriate effect dialogs.
In the "Video mix effects" subfolder you will find templates for mixing two video or
image objects. To do so, two video or image objects have to lie on two tracks directly
above or below the other. To use a mix effect template, drag on the lower object.
Video effects
Here you can find adjustable effects for video and photo objects. The effects can be
set only after selecting an object in the respective effects dialog. For more
information, go to the "Video effects in the Media Pool" (view page 128) section in the
"Effects" chapter.
Movement effects
These are movement effects you can use to animate the frame by using zoom or
camera movements. For more information go to the "Effects" chapter, section
"Movement effects in Media Pool" (view page 137).
Work screens
Stereo3D
This accesses the program's Stereo 3D functionality. Please read the corresponding
chapter "Stereo 3D". (view page 163)
Audio effects
Here you will find many audio effect templates such as echo, reverb, equalizer,
compressor, etc. Read the "Audio editing" (view page 171) for more information.
Design elements
Collages: work similarly to picture-in-picture effects, but employ multiple objects.
Depending on the collage, arrange the selected objects one after the other and drag
the collage onto the first object.
Test images: Professional test images are available to calibrate your system.
Backgrounds: The color fields are a collection of various backgrounds that can be
used to create your own color fades or as backgrounds for text. The special "User"
template opens a color selection dialg where you can choose the desired color.
Image objects: Here you will find various image objects such as black bars, arrows
and symbols for illustrations.
You can find additional information in "Effects" chapter, in the section "Design
element in Media Pool".
My Presets
Here you will find the folder for your own effect templates. For more details, please
read the "My Presets in Media Pool" section in the "Effects" chapter (view page 144).
Additional Effects
Here you will find all available effect plug-ins. Please read the "Additional effects in
the Media Pool" section in the "Effects" chapter.
Various file list view modes
All supported multimedia files and subfolders of the currently selected folder are
displayed in the file list. Three different views (list, detail, large symbols) can be set by
right-clicking on the Media Pool context menu.
61
62
List: Only file names are listed. This
view mode displays the most files
simultaneously.
Details: For each media file, its type,
size and date of last change will be
displayed next to its name.
Large symbols can be quite useful
because they show a preview frame for
each movie and picture file. This allows
you to sort through the material
quicker.
As soon as you activate this display,
the zoom function will appear. With it,
you can additionally magnify
thumbnail images.
Work screens
Project folder
The project folder is a type of clipboard for files or objects. The possible applications
in this case are diverse:
• Material storage: Interesting files
from the Media Pool can be
combined in the project folder
before loading them from there
into the project.
• Cutting: You can cut different
sections from longer videos in
the project folder in order to use
them as separate objects in the
arrangement.
• Exchange: You can move finished
objects from the arranger into the
project folder in order to use
them in other projects.
The project folder supports drag & drop in either direction which allows you to move
elements from the project folder into the arrangement or move objects or object
groups from the arrangement into the project folder.
The context menu (view page 318) for project folder elements enables these to be
saved individually as takes (*.tk2) in order to use them in other projects again; the
entries may also be renamed.
Opens the import dialog. As an alternative to dragging & dropping from
the Media Pool, this dialog enables a file to be loaded into the project
folder.
This adds a virtual folder to the project folder. No additional subfolders
can be created inside a folder.
Save or load the contents of the entire project here in order to use it in
other projects.
This button accesses the next highest folder level.
Search field: MAGIX Video Pro X5
searches through all file names in
the project folder for the text entered
and then lists the results.
63
64
Settings for how detailed the entries in the project folder should be listed
can be made here.
Program and source monitor
MAGIX Video Pro X5 features two video monitors: a program monitor for object
image output in the arranger and a source monitor for previewing files in the Media
Pool or project folder.
Setting up the preview monitor
Program and source monitors can be set up in various ways:
• The size of each monitor can be adjusted. This can be done by clicking the screen
with the right mouse button and selecting the desired size from the context
menu, either from the presets submenu or user-defined ("Other resolution").
• Every monitor can be positioned freely. To do this, click on the top bar of the
monitor window and drag it with the mouse button held down to the position you
want. This may be a separate monitor, for example, where you can maximize the
window.
Fullscreen view
The option "Video monitor fullscreen" in the context menu maximizes the monitors.
Alternatively, you can simply double-click on one of the monitors or select the desired
monitor with a mouse click and press Alt + Enter.
You can also shift the monitors in full screen mode and access the context menu
(right mouse button). There, you can also hide and display the transport control, apart
from the regular entries.
Tip: Using the "Edit video effects" option in the context menu you can display Media
Pools effect settings and edit effects directly inside the fullscreen display.
"Esc" returns you to the normal view (or click on "smaller" button to the right in the
fullscreen mode).
Work screens
Movie Overview
The option "Movie Overview" in the "Window" menu enables an overview of the
entire Arranger. All objects in the Arranger will be displayed in the program monitor.
The overview display is especially recommended for work with long movies because
the reduced overview in the program monitor and the zoomed detailed view in the
Arranger present a good combination.
The movie overview can be used for moving around in the movie and for editing
certain parts:
• When you click on a certain object in the program monitor, the Arranger will
zoom into that object.
• You can use the mouse to draw a frame in the preview monitor – the
corresponding section will be zoomed in the Arranger.
• When you move the playback marker in the program monitor, the Arranger
playback marker will also move correspondingly.
Tip: If you use this option very often, then try using the corresponding keyboard
shortcut ("Shift + A").
Monitor zoom
The preview images of both monitors may be zoomed in and out to examine specific
details in the image more closely (zoom in) or to reduce the image so that black
edges result for use of animations (view page 151).
• Click on the preview monitor and zoom out of the video image by holding down
"Ctrl" and using mouse wheel.
Transport control
Both transport controls enable the video material to be played back.
Range: Change the range between the in and out points
by clicking above the playback functions.
Playback marker: This marker indicates the location of the image
currently displayed on-screen.
65
66
Set in/out points: Defines the start and end of the playback range.
To the start: This button sets the playback marker to the start of the
current area.
Playback by a frame: This button sets the playback marker just behind
the current frame and plays it back.
Play/stop (pause): The playback button in the middle starts playback.
A second click ends playback.
Tip: In the menu "File -> Settings -> Program -> Playback", you can set whether the
playback marker will go back to the start position (stop) after the second click or
following the appropriate shortcut (space bar), or if it should stay at the current
position (pause function).
Range playback: This button plays back the current range.
To the end: This button sets the playback marker to the end of the current
range.
Jog wheel: Using this wheel, you can move by single
frames within the video and position the playback
marker exactly at high zoom levels.
Shuttle control: The further the slider control is moved
to the side, the quicker the arrangement is played in the
corresponding direction. This way a certain position can
be reached quickly.
Smoother playback with a click
If performance deteriorates due to hardware limitations, high-res source material or
project complexity, you can "activate" a smoother preview during editing using this
function.
In the selection menu, you can set which
functions you want to use for the optimized
preview when this button is activated: reducing
resolution, reducing frame rate, deactivating
plug-ins and/or effects.
"Reduce resolution" and "Reduce frame rate" are preset.
Work screens
If you have activated the proxy file function in the start dialog or inMovie settings
(view page 239), you will additionally see "Use proxy objects".
Adjusting the workspace
The source and program monitors, the project folder, the arranger, and the Media
Pool can be shut off completely or freely repositioned. Some "Edit" screen
configurations can be saved and recalled at any time via "Window" > "Window
arrangement" > "Save".
The first three user-defined window arrangements will automatically be assigned to
F10, F11 and F12 keys, and by going to "File" > "Settings" > "Key shortcuts..." you can
assign Keyboard shortcuts (view page 333) to any additional ones.
Tip: You can switch between the last used window, even if it's unsaved, and the
current view using the Ctrl + F9 shortcut.
The "Burn" screen
1
2
3
4
5
Menu preview: Here you can see a selection menu preview. For more
information, read the "Edit disc menu" (view page 276) chapter.
Switch views: Here you can switch between preview and edit views.
Remote control: Here you can check how your future disc will react when you
press the buttons of your player's remote control.
Output:Before burning the project, select the desired format.
Play preview: Play the preview menu and test how it works with the remote
control.
67
68
6
7
8
Template category: Select the desired section from various categories with
different menus.
Menu templates: Switch between different templates for designing your menus.
Use templates: Here you can select whether a template should be assigned to a
page, the menu or all menus on a disc.
You will find more information in the "Burning" (view page 220) section.
Video recording
Select the recording method
To start recording, click on the red "Record" button below the preview monitor.
The following selections are possible:
• AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra for AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra cameras, as
well as for digital cameras or video DSLR with memory cards or hard drives as
well as P2 memory cards for XDCAM. This option may also be used to import
media from removable storage devices, USB devices, or hard drives as a clearly
laid-out alternative to the Media Pool.
Video recording
HDV camera: For HDV cameras
DV cameras: For mini DV cameras and DV video recorders
Video for analog video cameras, analog TV, VCR, webcams and others.
Audio for microphones, cassette recorders, MiniDisc players, record players
and others.
• Screenshot: Records directly from the computer monitor.
• Frame for snapshots or image series from analog video cameras, analog TV,
VCRs, webcams and others.
•
•
•
•
AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra
This option accesses a universal import dialog that is not only suitable for AVCHD,
DVCPRO, or AVC-Intra cameras, but also for external hard drives, P2 memory cards,
photo, and movie cameras that contain usable files equally. MAGIX Video Pro X5
automatically recognizes the file structures and shows only individual takes, making
import convenient and easy.
Alternatively, these drives may also be controlled directly via the Media Pool. The
import dialog also features its own display filters and additional options for
convenience.
Note: DVCPRO and AVC-Intra import is optional and must be activated (view page
334) for a fee.
Connect camera
Suitable cameras are essentially available in three varieties:
• Cameras featuring removable data storage: These cameras have a slot for a
memory card. Your computer should have a card reader for the corresponding
memory card, which you can then remove from the camera and insert into the
card reader. Different camera models can also be connected via USB.
• Cameras which burn DVDs directly (usually 80 mm diameter instead of the
regular 120 mm): The DVD can simply be taken out of the camera and inserted
into the computer. For so-called "Slot in DVD" drives, look beforehand in the
operational manual whether or not 80 mm DVDs (also called 3" DVDs or
MiniDVDs) are acceptable.
• Cameras with built-in hard drives: The camera will respond as a drive as soon as
it is connected via a USB cable to the PC. This additional drive will appear in
Media Pool.
69
70
Hint: The listed options and procedures reflect our experience with what works. Still,
we recommend you read the camera's manual for the exact sequence of actions and
contact the manufacturer in case of problems.
Import
The option "AVCHD/DVCPRO/AVC-Intra" does not produce a recording as such,
but rather "only" the transfer of the already created video file and its integration into
the existing project.
On older systems, it may be helpful to transfer AVCHD files into MPEG-2 format
during import. A corresponding query appears automatically as these files are
imported.
Note: Before AVCHD import it is necessary to activate (view page 334) the MPEG4 codec and Dolby®Digital Stereo codec for copyright reasons. MAGIX Video Pro
X5 offers this option as soon as the codec is required.
After you have selected a recording option, the following dialog opens.
Video source: Here you can select the drive that corresponds to your connected
camera.
Save in folder: Here you can select the folder where the imported files are to be
stored.
Advanced settings: Adjust various settings affecting the name and date of the files to
be created.
Video recording
Preview monitor and transport control: Play and rewind the clips in the file list here.
Medium/general: An info area for the files is provided to the right next to the preview
monitor.
File list: The contents of the selected drive are shown here. Use the display filters to
reduce the types of files shown. You can select every file separately using the little
check boxes in order to import them later. At the top right of the list you can find
options for displaying the files.
Note: The files are color-coded. The colors indicate recording times, so that you can
quickly recognize which recordings were made at the same time.
Select: This offers self-explanatory options for file display ("all", "only new", or
"none").
Display filter: Here you can select whether you want to view "Movies" or "Photos".
With the option "Show only selected", all non-selected elements will be hidden. You
should only use this option if you've already selected elements.
Insert into movie: With this option active, media will be inserted directly into the
MAGIX Video Pro X5 Arranger as objects. When inactive, they will be simply copied
into the target folder and may be selected from the Media Pool at any time.
Delete all media after camera import: This option deletes the selected media after
importing from the camera.
Import: Starts the import process of the selected files into the target directory.
Cancel: closes the dialog without import.
Tip: In theory, the AVCHD import dialog is a universal import dialog, which can be
used for external drives, photo and movie cameras, containing usable files. If you
find the display filters useful for your camera a s well, nothing stands in the way of
connecting the camera to the computer and then activating AVCHD recording in
MAGIX Video Pro X5.
71
72
HDV camera
Use this option to open the HDV camcorder record dialog. To do this, you have to
connect an HDV camcorder.
The options in this dialog can also be found above in DV recording.
DV camera
Connect a DV or HDV camera
• Connect the digital output of the switched-off camera with the computer's DV
interface (also called FireWire or iLink).
• Insert a DV cassette or the storage device into the camera.
• Switch your camera’s operating mode to "Video recorder" or "Playback".
The camera is now ready to transfer video to the computer.
Note: You may also use a HDV camera in DV mode to, for example, transfer
recordings in the old DV format. We have noted problems with this mode in many
cameras, and therefore recommend that the Record mode of the camera is also
switched to DV, switching the camera off and then on again.
Video recording
Capturing DV recorders or cameras
To start recording, click the "Record" button below the source
monitor.
• Select "DV camera" from the recording dialog. Uncompressed DV capture
requires approx. 220 MB per minute of video. If you would instead like to record
using the more space-saving MPEG format, then you should first activate the
"Record DV as MPEG" option.
• This opens the actual recording dialog. Check to see if a DV camera driver has
been selected.
• Name your recording. It's worth choosing a logical name which will allow you to
find it easily again on the hard drive.
• You can access the appropriate place on the camcorder tape by using the remote
control buttons: shuttle forwards, backwards, and start/stop playback. To start
recording, click on the "Record" button. Keep an eye on the remaining hard drive
space.
• Cease capturing with the "Stop" button and exit the record dialog. You can see
the recording in the film-strip in the lower third of the screen.
Tip: In the DV recording dialog, you can set clips from the DV video which then will
be recorded one after the other (batch capturing). Read more on this in the chapter
"Batch processing" (view page 75).
73
74
"DV capturing" dialog
Note: Keep an eye on the available hard drive space before each recording. DV
capture requires approx. 220 MB per minute of video!
Select DV device driver: The device driver for your DV device should be listed here. If
"Record audio" is deactivated, then video without sound is recorded only. "Audio
preview" activates the audio output of the recording.
Note: The audio preview is deactivated at first, since DV cameras usually include
built-in speakers.
Save movie file as/save in folder: Enter the name of the movie to be recorded. You
can also select the folder where you wish to store your video file. The default
recording directory is set by default, but you can change the Path settings under menu
item "File -> Program settings -> Path settings".
Edit after recording: This provides access to the automatic editing options.
Start the DV device automatically: Starts the DV recorder or DV camera
automatically when the "Record" button is pressed. This does not function with all
digital cards/video devices.
Video recording
Video preview: On the preview monitor you can see a preview of your movie.
Original size: This option allows you to preview the video in the original size. To
return to the dialog use the "Esc" key.
Recording list
Set the start and end points for the capture here. This allows you to search the entire
video for all captures to be used and list them for planned batch capture. This is then
processed in sequence when the recording starts (via the red button). That way, you
don't need to record each scene individually. Simply specify the recording time points
and the computer takes care of the rest. To set precise start and end points, click
"Enter start/end point (view page 76)
Record list: Press this button to view the available list
of already recorded videos and scheduled recordings.
All entries from the list may be selected and deleted.
Every batch recording is automatically logged.
Conversely, every "manual" DV and HDV recording is
transferred into the recording list in order to restore lost
recordings without much effort.
Batch recording: Here the start and end points can be set for the capturing. This
allows you to search the entire video for all captures to be used and list them for
planned batch capture. This is then processed in sequence when the recording starts
(via the red button). That way you don't need to record each scene individually. You
simply determine recording time points, and the computer takes care of the rest. To
set the start and end points precisely, click "Enter start/end point (view page 76)"
Record: Starts the recording process. Also contains the list of scheduled recordings.
These are processed step-by-step (batch capturing).
Stop: Stops the recording process.
75
76
Snapshot! With the Snapshot! button, you can create a frozen image directly from the
preview monitor. Start the camcorder and watch the preview window. When the
image you want appears, click "Snapshot". Or you can navigate using the remote
control to the position you want, and stop there in Pause mode. Stopped playback on
the DV camera will not deliver an image! The images are saved in the record directory
as graphics files in the set resolution.
Remote control
MAGIX Video Pro X5 also supports remote controls for most digital camcorders. This
does not function with all digital cards/video devices. If your hardware does not
support the remote control function, the buttons will not be usable.
The transport controls required for this are featured in the DV or HDV recording
dialog.
Tape title: Enter a name for your tape here. MAGIX Video Pro X5 requires this name
for the DV logging feature.
Recording information: Displays various information about your recordings.
Set recording start/end point: Enter the exact start and end point or the recording
length for a scene.
Video recording
Both values can be entered as ATN (absolute
track number) or as a timecode in
hours:minutes:seconds:frames.
DV as MPEG
This recording selection dialog option allows you to transfer DV recordings directly
into the space-saving MPEG format on the harddisk.
From the "DV as MPEG" dialog window you can find
MPEG encoder settings options under "Advanced".
You can also burn your DV material direct to disc
without any intermediate steps.
Recording list
Set the start and end points for the capture here. This allows you to search the entire
video for all captures to be used and list them for planned batch capture. This is then
processed in sequence when the recording starts (via the red button). That way, you
don't need to record each scene individually. Simply specify the recording time points
and the computer takes care of the rest. To set precise start and end points, click
"Enter start/end point (view page 76)
77
78
Record list: Press this button to view the available list
of already recorded videos and scheduled recordings.
All entries from the list may be selected and deleted.
Every batch recording is automatically logged.
Conversely, every "manual" DV and HDV recording is
transferred into the recording list in order to restore lost
recordings without much effort.
Logging
Logging means that MAGIX Video Pro X5 also saves the original save location,
position and additional information (metadata, e.g. scene, take, rating, comments,
etc.) about DV video and audio files.
Everything copied using DV recording, DV to MPEG recording and HDV recording
appears in the recording lists of the corresponding recording dialog. Recordings for
which the corresponding video material is no longer on the hard disk will appear as
"planned recordings".
If MAGIX Video Pro X5 does not find the corresponding DV and WAV files during the
loading of a video, it will ask that the corresponding DV tape is inserted into the
connected camcorder again for automatic scene import.
You no longer have to save DV AVI and audio files (which can be very large). If at a
later time you would like to work on a film again, but do not have the space to keep
the material for it on your hard disk, then you can simply delete the bulky DV AVI and
audio files.
Video recording
Video
This option allows a video recording to be made from analog sources.
Connect analog video source
Connect the video out of your video camera, DVD player or VCR to the video in (TV,
video, or video-in graphics card) of your computer, and the audio out to the line in of
your sound card.
Due to the variety of device configurations, it is difficult to say which cable will
function best with your setup. If you’re not sure, check the manual of your VCR or
your TV-, video- or graphics cards.
Example: Many VCRs have a SCART output and most DVD players have three RCA
outputs (two for the stereo track, one for the image). In such cases, you will need a
SCART to RCA adapter, a cable with 3 RCA plugs at each end.
SCART/RCA adapter
Scart/RCA adapter with 3
RCA jacks
Stereo RCA/mini phone jack
adapter
Most sound card inputs are mini stereo jacks. To connect the audio out of your VHS
recorder to the sound card audio in, you will need a stereo RCA/ mini phone plug
adapter.
You will have to purchase a cable with three RCA plugs and a stereo RCA/mini phone
plug adapter.
79
80
Record dialog
Video/audio driver: Here you can make settings to you video or sound card before
recording. In practically every case the driver software supplied with the hardware
must be installed.
Input/tuner settings: Supports your video recording card with multiple sources; in
cases when a TV tuner or multiple inputs (SVHS, composite...) are available, you can
select the source to be recorded and the correct TV channel.
Save video file as/save in following folder: Enter the name of the movie to be
recorded. You can also select the folder where your video file should be saved. The
standard recording folder is set as default. The location of this folder may be changed
via "Path settings" under "File -> Program settings -> Folders".
Edit after recording: This provides access to the automatic editing options.
Recording quality: You can select among various recording qualities depending on
intended use of the material and computer performance. These are sorted according
to picture quality. Use Configuration to fine-tune the quality for the preset. Presets
you have created yourself appear in this list as long as you use the default folder
provided as the save location.
• Presets displayed with MPEG record directly in MPEG format.
• The preset "AVI: user-defined" enables AVI videos to be recorded via the codecs
included with MAGIX Video Pro X5. There are several codecs for various
applications, e.g. "MSU Screencapture Lossless Codec", which is used for screen
Video recording
capturing. Please pay attention to the general advice for AVI videos (view page
337).
Tip: Use MPEG presets if you want to burn your recordings immediately after
recording, because thanks to the so-called "Smart Encoding" additional lengthy
encoding after recording won't be necessary.
Advanced...: Opens the video driver settings dialog.
Recording control: Here you will find the red record button and the stop button. Using
them, you can start and stop recording.
Timer recordings active/time limit: Specify the recording start time and length to
turn your PC into a fully functioning VCR.
Snapshot!: With Snapshot! you can create a still frame directly from the preview
monitor. The images are saved in the recordings folder as graphics files in the
resolution you have set.
Recording information: Here you will find statistics about recording time, available
disk space, recorded frames and "dropped frames". Dropped frames are frames that
have been left out because the computer is too slow for the selected image format
and recording quality and cannot accept all incoming frames.
Preview: With some graphics cards, system strain can be reduced by switching video
preview off. If you hear an "echo", deactivate the audio preview.
Advanced configurations in the video capturing dialog
Here you can adjust certain settings for the video recording driver.
These dialog boxes, so-called “property sheets,” come with the video card drivers.
These driver-specific performance properties may deviate depending on the cards.
We also have a very limited influence on the behavior of these drivers. If you
encounter any difficulties, please contact the video card manufacturer for the latest
driver updates.
Source: Sets the crossbar of the video card.
The crossbar determines which video and audio input signal will be recorded. The
crossbars are connected in series to the video recording chip itself. In the output field,
the video output (for the crossbars) is the input for the recording chip (video or audio
decoder-in) of the video card. In the “Input” field, select the signal source that will be
used by the video card to capture for this input. Many video cards have separate
crossbars for audio and video. If you have a problem, try out the different
configurations until the right sound matches the right image.
81
82
Composite-in = the normal video input (typically a cinch jack)
S-video = S-video input (mini-din jack)
SVHS-in = SVHS input (special cable)
Tuner-in = TV signal of the integrated tuner
Display
Video decoder: If the picture only appears in black & white or it flickers, the video
standard may be set incorrectly. In mainland Europe, PAL_B is used.
VideoProcAmp: Fine-adjustment of colors, brightness, contrast etc. We recommend
against changing any of the manufacturer’s settings.
Format: Please do not change anything here. The capturing format is set in the
"Recording quality" option in the video recording dialog.
Station selection
This option is only available if a TV tuner is integrated into your video card.
Audio
Songs, noises, or instruments can be easily recorded in MAGIX Video Pro X5 using
the audio recording function. A hooked-up microphone or various audio devices
(especially a stereo system) can be used as recording sources.
Connecting the source for recording
First of all, the source of the audio material must be connected to the sound card
input. Again, there are several possibilities which primarily depend on the type of
equipment you have.
If you are recording from a microphone, then please connect the microphone to the
microphone jack on your sound card (usually red).
If you want to record material from a stereo system, then you can use the line-out or
AUX out jacks on the back of your amplifier or tape deck. This involves connecting
them to the sound card input (usually red).
If your amplifier has no separate output (other than for the speakers), then you can
use the connection intended for headphones for your recordings. In most cases, you
will need a cable with two mini-stereo jacks. This type of connection has the
advantage of being able to set the headphone input signal level with a separate
volume. As headphone connections generally are not the best, it is advised that you
use the line outputs if possible.
Video recording
When recording cassettes from a tape deck, you can connect the tape deck's line out
directly to the sound card input.
When recording from vinyl records, you should not connect the record player's output
directly with the sound card because the phono signal needs to be pre-amplified. A
more suitable method would be to use the headphone connection or an external preamp.
Adjusting the Signal Level
Adjusting the signal level to the sound card is also recommended to get the best
sound quality during digital recording.
Once a recording source is connected to the sound card, the "Record" button opens
the recording dialog and starts the recording source.
You can now adjust the recording level with the help of the LED display in the
recording dialog. For this, you must first check off "Show Levels".
If the adjustment is set too high, distortion occurs and the incoming signal must be
reduced. If you have connected the source through either an amplifier or tape deck
output to the sound card, you can only reduce the signal level in your sound card’s
software mixer interface. You can access the mixer directly from within the recording
dialog via the “Recording Level” button.
If you reduce input sensitivity by using the input fader, the resolution at which the
analog signal is digitized is also reduced. Try to set these automatic controllers to the
loudest sound level possible.
The maximum setting for an optimal level is the loudest part of the material. The
loudest part should be adjusted to be the maximum. The actual recording begins
when you press the "Record" button. At the end of the the recording you will be
asked if you want to use the recording. Upon confirmation, the newly-recorded
material will be placed at the next free position of the start maker in the arrangement.
83
84
Audio record dialog
Audio driver: Selects the sound card for the recording.
Save audio file as/ Save in folder: Here you can select the title of the audio file you
wish to record. You can also select the folder where you wish to store the file.
Recording quality: Sets the sound quality of the recording. In the preset menu you can
choose between medium wave radio ("AM tuner"), UKW ("FM Radio"), DAT (Digital
Audio Tape) and CD quality.
Display Volume control: Using the peakmeter, you can monitor the level of the
incoming signal. Please read more on this in the chapter "Adjusting levels" (view page
83)
Record: This button starts the actual recording.
Stop: Click this button to stop recording
Normalize after recording: With this option activated, your material's volume is
raised to a proper level after recording is completed. In order to achieve good results,
you should try to record the source as loud as possible without overmodulating it. To
do so, refer to the peak meter reader in the recording dialog.
Video recording
Play while recording: This option is particularly important for spoken commentary,
etc. If activated, the selected movie (or selected scene if recorded in the "Edit" screen)
is played while recording. This acts as orientation for the movie.
Advanced: Use this button to open a window where you can select from special
features:
Advanced settings for audio recordings
• Mono recording: Activate to record in mono. This reduces the required memory
space in half. Mono recordings are recommended for voice recordings made
using only one standard mono microphone.
• Real-time resample to project's current sample rate: Automatically matches the
sample rate of a new file to be recorded with the sample rate of the current
movie's sound track (set in the video recording).
• Automatic volume reduction of other audio tracks ("ducking"): To add narration
or other sound material to a video that already has sound volume levels set,
activate the option ”Automatic reduction of sound volume of remaining audio
tracks”. This automatically reduces the volume of audio objects in the
arrangement during the recording session (”ducking”). This is achieved using an
automatically configured volume curve: Before and after the recording, other
tracks will be faded in or out, resulting in a homogeneous total volume level.
(Lowering of volume level during spoken comments is also called "Ducking".)
Single frame
Single frame recording may be used to record snapshots from the connected video
source. This requires a DirectShow compatible video recording or TV card or a
corresponding USB device (e.g. a webcam).
The time control function allows you to automatically take snapshots. This is useful
for the following applications:
•
•
•
•
to create slideshows using videos
for animation films (stop-motion recording)
for video surveillance
or in time-lapse photography
The recorded images are added to the current arrangement.
85
86
Recording dialog
Video source: You may set the video card used to take pictures here.
Save picture as: Enter the title of the snapshot to be recorded here. Snapshots are
saved under this name and numbered consecutively. You may also select the file path
for storage.
Recording quality: Set the solution for the recording here. This corresponds with the
resolution options offered on the camera. Use the slider to set the image quality.
Using higher resolutions results in larger file sizes for each recording. "Reset" resets
the image quality to the preset value.
Advanced...: Opens the video driver settings dialog.
Camera sound during recording: This causes the program to play a clicking sound
each time a snapshot is taken.
Record controls: The red record button triggers a snapshot or alternatively a series of
recordings when using the time control function.
Timer-controlled recording
Recording interval: When active, starting recording produces a sequence of images.
Snapshots are saved according to the selected time interval and numbered
sequentially. For example, if snapshots are taken every two seconds and then inserted
every five frames into the slideshow, then a ten times accelerated time lapse
recording will result.
Photo length in frames: Specifies how long the photos appear in the slideshow.
Video recording
Enhanced single-frame recording dialog settings
You can adjust certain settings for the video recording driver.
These dialog boxes, so-called "property sheets", come with the video card drivers. The
driver-specific features may slightly vary from driver to driver. The MAGIX team has
little direct influence on the performance of the various drivers. If you encounter any
difficulties, then please contact the video card manufacturer for the latest driver
updates.
Input: Sets the crossbar switch of the video card. This lets you define what video and
audio signal is used in the recording. The crossbars are connected in series to the
video recording chip itself.
Output: In the "Output" field, the video output (for the crossbars) is the input for the
recording chip (video or audio decoder in) of the video card. In the "Input" field, you
select the signal source to be used for this input by the video card during recording.
Composite in = the normal video input (typically a cinch jack)
S-VHS in = S-VHS input (special cable)
Tuner in = the TV signal of the built-in tuner
Video decoder: If the picture only appears in black & white or it flickers, then the
video standard may be set incorrectly. PAL_B is used in Germany and most European
countries (France: SECAM; US/CAN: NTSC).
VideoProcAmp: For fine tuning of colors, brightness, contrast, etc. We recommend
against changing any of the manufacturer's settings.
Format: Do not change anything here! The capture format settings can be changed
under "Resolution" in the "Recording" dialog box.
87
88
Screen
Use screen capturing to record everything that moves on your monitor. This process
is called "screen capturing".
Use this feature to record your screen content. This process is called "screen
capturing".
• Under Recording quality, you will find
various presets for different
applications. You can either record the
entire monitor ("fullscreen"), a frame of
variable size (e.g. to film the Windows
Media Player display), or a different
video player. Click "Configuration" to
make custom size adjustments.
Hint: Because many video players work
with overlay, it is recommended to open
each player before starting the capture!
This way switching into "Overlay" mode
can be prevented.
Tip: Use the fullscreen preset under "Recording quality". MXV, a video codec
especially well suited for screen capturing, will be used.
• Click on the record button in the record dialog. An additional dialog with a red
record button, a black stop button as well as a frame with dashed bordering
appears.
• Activate the option "Record mouse pointer" to record the movements of the
mouse pointer.
• If you like, you can deactivate "Animate mouse click", if you don't want to visually
record it.
Video recording
• Now select the screen area you wish to record, i.e. the screen of the video player
in which the video is playing. Drag the frame over the area you wish to record and
adjust its size as required by dragging the edges and corners.
Note: If you previously selected "Fullscreen", the window will be hidden.
• To start recording, press the red record button. The recording starts; the record
symbol appears in the task bar (tray).
• If you are finished with everything, click on the record button or the stop button
to stop recording. Recording ends and the recording dialog is visible once again.
Edit after recording
The "Edit after recording" dialog can be
opened from the "HDV Camera", "DV
Camera" and "Video" recording dialogs.
This dialog offers the these options:
89
90
• Automatic scene recognition: This divides the footage into scenes. Please also
read the section "Automatic scene recognition" (view page 259).
• Automatically set chapter markers: Please also read the section "Set chapter
marker automatically (view page 111)" in the chapter "Edit" in the PDF manual
(press "F1").
Burn project immediately after recording: You can use this option to record and burn
to a disc in a single step. Simply select the format you would like to burn, insert a
suitable blank disc into the drive, and press record.
Note: Make sure that the selected recording quality corresponds with the disc type
(for DVDs the preset "MPEG DVD").
If you use your own settings for MPEG encoding (e.g. half image resolution for longplay DVDs) make sure that settings for recording and later for burning are the same
so that no new encoding is necessary (Smart encoding).
After recording, the program automatically switches to the "Burn" screen, the burn
window opens and the disc is burned. The last set layout is used for the menu layout
for the DVD.
Tip: This function is particularly suitable for handling lengthy projects in one go. You
can start recording in the evening and have the finished DVD by morning.
Export for mobile device: The recorded movie is immediately converted into the
format of the selected mobile device and transferred. The preset in the list field is the
device which has been selected in the Export video/audio dialog.
Settings: Opens the Export settings (view page 226) for the selected target device.
Objects
Objects
In the MAGIX Video Pro X5 "Timeline" mode you are dealing with objects. The
general term "object" includes all media types that are present on the arranger tracks.
The following object types are found in MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Combination objects: Combination objects
are video objects with an image track and an
audio track. In the context menu, you can add
the waveform representation of the audio
track or add the sound as an independent
audio object.
Video objects: Video objects include a file
extension typical for videos (e. g. *.mpg, *.avi,
*.mxv). Depending on the length of the video
object, you will see several frames
representing various positions in your video.
Image objects: Image objects are photos or
other static images. They have a file extension
typical for an image (e. g. *.jpg, *.png, *.bmp).
In contrast to video objects, you'll always see
only one frame.
Audio objects: All objects that contain sound
are considered audio objects. They have an
extension typical for audio (e. g. *.ogg, *.mp3,
*.wav). With a right-click you can add a
waveform display to any audio object.
Title objects: Title objects are created using
the title editor and contain the text that
appears in your projects. They have no file
extensions.
In the following chapter you can read about what you can do with these objects. The
workflow for all object types is the same.
91
92
Insert object into the project
Load Files
Media files can be loaded into the arranger from the Media Pool in several different
ways:
• The fastest way: Click on the "Paste" option that appears when you move the
mouse pointer over the file in the Media Pool. Or you can simply drag and drop
the file from the Media Pool onto a track. If an object is already present at this
position, the file is inserted at the same time position on the next empty track
below.
• Load several files: If you want to load several files, hold down the "Ctrl" key while
clicking on the entries you want to use. If you want to load a sequence of files,
hold the "Shift" key and click the first entry and then the last. All entries in
between will be selected. Then you can drag all of the selected files into the
arranger by holding down the mouse button.
• Use insert modes: You can also use the menu commands that are accessible
through the "Insert Mode" button. For more about this, read the section "Insert
modes (view page 47)" in the chapter "Workspaces".
• Insert through a two, three or four-point edit: These professional insert
techniques will be dealt with separately later on (view page 103).
• Project temp folder: Using a project temp folder is recommended if you want to
collect your material separately. It can be used as a sort of clipboard that stores
files that might be used in the project. This creates a better overview and saves
repetitive, annoying navigation through folders in the Media Pool.
Files with multiple audio tracks
MAGIX Video Pro X5 also loads VOB files that contain multiple audio tracks. After
the VOB file has been loaded, simply click the audio object created and select the
desired audio track.
Note: To view and select audio objects in the arrangement, Timeline mode must be
active.
Objects
Scene overview
The “Scene overview” mode is a special view that improves manageability and
categorization of scenes. All scenes are listed one after the other (in multiple lines,
like in a text program) and can be copied, cut, moved, deleted and inserted.
"Overview" mode does not indicate start, playback, or end markers. The scene which
is currently being played has a frame around it.
The zoom slider enables the view
to be enlarged or reduced.
This controller also specifies how many scenes are displayed. The smaller the preview
pictures, the more will fit onto the overview.
Maximize: Use this button to maximize the scene overview to fullscreen mode.
Loading parts of longer movie files
For longer videos, it is recommended to define the areas which should be loaded into
the project before importing. An in and out point is set to define the area for this
purpose. This can be done in the following way:
• Select a file from the Media Pool by double-clicking it. Play it back using the play
buttons on the source monitor to indicate the section which you want to use in
the project.
• You can move the range borders directly by holding down the left mouse button
or you can set them using the buttons (or the keyboard shortcuts I and O).
Keyboard shortcuts are particularly useful when setting precise positions with the
shuttle or jog wheel.
93
94
• Click on the monitor image and drag & drop it into the arranger. An object
corresponding to the selected area will appear on the track.
• You can also drag your selection into the project folder and use it in your project
later by dragging it from the project folder onto the arranger. The file in the
project temp folder in this case has the same name as the original file, extended
by a running number (001, 002...).
• You can also drag a file from the Media Pool into the project folder first and then
cut it from there with the help of the source monitor. The in- and out-points
created this way will be saved directly when the segment is removed.
• You can also do the reverse by dragging objects from the Arranger into the
project temp folder. If the object should appear both in the Arranger and in the
project temp folder, just hold down the Ctrl key. All object-related settings (fades,
effects, animations) are transferred as well. You can put together different edits
of one and the same object and store them in the project temp folder for later
use.
Select and group objects
To edit or delete objects using menus, you must first select them. To do so, simply
click on the object you wish to select. Objects will change color to show that they
have been selected.
When the Shift key is pressed, multiple objects are selected. You can open up a
rectangle positioning the mouse over the object, then holding down the mouse button
and marking all objects within the rectangle (”elastic band selection”) by left-clickdragging.
Any object can be combined with others to make up a group, to avoid the objects
being unintentionally moved out of relation to each other. Once they are combined,
clicking on one object of a group will select the entire group. To group or ungroup
objects, use the buttons in the tool bar or the corresponding commands in the "Edit"
menu.
Duplicate objects
Objects may be duplicated very easily. Click on the object to be copied with the
mouse while holding down the "Ctrl" key. This generates a copy, which you can
immediately drag to the desired position or cut separately.
Objects
Move Objects
Hold down the mouse button to move selected objects to any tracks and positions via
drag and drop. It is recommended to place objects that belong together on
neighboring tracks and to create separate tracks for audio and video objects. For this
reason, videos that should overlay each other should usually be placed on the same
track.
If the Shift key is pressed, objects can be moved from one track to another, without
the time position being changed.
Extract sound from videos
Video with audio material appears in the arranger as a combination object (audio and
video in one object).
In order to edit audio and image material separately, right-click the object and select
"Audio functions" > "Video/audio on separate tracks" from the context menu. Audio
and video objects will then be grouped and appear on two tracks. With the "Ungroup"
(view page 287) function in the "Edit" menu or using the corresponding key, the
object group can be dissolved.
Now you can replace the audio or the video track, or process each file separately. Rejoin/regroup the tracks with the "Group" function.
95
96
Object handles
All objects can be re-sized with their lower edge “object handles”. Move the mouse
over one of the lower corners of the object until the mouse pointer becomes a double
arrow. Move the mouse over one of the lower corners of the object until the mouse
pointer becomes a stretch symbol.
5 "handles": Length, fade, transparency (volume)
An object can be faded in or out with the handles to the left and right upper corners of
the object. Cross-fades between different objects can be created by overlapped
positioning of objects that are fading in and out. The length of the cross-fade can be
adjusted with the handles.
Using the transparency/volume handle located centrally at the top of the object,
adjusts the transparency of video and Bitmap objects, or the volume of audio and
image objects.
If you adjust the middle handle of a video object all the way down, the object will
become transparent. If a second object is located on a track above it, a black color will
appear from below it, so that brightness will be reduced.
Object handles for combi objects
Combi objects have an additional, sixth handle.
• The four outer handles have the same function as with regular objects.
Objects
• The lower middle handle regulates the object's track volume.
• The top middle handle controls the transparency of the object's image track.
Object borders
When you place the mouse pointer on a vertical object border, it will turn into a
double line.
If the object doesn't border any other objects, the functionality doesn't differ from
bottom handles, which means that you can stretch or compress the object. With a
hard cut or a crossfade, the object transition will be moved, meaning that the object
start and end of both neighboring objects will remain coupled to each other.
Trim Objects
Trimming provides exact placement of object borders or transitions. MAGIX Video
Pro X5 has two different trimmers, and these can be opened using the context menu
for a video or image object.
General advice for operating both trim editors
Play functions: The trim window contains its own play functions that allow the object
to be played individually or in relation to the arrangement.
The right play button plays the arrangement normally. Replays can sometimes appear
shaky because the processor may be over-worked. Those frames that the processor
cannot calculate quickly enough are left out.
97
98
The middle play button plays the arrangement “frame by frame”, which means no
frames are left out. Depending on the processor load, playback may thus be slower,
but still smooth.
The left play button renders material before playing, i.e. the current settings are
calculated first and then exported. This method ensures a smoother playback.
With the fast forward and rewind functions you can change the range start in the
timeline. This allows for complete control of transitions between two videos.
Increments: A click on the arrow buttons in both trim editors moves the handle or the
material within an object exactly by one frame. With the Ctrl key you can increase the
frame rate gradually to 5 frames per mouse-click.
Object trimmer
A schematic display of the selected object and its handles can be found in the center
of the trimming window.
Fade in/out (4, 5): These buttons adjust the upper fade handles of an object.
Object content (3): Here you can move the video material to be played without
changing the object length.
Position (2): Moves the object on the track.
First frame/End fade-in (7): Toggles the left monitor between the first frame of the
object and the end of the transition.
Start fade-out/Last Frame (8): Toggles the right monitor between the start of the
transition and the last frame of the object.
Left/right arrow buttons (1, 6): Here you can adjust the lower object handles.
Objects
Next object/cut (9, 10): The buttons below and to the right skip to the next/previous
object and/or cut in the arranger. These buttons make it easy to move and trim
objects in the arrangement without having to leave the trimmer.
Keyboard Shortcut:
Shift + N
Cut trimmer
A schematic display of the selected transition and its handles can be found at the
center of the trimming window.
Left arrow buttons (1): These buttons move the last frame of the first object while
adjusting the second. The length of the transition remains. The display indicates the
relative change in comparison with the starting situation when the trimmer was
opened.
Position (2): Moves the second object. The length of the transition is changed. This
corresponds with shifting an object in the arranger.
Object content (3): Moves the movie under the second object. The length of the
object and the object itself are not changed.
Crossfade (4): Changes the transition’s length between both objects. The objects
remain of equal length. The length can be numerically entered.
Middle arrow buttons (5): Shifts the existing transition. Both objects remain in their
positions, but the transition’s center point moves.
Transition (6): Displays the type of transition. A mouse click opens a popup window
from which you can select a transition.
Right arrow buttons (7): Move the first frame of the second object. The first object
and the transition remains. Only the length of the second object changes.
99
100
Start fade-out/Last frame (8): Switches the left monitor between the start of the
transition and the last frame of the object.
First frame/End fade-in (9): Switches the right monitor between the first frame of the
following object and the end of the transition.
Next cut (10)/Next object (11): The buttons below and to the right skip to the
next/previous object and/or cut in the arranger. These buttons make it easy to move
and trim cuts in the arrangement without having to leave the trimmer.
Keyboard shortcut:
N
Transitions (fades)
When importing video files into the arranger, individual objects usually follow directly
after one another. This is called a "hard cut". However, you can make scenes blend or
“transition” into each other.
This means that for the duration of a transition, two objects are shown at once and
can be mixed "faded" together in different ways. You will find numerous blends in the
Media Pool’s transition directory.
Simple crossfade
A simple transition can be created in the arranger by dragging one object over
another. A crossfade will be automatically created. During this standard transition,
the brightness of both objects is increased, i.e. the first clip fades out while the second
clip fades in. The duration of the crossfade is displayed in the arranger by white
crossing lines. You can adjust the length of the crossfade by dragging the upper
handle of the second object to the left or to the right.
To select a different fade click on the transition symbol displayed when
an object is selected.
The fade menu opens. The transition icon will change, depending on your selection.
Objects
Fades from the Media Pool
• To open the fade folder, click on the "Fades" button.
• A double click on a file shows a fade preview.
• Simply drag the desired fade onto the border between the two objects. Only
when the mouse pointer is placed over a scene change will it turn from a lock
symbol into an object symbol, i.e. you can place the fade at that position. The
object at the back will be shifted to the front to accommodate the transition.
The length of a transition is decided by you, if a transition is shortened, it means that
the resulting effect is speeded up.
Some transitions can be adjusted even more exactly. To do so, click on the fade
symbol again and select "Settings" at the bottom of the menu. Thus, a fade symbol in
the Media Pool can represent an entire group of different effects.
The so-called alpha blends (in the "Shapes and objects", "Iris", "Random", etc.
subfolders) are pre-produced black-and-white videos, which can be used as fades in
combination with the alpha keying effect.
Other fades use sound effects. Look around at all the contents to form an idea of what
you can use in future projects.
Note: Use transitions economically! Most professional movies or TV shows use hard
cuts as the rule and transitions less frequently. Videos appear unprofessional and
too ornate if fade effects are added to every change of scene.
Custom fades with alpha keying
You can add additional transition effects to MAGIX Video Pro X5 by producing videos
containing a transition from black to white in any which way. You can create such a
video from any (including color) video material by exporting it as a fade ("File" >
"Export movie" > "Export as fade").
The loaded movie is then exported as a black and white video in mxv format and
stored in the fade directory. It will be available in the Media Pool and in the fade
menu.
3D fades
General
3D effects offer exciting and varied opportunities to create transitions between two
videos. You can find 3D effects under "Fades" > "Spatial fades" in Media Pool.
101
102
Settings
The fade settings enable the behavior and appearance of the 3D fades to be
influenced. Click the corresponding fade symbol for the object and choose "Settings"
to do this.
You have the following options:
Anti-Aliasing: A bothersome jagged edge sometimes appears on the borders of 3D
objects. Anti-aliasing reduces this effect, but also requires more computer power. The
setting applies globally to all 3D fades, switching on anti-aliasing during 3D fades has
the effect that all other 3D fades are also affected by this setting.
Mirror X / Y: You can change the movement trajectory of 3D objects inside the fade.
The option "X-axis mirror" mirrors the movement of the object horizontally (along the
X-axis). The option "Y-axis mirror" mirrors the movement of the object vertically
(along the Y-axis).
3D series
The 3D series are a further development of 3D fades (view page 101), where the
transitions are thematically sorted. For instance, you can let photos pop up and
disappear on a notice board or make it look as if the photos were hung on the walls of
a gallery.
You have the following options to open 3D sequences for photos or scene transitions:
• In Media Pool, click on "Fades" > "Spatial Fades" > "3D Sequences". Select the
desired 3D series and drag it onto the first scene or image transition where the
3D series should start.
You can select how many of the subsequent fades should be replaced by the 3D
series in the dialog.
Search for gaps
MAGIX Video Pro X5 enables you to locate gaps between objects where no image
material is located. This hinders unintentional black spots from appearing. This option
is located under "Edit -> Find gaps". A corresponding dialog opens.
Optimize view: Zooms to the selected gap.
Mark gap as range: Spans a section over the selected gap.
Edit selected gaps: The selected settings are applied but no additional action is taken.
Keyboard Shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + C
Objects
Simple cut
All objects can be split. Each object section then becomes an independent object:
• Select the object to be cut.
• Position the playback marker at the position where the movie is to be cut.
• Select "Cut" among the cut functions in the toolbar or press the T key on the
keyboard.
Cut button: Here you can choose between various Cut modes (view page 46).
In order to rejoin these split objects at a later stage, simply select the individual parts
and select the command "Group" to join the selected objects into a group. Orders all
selected objects into groups.
Note: If the commands "Split" and "Remove beginning/end" are applied without a
selection, all objects at the position of the playback marker are cut.
Tip: You can find detailed step-by-step instructions on how to remove unusable
scenes from video material in the "Quick start" chapter of the print manual.
Two-point cut
Two-point cut makes importing files easy in order to insert new material at certain
positions quickly into complex projects. One point is placed in the arranger and
another is placed in source monitor, and these are used in either of the following
variations:
Variation 1: Source in/destination in
The point in the arranger specifies the location where the new material should be
inserted into the project ("destination in") and the point in the source monitor where
the new material should be inserted ("source in").
• Place the playback marker at the position in the arranger where the new material
should be inserted.
• Click in the program monitor on the
button in the transport control for
the start of the section (in point).
• Double click the desired file in the Media Pool to load it into the source monitor.
• Find the position in the source monitor where the material should be inserted.
103
104
• Click the button in the source's
monitor's transport control for the
start of the section (in point).
Note: To insert the complete material, an in point doesn't need to be inserted into
the source monitor. Source in will now be the start of the source material.
• Select the insert mode "Overview (view page 49)" to overwrite the
material in the arranger behind the in point.
• Or use one of the two ripple modes (single-track ripple or multi-track
ripple) in order to cut the material at the position of the in point and
move it to back.
"Overwrite" mode does not change the total length of the project. The new material is
only inserted at the position of the in point:
The ripple modes move the old material in the range together with the objects behind
it to the end of the inserted material. This changes the total length according to the
length of the object:
Variation 2: Destination in/destination out
This variation functions based on exactly the same principle, only instead of setting in
points in both monitors, out points are placed. The new material is placed in the
arranger prior to the out point in this way. This variation enables you to work from
back towards the front to define the scene transition.
Objects
Three-point editing
The three-point edit is an insert process that operates based on three reference
points. It works in on of three ways:
Variation 1: Destination in/destination out/source in
This variation defines a range in the arranger where the new material will be inserted.
• Initially, the program monitor is used to set an in and out point to stretch out a
range in the arranger.
• A third point is then set in the source monitor to define the beginning ("source
in") of the material to be inserted.
• Finally, the range in the arranger is filled with the new material. The new material
is cut automatically at the end of the range.
Variation 2: Destination in/destination out/source out
This variation functions similar to variation 1, with the difference that the point in the
source monitor is not the beginning, but rather the end of the new scene ("source
out"). This means that the scene transition at the end is specified and the new
material moves into the front of the range. The new material is cut automatically at
the start of the range.
Variation 3: Source in/source out/destination in
This variation defines a range in the new material that should be inserted at a certain
position in the arranger.
• Initially, a range is spanned out in the source material using in and out points in
the source monitor.
• A third point is specified in the program monitor which defines the beginning of
the material to be inserted.
• Finally, the range from the source monitor is inserted completely at the position
of the in point.
We would like to illustrate variation 1 and 2 using step-by-step instructions:
• In the arrangement, determine an area that corresponds to the time window and
position of the video to be imported (destination in/out).
105
106
Tip: To keep things clear, it is recommended at the start to cut the material within
the range and then to drag it backwards or to delete it from the range so that a gap is
present.
• Load the new material that you want to display inside the range by doubleclicking in the source monitor.
• Position the playback marker in the
source monitor at the start position
where the video should be imported
into the arrangement (source in).
• If you want to cut at the scene end,
set the playback marker in the
source monitor at the position
where the end of the scene should
be and click the button for the end of
the range (source out).
• Select the insert mode "Overview (view page 49)" to fill the range in
the arranger with the new material, replacing it with the existing
material.
• Or use one of the two ripple modes (single-track ripple or multi-track
ripple) to cut the material at the start of the range and move it to the
end of the range.
"Overwrite" mode does not change the total length of the project. The new material is
only inserted at the start of the specified range:
The ripple function moves the material in the range together with the subsequent
objects. This changes the total length according to the length of the object:
Objects
Four-point editing
The four-point editing places new material into the project with the help of a total of
four marker points.
The motto: "whatever doesn't fit will be made to fit". A range is set in both the source
material as well as in the project, and one of the insert modes described above is
used. The function is the same for each mode (overwrite and ripple): the section from
the source material is inserted precisely into the range specified in the arranger.
If both ranges are coincidentally the same size (which is normally the exception), then
the new material will be stretched or pinched automatically. The playback speed of
the video is changed analog to the timestretching applied to the audio track.
Because timestretching for an audio track is only possible and sensible to a certain
degree, the audio is removed from larger changes (above a factor of 2). A
corresponding confirmation dialog appears first so that the procedure may also be
canceled when in doubt, e.g. to carry out a three-point cut.
Move the contents of trimmed objects
You can adjust the contents of a trimmed video object quickly and easily without
changing the object length.
1.
2.
Select the trimmed video object.
If the video has not been trimmed, the video object contents cannot be moved,
because the entire video will be shown.
Press "Alt + Shift" and hold down the left mouse button while dragging to the
left or right, in order to move the contents inside the video object.
Zoom preview
• The video image on both monitors can
be magnified or minimized using the
zoom buttons.
Note: This zoom applies only to the
current view in the preview monitor and
will not be applied as a video effect.
107
108
Markers
In MAGIX Video Pro X5 you can set various types of markers within your project.
The Lock button (at the very front, next to the time ruler) lets you lock all
markers (jump markers, chapter markers) against accidental moving or
deleting.
Playback marker
The playback marker indicates the point from which the material –
either the arrangement or a selected file from the Media Pool – will
be played back. There is a playback marker below each preview
monitor and an additional one above the timeline in the arranger.
The playback marker is displayed as a red triangle below the monitors. In the arranger
it is displayed as a red triangle.
In order to move the playback marker, simply double click on the desired area below
the monitor. Alternatively, you can click on the playback marker and move it by
dragging it with the mouse. While being moved, the current image will appear on the
monitor, letting you see exactly where in the material you are located.
The playback marker in the video monitor can also be moved by clicking on the lower
section of the time scale in the arranger. The playback marker will also be moved on
the program monitor, as both markers are coupled to each other.
The exact position of the playback marker can be seen in the time display at the top
left, below the corresponding monitor. There, you can change the displayed values
(Hour:Minute:Second:Frame) per mouse click to reach a certain point in time. Simply
enter the desired value and the playback marker will jump to the corresponding
position.
Tip: In the "Playback" tab under "File -> Settings -> Program", you can set whether
repeatedly pressing the space bar resets the playback marker to the current position
or moves it to the original position.
Project markers
The "Edit" menu or the keyboard shortcut "Shift + numerical keys 1-0 (0 for the tenth
marker) allow you to set a project marker (view page 289) at the current position of
the playback marker. They function as a mental marker or indicate certain positions or
events within the project.
Markers
After selecting the menu item, a dialog appears to input a name for the marker to be
created. The first ten project markers may be accessed via Ctrl + number keys 1-0.
This allows you to jump to a particular position of a longer video immediately, without
scrolling and searching.
Project markers may be deleted or renamed via the context menu at any time. This
does not provide direct influence on the result, but they do make the workflow much
easier.
Ranges (in and out points)
Range markers are the "in points" (range start) and "out points" (range end). They
mark a certain range for playback that can be viewed by pressing the "Range
Playback" button at the bottom of the corresponding monitor.
To the left, you can see an in point (range start), and an out point is visible (range end) to the
right
Hint: The value between both markers shows the length of the selected area
according to the pattern Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames.
There are various options for changing the playback range, and with it the project start
and end markers.
• Set the playback marker at the desired position and press "Set start of range (inpoint)" or "Set end of range (out-point)" underneath the monitor to set the in and
out points of the range.
• Click on one of the markers below the preview monitor and move it with the helddown mouse key to the desired position.
• Click one of the markers in the upper-most bar in the arranger and drag it.
• A right click on the bar moves the range end to the position of the mouse cursor.
A left click moves the start of the range. The area grows or shrinks in size
correspondingly.
• You can adjust the position of the entire range by clicking the blue bar between
the markers and moving it by dragging while holding down the Crtl button.
Range markers in the source monitor
You can set the in and out points in the source monitor in the following manner:
109
110
• Set the playback marker at the desired position and press the "Set range start (in
point)" or "Set range end (out point)" buttons below the monitor to define the
start and end points of your range.
• Click on one of the markers below the monitor and move it to the desired position
by dragging it.
• The position of the entire range can be changed by clicking on the blue bar
between the two markers with the Ctrl button held down and moving the bar.
For the exact functions of the range markers in the source monitor, please read the
section "Loading ranges from longer film files (view page 93)".
Chapter markers
The chapter marker defines the start of a new chapter. Chapters serve to
improve navigation when burning the project to disc (view page 220).
The following options are provided via "Edit -> Marker" or by right-clicking on the
playback marker.
Set chapter markers
Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This creates a
chapter entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being burned to disc.
You can rename the chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename". The
new name will appear in the chapter menu (view page 203).
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + Enter
Markers
Set chapter markers automatically
This option automatically sets chapter markers in the arrangement according to
specific rules that will then appear in the film menu of a disc as chapters. This is useful
if a disc should be burned immediately after recording.
There is a selection of options available for automatic chapter generation:
At beginning of movie: The movie only contains one chapter in this case.
At beginning of object in track: Every object in a track creates a chapter; track 1 is
preset.
At position of existing title objects: Subtitles, for instance, as faded-in subheadings,
give the position of the chapter markers.
Specified interval (minutes)/Specified amount: If the chapters are separated without
any particular method and are just needed for quicker navigation, chapter markers
may also be inserted in pre-defined intervals or as a pre-defined number of chapter
markers.
Naming of chapter markers: To title the chapter markers, a user-defined name
featuring consecutive numbers or the object name or text from the text objects may
be used.
111
112
Optionally, existing chapter markers may be deleted and the automatic chapter
marker function may be limited to the area between the start and end markers.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + Shift + Enter
Delete chapter markers/delete all chapter markers
Delete one or all chapter markers. This removes chapter entries in the disc menu if the
film is burned to disc.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + Enter
Scene markers
Scene markers separate a complete video into scenes. You can load any video into
MAGIX Video Pro X5 and have it divided into scenes.
Simply drag the desired video into the arranger. Next, right click on the video and
select "Scene recognition". The following dialog will appear:
After clicking "Start search", an overview of the detected scenes will be displayed
underneath the scene control.
Delete scene marker: Delete individual markers from the list as required.
Delete all markers: Deletes all project markers.
Action on OK: This provides three options. Either MAGIX Video Pro X5 splits your
video into individual scenes ("Cut at all markers"), a scene is selected and cut only at
this position ("Cut at selected marker"), or all scenes are added to the project folder.
Multicam editing
After deciding in favor of one of these options, red scene markers will
appear on the timeline in the arranger. The scenes can then be split
according to the selected option and edited.
Note: An important difference between a scene and a chapter marker is that a scene
marker can be set only within a continuous video, while a chapter marker may
include several consecutive videos.
Additional information about scene recognition is provided in the chapter "Edit
objects (view page 259)".
Shortcut for scene recognition:
Shift + Z
Multicam editing
Multicam editing enables easy cutting of various recordings of the same scene from
different camera perspectives. The preview monitor displays image material from up
to nine sources in sequence, from which the "program" can be cut in real-time using
your mouse, just like in a real studio.
Preparation
Multicam editing is a special arranger mode. The top two tracks serve as target tracks;
sound and video may copied from up to nine different source tracks. The two top
tracks must be empty when switching to "Multicam" mode, since otherwise existing
objects will be moved to a different track.
Next, load various video recordings of the same scene one under the other starting on
track 3 in the arranger.
It is important that the individual sources are synchronized to each other exactly. It is
best to find a noticeable movement, or a prominent sound, if audio was recorded.
Note: To localize the sound in the audio track exactly, you may have to create a
wave display of the track. Right click on the sound track and choose "Create wave
form display".
You can use a clapperboard during filming, since this offers both sound and motion;
an actor's clapping in front of running camera before the start of the scene is also
helpful. Set a grid point at this position in the object ("Alt + Shift + P"). You can now
move the source objects over each other so that the grid points are aligned.
113
114
Two video sources with sound tracks may be synchronized automatically via their
audio material. To do this, use the "Align with other audio objects (view page 116)"
function in the audio objects context menu.
It is also important that you make all effect settings for the output material (e.g. video
or audio cleaning) before the multicam edit on the objects on the source track and on
the master audio track (view page 116). These effects will be transferred to the objects
in the target track with the edit. Otherwise, you will have to apply the effects from
every single object to the target track.
You can activate "Multicam" mode with this button or with the "Multicam"
command in the "Edit" menu.
Source tracks and preview images
The assignment of tracks as source tracks for the multicam cut takes place
automatically. A maximum of 9 tracks may be used as source at the same time.
When the multicam mode is activated, the source tracks will be assigned to all tracks
containing video objects starting from track 3.
You can also conduct or change the assignment manually. To do so, right click on the
trackbox of the corresponding track to active or deactivate a track as a source track.
The source tracks are marked using color. This can be accomplished by users if more
than 9 source tracks are used.
For every assigned track, a preview appears in the source monitor, and the frame's
color corresponds to the color of the track, letting you assign each preview image to
the corresponding track.
Multicam editing
If the objects created using multicam cut are located on the target track, a preview
image of the corresponding source track highlighted with a yellow frame will be
shown for length of playback.
Multicam edit functions
You can edit various sources in the the target track during playback in real time or
during stopped playback.
Real-time Multicam editing
You can edit various sources together during playback in real time:
• Start playback.
• Click on the desired source in the preview monitor. The corresponding video is
added into the target track starting from this time point.
• To switch the source, click in the source monitor on another source. A new object
will be created using the new source from this point in the target track.
You can repeat this process as often as you like.
For precise editing in the target track, use the usual edit functions or the Trimmer.
Keep in mind that as long as you are in Multicam mode, only the object borders are
moved, and not the objects themselves. Otherwise, gaps or image jumps could form
while you use the Multicam edit function again later.
Replacing an object's source
Replacing an object's video material in the target track with another source:
• Select the object for which the source is to be replaced in the target track.
• Click the source you want to replace the video material with in the source
monitor object.
The video material will now be replaced by the new source. The project length is not
changed.
Insert cut
Insert material from one of the sources between any position on the target track and
the next object.
• Place the playback marker at the desired position.
• Click on the desired source in the preview monitor.
115
116
The material from this source will now be inserted into the target track. The new
object ends at the next object. The portion below an existing object is overwritten in
the process.
Overwrite range
You can overwrite a selected area of the target track with one of the source videos.
• At the upper edge of the arranger, select an area to edit by determining the in
point by clicking and the out point by right clicking. Or use the corresponding
buttons in the transport control.
• Click on the desired source in the source monitor.
• The target track will be overwritten with the video material from the selected
source in the selected area.
Master audio track
Normally, videos in the source track are edited together with their audio tracks. Since
the original sound can differentiate from camera to camera due to different camera
positions, you will probably prefer using either the soundtrack from only one camera
for all settings, or to replace the soundtrack completely (for music videos, for
example, you will use the studio version of the original track).
Right click on the track box of one of the source audio tracks or a different audio track
and select "Multicam: Master audio track" from the context menu to assign a master
audio track for multicam editing. The master audio track will be appear in a dark color.
Now, during every multicam cut, material from the master audio track will be inserted
on track 2, independent of the source track used.
Synchronize video objects using the audio track
Video objects can be synchronized using their audio tracks. This is done by comparing
the audio tracks for similarities. If videos come from the same recording environment,
the same acoustic events will be found on their audio tracks (e.g. the sound of the
clapper board).
Synchronization of multiple objects on one track is possible.
• First, on the reference track, select all audio objects that are to act as reference
positions.
• Then, on another track, select all audio objects that should be moved.
• Choose the "Align with other audio objects on this track" function from the audio
object context menu.
Title
Note: If the desired audio track is found in a combination object, you will find the
"Align with other audio objects on this track" option in the "Audio functions"
submenu.
MAGIX Video Pro X5 attempts to locate the acoustic events in the reference objects
of the second track and to move these to the corresponding position. Because the
audio objects are grouped with their corresponding video objects or comprise a
common object, videos are synchronized in the process.
Title
Titles can be used for many applications: as a running text (ticker), subtitles, speech
and thought bubbles, to display date and time, and much more.
Title editor
In the Title editor you can determine the appearance of your titles. If a title object is
already present, you can select either the title object or the corresponding video
object and open the Title editor using the "General" button.
You can adjust the text properties for multiple selected text objects at once. The
settings will only be applied to the text objects you have selected. The individual
properties of each text object remain unchanged.
The following editing options are available for selection:
117
118
Font: Here you can determine the font type and size of the text. If you click on the
small arrow next to the font size, you can change font size using a smooth slider.
You can set format properties in the toolbars below.
Bold/Italic/Underlined
Align left/Centered/Align right
Font color
Border/Shadow/3D effect/3D title object (view page 118)
Effects: With "Advanced" you will find additional Title Editor (view page 119) settings.
"Automatic text break" separates text automatically when the end of the text field is
reached. "Adjust font size to title field" changes the font size according to the text
field size. You can activate or deactivate this option temporarily by pressing Shift
while dragging the text field handles.
Animation: here you can set four movement directions to move the title on the image.
You can also set any course of movement. Read more about this in the chapter
"Animating objects" (view page 147).
Title object:
The left button vertically centers the title object on the monitor; the
right centers it horizontally.
Here you can enter text for your title instead of editing it directly in the program
monitor.
This deletes selected title objects.
Use the arrow keys below the title editor to move from one title
object to the other without having to search in the arranger. Captions
are not included in this.
3D Text
3D text can be created directly in the title editor.
Title
This button only appears when you have created a title object and it is selected
in the arranger.
• Open the title editor and then click on the 3D Title button.
The title object will now be turned into a Xara 3D Maker object. If you have also
installed Xara 3D Maker, the program will open so you can edit the text. Presets are
also located in the Media Pool under "Titles -> 3D". You can enter or edit text here.
Note: For more information about Xara 3D Maker, please refer to the help file. You
can open it by pressing "F1" from within the program.
Advanced settings
Only use visible TV area: The text will be zoomed so that it will always be within the
TV's limits, which is specified in the Movie effect settings (view page 162).
Background: Specify here whether the text's background should appear black or
white. This is only meaningful if no other video or image object is in the background.
Text effects: Here you can edit different text effects in detail. One color may be set for
each effect.
Shadow: The position of the shadow may be set on the horizontal and vertical axes.
Transparency makes the background "shine through" more or less.
Soften: Makes the edge of the shadow harder or softer.
Outline: A border appears around the letters in the text.
119
120
Width: You can enter the width of the frame in points.
Color: Clicking on this button opens a color selection dialog, where you can set the
frame color.
Filled in: The text will be filled with the color selected in the Title Editor. If the option is
deactivated, only the frame will be visible, and the background will appear instead of
the color fill.
3D: The text appears with a 3D-style outline. The width and thickness of the 3D
contour (H) can be set in points.
Creating titles using a template
The Media Pool includes the tab "Title" with folders filled with additional, thematically
named title templates.
• Open one of these entries and select any title template. A simple mouse click
provides a preview, and double clicking creates a title object using the template.
Note: Templates may be applied to an existing title object. Settings outside of the
text will be lost!
Create titles without a template
Here's how you can create titles without a template:
• In the Arranger, place the playback marker at the position where the title should
appear.
• Click on the "General" entry under "Title" in the Media Pool.
• Click in the program monitor at the location where the title should be positioned.
• Next, simply enter the text using your keyboard.
• After the text has been entered, click the check mark in the program monitor to
confirm it.
Title
• You can format your title later with the title editor in the Media Pool.
You can open the title editor by pressing "T". A title object will be created
where you can enter your text directly.
Edit titles retroactively
• Double click on a title in the program monitor (or the title object while in
"timeline" mode).
• Now change the text however you like.
• Confirm your entry by clicking the check mark next to the positioning frame.
Position titles
• Click in the program monitor once on the title to access the positioning frame.
Simply move the positioning frame via drag & drop.
• The size of the positioning frame may be adjusted via the corners, and the size of
the text will also change accordingly.
Click once on the button in the Media Pool under "Title -> General" to
center the title horizontally or vertically in the monitor.
Fade in date as title
MAGIX Video Pro X5 is also able to insert the time and date into the image material.
To do this, select the option "Show date as title" in the video object's context menu.
If a DV-AVI file is involved (e.g. a digital recording from a camcorder), then the
recording date for the selected position will be used. If another type of file is involved,
then the creation date of the file will be used as the timecode. Following this, the title
editor will appear to adjust the information.
The context menu of the program monitor also features the option "Show playing
time". This also creates a timecode.
121
122
Timecode
In the "Timecode" section you will find several presets for controlling the timecode
display. This function adds a special timecode object to a free track under the video
object.
You can adjust the position of the timecode by moving the timecode object in the
preview monitor. The handles on the borders can be used to adjust the size.
Presets can be customized in "Settings".
Timecode source: The type of timecode can be selected here. The options are:
• Movie time: The time position in the MAGIX Video Pro X5 arranger.
• Object time: The time position within the timecode object independent of the
movie length and the position in the arrangement.
• Recording date/time: The date and time when the footage was recorded. This
timecode information must be saved in the video, otherwise the display will be
empty.
• Recording timecode: The timecode for the video that is created by the camera.
This timecode information must be saved in the video, otherwise the display will
be empty.
Add variable: The date/time format of the selected preset is displayed as variables in
the format line (variables are enclosed in square brackets). These can be deleted or
Effects
additional variables can be added. You can also add your own text and adjust the
separators between the variables.
Font: Select a font.
Set character width: For fonts with variable character widths (proportional fonts) the
display will wobble during playback because the 1 is narrower than the 0 for example.
For this reason, these types of fonts are not displayed in the selection list.
Color: Here you can set the color of the font and the background. The background
remains transparent when the "Transparent" function is activated.
Adjust to project length: Adjusts the length of the timecode object to match the
length of the project to ensure that it is displayed at all times.
Counter start/progress: If you have included a counter as a variable or are using one
as a preset, you can set its characteristics here. For example, the counter can start at
10 and the progress can be measured in steps of 5. If you want the counter to count
backwards, add a minus to the "Progress" entry.
Effects
MAGIX Video Pro X5 offer a large palette of various video effects. The video effects
used the most can be found directly in the Media Pool, while others can be found in
the object context menu or in the "Effects" menu.
Apply effects to objects
There are various approaches for applying effects:
• Video and audio effect presets are loaded into the corresponding object from the
Media Pool using drag & drop.
• Effects that can be animated (in the Media Pool under "Effects -> Video effects /
movement effects") will be applied directly to the objects selected beforehand as
soon as changes are made in Media Pool.
This button resets all of the current effect settings.
Note: If you animated the effect using keyframes, resetting will affect the entire
animation. Individual keyframes may be deleted via click + Del (view page 149).
123
124
Transfer effects settings
The items video effects (view page 128), movement effects (view page 137), and
Stereo 3D (view page 163) on all effects pages provide the option to transfer the
current effects settings to other objects or to load previously saved settings. Use the
above right arrow button to open the video effects menu.
Save/load video effects: The current effects settings may be saved for later use in
other projects or previously saved settings may be loaded. A dialog allows the effects
to be selected.
Reset video effects: Resets the effects settings for the selected object.
Copy/paste video effects: Copies or inserts the current settings as a new object. Use
the dialog to select which settings should be copied.
Apply video effects to all: Copies the current effects settings to all objects in the
arrangement. Use the dialog to specify which settings should be copied.
Apply video effects to all the following objects: Copies the current effects settings to
all of the following objects in the arrangement. Use the dialog to specify which
settings should be copied.
Load effects mask (in the Plus version): An effects mask may be loaded for a selected
object.
Effects
Comparison image in the source monitor
When editing effects in video and image objects, MAGIX Video Pro X5 offers a
comparison mode which lets you compare the before and after state directly.
Selected object without effects: Outside of effects pages, the object is displayed
completely without effects; inside effects pages, the object is displayed without
effects from the current effects page. The "Color" effects page remains open and all of
the effects except "Color" are applied. This options synchronizes the playback marker
between the program and the source monitor.
Selected object: The selected object is displayed with all of the applied effects. The
playback marker may be moved along the arrangement, for example to compare the
beginning with the end of an edited object. This option synchronizes the playback
marker between the program and source monitor.
Before selected object: Displays the object before the selected object in the same
track. This enables the edited effects on sequential objects to be compared more
easily.
Following the selected object: The object located on the same track after the selected
object is displayed for comparison in the source monitor. This enables edited effects
on sequential objects to be compared more easily.
Select object...: Clicking selects the desired object. An object may therefore be edited
and then used as a reference for the following effects processes, for example.
Remove comparison image: The comparison image is removed from the source
monitor.
Note: Program settings enables you to activate "Comparison image in source
monitor for editing effects in the Media Pool". If this option is activated, the
"Selected objects without effects" comparison mode will be automatically activated
when switching into the Media Pool effects, and will be automatically deactivated
when the mode is exited. This serves to compare the original and edited image.
This automation will be suppressed if the option is deactivated.
Preview rendering
With MAGIX Video Pro X5 you can pre-render specific sections of your movie. This is
especially useful if smooth playback is not possible due to the applied effects and
125
126
transitions. The advantage versus the option "Combine audio and video" in the "Edit"
menu is that all of the objects will be maintained in the arrangement. The rendered
material will only be played in the background when the playback marker reaches the
corresponding position.
Preview rendering is available in timeline mode and multicam mode.
Note about multicam mode: Only the source tracks will be rendered, not the
target tracks.
MAGIX Video Pro X5 offers two options:
• It can automatically indicate all sections that can be rendered.
• Or, alternatively, you can indicate the section that should be pre-rendered
manually.
Note: The format that is used to render can be set through "File -> Settings ->
Preview rendering (view page 253)".
Automatic preview rendering
When using automatic preview rendering, you don't have to think about which
sections could be affected. MAGIX Video Pro X5 analyzes your computer's
performance and determines which sections can be considered for preview rendering.
To perform automatic preview rendering, proceed as follows:
♠Step 1: Click on preview rendering button above the track header next to the
timeline.
Video object
effects".
Color: In the preview monitor, drag the cursor over the color that should be
transparent and select a section. The video is made transparent in the sections with
this color and the video on the top track will show “through”.
Mix: This button mixes the two videos together based on the brightness. Brighter
areas accumulate and quickly appear white; darker areas have less of an effect on the
result.
Colors to be hidden
Green/blue/black/white: All green/blue/black/white areas of the video below
appear transparent. This makes it possible to "place" a person who has been recorded
in front of a blue background into any type of landscape.
Water: Only the contours of the upper video are mixed, which results in something
like a water effect..
Alpha: This video effect uses the brightness of a video to control a transition effect
between two other videos on neighboring tracks. The additional videos should be
situated directly above and below the alpha-keying object.
In all black parts of the alpha-keying object, the top video is faded in, while in all white
passages the bottom video is shown. Grey passages are permeable for both videos
and create a mixture of the two. In the case of colored passages, the brightness of the
color is used for control purposes.
You can use the "Threshold value", "Transition area" and "Antispill" controls to finetune your results, e. g. to remove reflections of hidden colors on surfaces or to
sharpen the transitions to objects.
Video Level
Changes the brightness of the video before additional video effects are applied. This
can have a serious influence on the effects, in particular on Chroma Keying. The level
setting may be automated so that two videos can be mixed dynamically with each
other. Read more about this in the chapter "Animating objects" (view page 147).
133
134
Art filter
Erosion: The image is broken-up by means of small rectangles and resembles a
"patchwork".
Dilate: This works like erosion, but uses light surfaces instead of dark ones to form the
rectangle.
Emboss creates a relief of the image edges, in which case strong contrast differences
are interpreted as edges.
Substitution: Using the rainbow scale red, green, and blue components are
exchanged. Quickly create surreal landscapes or a green face!
Move: The color values are inverted increasingly. Blue colors turn red, and green
appears purple.
Quantize: Depending on the setting, colors are either rounded up or down so that the
overall number of colors is reduced. This creates interesting grids and patterns.
Colorize: Using this slider, color in the video with red, green, and blue colors (the
basic TV colors).
Contour: The image is reduced to its contours in two sizes (3 x 3 or 5 x 5). It is
possible to select either vertical or horizontal contours.
Effects
Distortion
Motion: Moving parts of the image are enhanced and warped.
Echo: The moving images create an optical "echo"; previous images stand still and
gradually turn paler until they completely disappear.
Whirlpool: The image is twisted into an "S" shape.
Fisheye: The perspective is distorted as if the image were viewed through a fisheye
lens.
Mosaic: The video is depicted as a mosaic.
Lens: The image is dynamically distorted at the edges.
Sand: The image is depicted in a granulated manner.
Kaleidoscope: The left upper corner is mirrored horizontally and vertically.
Mirror horizontal/vertical center: The object is mirrored vertically or horizontally – it
appears on its side or upside down.
135
136
Sharpness
Sharpen: The fader allows you to regulate the level of image sharpness or apply a soft
filter.
Apply to: Allows you to set just how much the sharpness settings should be applied
to surfaces or to edges. This enables you to effectively reduce ongoing image
distortions (noise).
Artistic blur: Here you can apply various soft filters. The achieved effects are much
stronger compared to simply sliding the controller under "Sharpen".
Tip: Artificial blur achieves good effects when used for transitions. To do so, you can
animate (view page 147) the first video so that it is strongly blurred and let the
second video begin with blur and slowly return to normal focus.
Speed
The playing speed can be adjusted with the slider control. The range between 0 and 1
plays the video slowly; values above 1 accelerate playback. If playing speed is
increased, the object length in the arranger is automatically shortened.
Effects
Note: You can also set keyframes (view page 147) in order to adjust the speed of
certain segments of a video. The corresponding audio material will be adjusted in
accordance with the video.
Frame rate: Here you can set the video's frame rate directly. Changing it directly
affects the speed factor, while moving the slider conversely results in changing video
frame rate.
Algorithm: Here you can determine how the soundtrack should be treated.
"Timestretching" changes the playback speed, without influencing the pitch:
"Resampling" changes the playback speed together with the pitch (the faster the
playback, the higher the pitch).
Reverse: With this button the playback direction will be reversed (with the same
tempo).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this option if your video is jerky as a result
of being slowed down. MAGIX Video Pro X5 then automatically fills in missing frames
so that your video can be played back smoother.
Movement effects in the Media Pool
Size/Position
Values in: Set whether the values are applied in percent or pixels.
Position
Left: Enter the start position from the left image border.
137
138
Top: Enter the start position from the top image border.
Center: Based on the current image size, the image starting points (left and top) will
be positioned so that they are centered.
Note: Negative values can, of course, also be entered. The image borders will then
be outside of the visible area.
Size
Width: Enter the width of the image.
Height: Enter the height of the image here.
Maximize: The image will be maximized according to the movie's resolution.
Set original size: The image will be scaled to its original size.
Keep proportions: This option makes sure that the image will not be stretched or
distorted. The proportions of width to height will remain the same.
Zoom
Use the zoom slider to enlarge the complete section proportionately (values greater
than 100) or to reduce it (values less than 100).
Note: When zooming, the image will be centered automatically, i.e. anchor point =
center point.
Section
Sections may be used to display only a portion of the image.
Effects
Note: In order to move the section with a movement effect across the image, please
refer to the following section "Camera/zoom".
The program monitor enables an image section to be specified. Use the eight handles
to reduce the frame displayed in the monitor and move it to the desired position.
Preview: With this button you can preview how a segment will look like in
the movie. Click on this button a second time in order to keep editing this
segment.
Keep proportions: In this menu, you can select the format for the section. The format
of the original picture is used as the default.
Fill screen: If this check box is selected, the section will be zoomed to fullscreen. If this
option is deactivated, only the section of the image within the frame will be displayed
and the edge will remain black or filled with the object behind it.
Camera/zoom
With this effect, you can move a previously selected frame inside the image, creating
an impression of camera movement or zoom.
Movement in direction
Determine the direction in which the selected section or image will
move in the process during the time selected under "time period". In
addition to horizontal and vertical movements, diagonal movements are
also possible.
Preview: Displays a preview of the section at the playback marker location.
139
140
Zooming
Zoom out: The selected picture section is displayed and is then zoomed
out to display the entire picture according to the time set in “Length of
movement”. If no portion is previously set, a central portion of 50% of
the picture is set.
Zoom in: The entire picture is displayed and then zoomed in to show
only a smaller picture section according to the time set in “Length of
movement”. If no portion is previously set, a central portion of 50% of
the picture is set.
Duration
The option selected here sets the position where the keyframes of each movement
effect are set by default. You determine the positions where a movements begins and
ends.
Note: Automatically placed keyframes may be edited retroactively, and the option
will then be set to "Use custom settings". Read the section "Retroactively editing an
effect's keyframes" (view page 148) in the chapter "Objects".
Reset: This option applies a static zoom to show the selected section of the
picture only.
The size and the position of the image can be roughly entered in the program monitor
by simply moving the image into it and dragging on the handles. The frame of the
video monitor with handles can also be moved with the keyboard.
Keyboard shortcuts for moving the edges of the frame that are visible in the video
monitor:
Nudge the screen 1 pixel:
Nudge the screen 5 percent:
Arrow keys
Shift + arrow keys
For animated movement effects, it often makes sense to zoom out of the video
monitor and use the resulting workspace to, for example, let a minimized image or
text object move through the picture.
Keyboard shortcuts for the preview picture:
Thumbnail zoom in/out:
Move thumbnail:
Ctrl + mouse wheel
Ctrl + left mouse button + drag
See the "Animation from outside of the image" (view page 151) section for more
detail.
Effects
Rotation/Mirroring
Rotation
Rotates the image on the horizontal axis.
Rotates the image on the vertical axis.
Rotates the image around its center point.
Straighten horizon
The image can be rotated around the axis using the slider. The image is automatically
zoomed to avoid black edges.
Show guidelines: Activating this check box displays a grid in the program monitor for
orientation during horizontal straightening.
Zoom automatically: This function is preset to active. Unwanted black borders that
result from horizon straightening are eliminated by zooming in on the image.
141
142
Note: If the image format does not completely conform to the current movie format
and already has black borders, these cannot be eliminated with the horizon
straightening function.
Mirror/Rotate
Mirrors the image on the vertical axis.
Mirrors the image on the horizontal axis.
Rotates the image 90° clockwise.
Rotates the image 90° counterclockwise.
3D distortion
This enables the perspective of images to be distorted and moved. This produces a
3D impression by causing several components of the image to appear further in front
of others.
Enter the individual corner points numerically or move them in the program monitor
using the mouse here.
Note: Compared to Stereo3D, this does not involve genuine 3D positioning. The
image is only distorted so that it appears three-dimensional on a normal twodimensional monitor.
Stereo3D in the Media Pool
This accesses the program's Stereo 3D functionality. Please read the corresponding
chapter "Stereo3D". (view page 163)
Effects
Audio effects in the Media Pool
The Media Pool offers various opportunities to add effects to your audio objects.
Another advantage of this so-called "object-oriented" working method is that
automations are moved automatically with objects when they are moved, since they
are attached to the object and not to the track itself.
See the "Audio effects" (view page 173) section below for more detail.
General
Under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General", you will find audio effects that can be
animated using effects curves (view page 147). This means that certain effect settings
can be changed during playback.
Effect curves are always object related, i.e. they only apply to one object and are
moved or copied together with the object.
Note: The faders AUX 1 and AUX 2 control the volume at which the object's signal is
sent to the corresponding FX tracks in the mixer.
Audio Cleaning (view page 174), Echo/Reverb (view page 178), and
Timestrech/Resample can also be accessed here.
Note: Volume and balance curves are also present in the track. The set values in the
curve are also active, respectively.
143
144
Audio effect templates
Here you'll find a broad palette of effects settings which you can add to audio objects
via drag & drop.
Design elements in the Media Pool
You will find a wide selection of decorative elements in this category: Templates for
collages, color fields for backgrounds and test images and freely positionable image
objects for animations.
You should first look through all the options and take stock of what there is.
• Open the categories one after the other to get a general impression.
An example of application can be found in pointer objects (Media Pool > Effects >
Design elements > Image objects > Present). These are various arrow symbols, with
an added video mix effect. With them, you can select certain sections of the image.
The design elements create own objects on a different track. You can use the lower
handles to adjust the size of the borders to fit any length of the video. You can also
achieve interesting effects by fading in and out.
Note: Some design elements require track 6 to be empty. When using these, you
will be notified of this before applying them.
My Presets in the Media Pool
Your personal effects configurations in the Media Pool can be saved and applied again
later. You can reach these customized configurations in the Media Pool folder "Effects
> My Presets". They may be dragged onto objects as usual.
First, this folder will be empty, of course, because you still have to create your own
configurations.
Additional Effects
Video effects plug-ins are additional programs from third-party developers that may
be used to add additional video effects to video objects. MAGIX Video Pro X5
supports the plug-in format of the freeware video editing software "VirtualDub", as
well as the "VitaScene" and "Adorage" programs from "proDAD". A selection of
tested VirtualDub plug-ins (.vdf files, also called VirtualDub filters) may be
downloaded as an installer package directly from within MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Effects
Important applications for plug-ins include the application of special effects and useful
video editing tools.
Using video effect plug-ins
In order to be able to use plug-ins, they must be installed first. MAGIX Video Pro X5
checks whether plug-ins are already available. If not, it will offer to download them
from the Internet or to set the plug-in path manually.
In order to use a video effect plug-in, select the video or image object first, then open
"Effects -> Extra effects -> Plug-in manager" in the Media Pool menu. This lists all
available plug-ins on the right side of the dialog.
Video plug-ins manager
Effect templates for plug-ins: MAGIX Video Pro X5 does not include plug-ins due to
licensing reasons.
You can save your settings by pressing the "Save" button and
remove them by pressing "Delete".
Available plug-ins: All available plug-ins are listed here.
Add plug-in: The selected plug-in will be added to the editing chain ( "Plug-ins on the
current object" list on the right side of the dialog). You can load as many plug-ins as
you like simultaneously. They are then edited subsequently according to the list
sequence. The plug-in order can be changed using drag & drop in the list.
145
146
Plug-in settings: Opens the settings dialog for the selected plug-in. All plug-in
settings for the entire list can be saved together as a preset (effect templates for plugins).
Advanced...: Opens the dialog with advanced settings.
Navigation buttons: Switch to the previous or next movie via the navigation buttons in
the lower part of the dialog of a movie.
Last used: The settings used for the last videos will be applied. This option is active
only if you edit one image after the next using navigation buttons (see above).
OK: Settings will be applied to the current video.
Apply to all: Effects will be applied to all objects included in the movie.
Cancel: The dialog will close, settings will not be applied.
Advanced...
In the "Advanced" dialog, you can specify the search path for plug-ins. MAGIX Video
Pro X5 checks these for available plug-in files at program start and adds these to the
list of available plug-ins. "Add search path" adds new search paths, and "Delete
searchpath" removes them from the list again.
Check file extension: Accelerates the search for new plug-ins if a larger number of
plug-ins are available by not checking if they are valid.
Scan subfolders: Extends the search to subfolders below the selected paths.
Effects
Local settings
Recalculate video effect plug-in on bitmaps for each frame dynamically: If you apply
a plug-in to a bitmap (image), then this option must be activated in case the plug-in
creates moving effects.
Animate objects, effect curves
The "Effects" tab under "Video effects" and "Movement effects" provide you with the
effects which can animated using keyframes.
The following objects can be animated:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Combined objects
Video objects
Image objects (still images)
Title objects
Audio objects (in the Media Pool under "Effects" > "Audio effects" > "General")
MAGIX 3D Maker objects (3D texts)
Preparing animations
• First, select the object in the arranger to animate. For complex animations, we
recommend placing a marker beforehand for orientation.
• In the Media Pool, open the "Effects" tab and click on the effect you would like to
animate under "Video effects" or "Movement effects".
• If necessary, set up the effect however you would like it for the start of the
animation.
• Using this button, at the bottom of the Media Pool, a timeline may be
shown or hidden. You can see here which animated effects are currently
applied to the selected object. Keyframes may be placed, selected, moved,
and deleted.
There are two stippled lines in the timeline to
help you orientate yourself while you edit
movement. These lines will help you recognize
the start or end of the transition.
Place keyframe
Click the timeline to set the playback marker at the locations where a keyframe should
be added.
147
148
Note: You can also use the timeline in the arranger for exact positioning. Using
project markers (view page 108) is recommended in this case.
• This button places keyframes for all parameters required in the animation.
• Additional keyframes may be added simply by placing the playback marker at the
next keyframe location and changing the effects parameters directly.
The positioned keyframes may also be retroactively moved via drag & drop.
Copy keyframe
• Select the keyframes to be copied by clicking them and then press the
"Copy" button.
• Next, set the playback marker at the location for insertion and the press
the "Insert" button.
Display keyframes of individual parameters
Multiple keyframes are added simultaneously to effects if they include multiple
parameters.
Click the small arrow beside the name of the animated effect
to display all of its parameters.
Now all keyframes of the effects parameter can be individually
moved, deleted, activated, and deactivated.
Note: Only those parameters are listed which are used for the animation. As soon as
another parameter is required for editing the effect, it becomes visible to you here.
Retroactively editing an effect's keyframes
Previously set keyframes can be retroactively and temporarily moved and their values
edited.
• Keyframes may be moved via drag & drop. Simply click on the keyframe to be
moved and drag it to the desired position.
• To change an effects setting for an already positioned keyframe, click the
keyframe and adjust the effect in the Media Pool.
Effects
Soft movement
Normally, a hard, unnatural pan is the result of set keyframes.
This option makes sure that the progression of these movements is executed
more softly and more naturally.
It lets you activate the entire parameter group as well as individual parameter curves.
Delete keyframe
Select the keyframe to be deleted by clicking it.
This button removes the selected keyframe.
Editing an effects curve in the object
Activate effects curve: For each of animated effects parameter, a curve is
created and placed over the object. Click this button to display the effects curve
on the object.
Edit curve points: The curve point can either be edited with
the individual curve points (in "Standard" mouse mode) or
by freely drawing the effect curve (in "Curve" mouse
mode).
New curve points can be added to the curve in "Standard" mode via "Ctrl + Shift" and
clicking; existing ones can be deleted in the same way. Every curve point can be
moved with the mouse horizontally and vertically.
Note: The buttons for activating effects curves are first displayed once the first
keyframe has been placed.
Effects curves - Additional functions
The context menu can also be opened via the small arrow beside the effects indicator.
Delete effects: Removes the selected effect completely.
149
150
Delete effects curve: Removes the effects curve to be created again.
Copy effects curve: The effects curve is copied to the clipboard to be used at other
positions.
Insert effects curve: A previously copied effects curve can be inserted elsewhere with
this function at any time. This may be in the same object or in another object.
Note: If you would like to insert the curve into a longer or shorter object, then think
about setting the option "Connect curve length with object length" correctly before
copying.
Combine effects curve with object length: If this option is set, then changes to object
length will affect the effects curve accordingly.
In practice, this behavior is needed rarely, for example if objects are stretched or
compressed. The option is deactivated by default for this reason.
Load effects curve: A previously saved effects curve may be loaded via this menu
item. This is useful, for example, if you have added your own default animations.
Caution! The current effects curve will be overwritten as another one is loaded.
Save effects curve: Effects curves can be saved as a separate file. This is useful, for
example, if you want to add your own default animations and simply load them again
at other positions again.
Tip: Be aware that during saving the setting "Connect curve length with object
length" is saved as well and applied during loading.
Edit effects curve
This dialog serves to stretch, compress and move effect curves within an object. The
info bar of the dialog will display the effect, whose automation curve is currently being
edited.
Move position
Time: With each click on the arrow, you can move the effect curve forward or back by
the displayed time value.
Effect: Every click on the arrow up or down moves the effect curve by the entered
value. Depending on the effect, it is possible to enter exact or percent values.
Effects
Stretch/Compress
Time: The effect curve will be stretched or compressed by the entered time value.
Invert reverses the curve on the time axis and reinserts it in "reverse". The entire
object duration will be considered.
Effect: The effect curve is stretched or compressed in its values, no time-related
editing takes place. The selected option (see table) is decisive in editing.
Mirror: The entire curve is mirrored along the X-axis, whose position is determined by
the following option (see table).
... around object center:
The X-axis lies exactly at
the center of the object.
...around curve center: The
X-axis lies between the
upper and lower
automation point.
...around curve minimum:
The X-axis lies at the level
of the lowest automation
point.
...around curve maximum:
The X-axis lies at the level
of the highest automation
point.
Animations outside of the image area
Animated effects are useful for making objects or titles appear to "fly" across the
image. In this case it is recommended that the start and end point of the animation
are placed outside of the image.
This will require a video object and a second object to be animated, for example a title
or a small object to float across the video image.
Here's how it works:
• Click on the program monitor and zoom out of the video image (Ctrl + mouse
wheel). This displays the workspace at the edges of the reduced preview image.
151
152
• Select the effect "Size/Position" (view page 137).
• Move the object to be animated to the position on the workspace where the
animation should start; for example, to the left of the preview image:
• Position the playback marker at the location where the animation should start.
• Create a keyframe for the animation start.
• Position the playback marker at the position where the object to be animated
should disappear from the image.
• Move the object to be animated to the position on the workspace where the
animation should end; for example, to the right of the preview image.
• A second keyframe for the end of the animation will be placed automatically.
• Play back the result.
The object to be animated should now fly from left to right through the video picture.
Create effects masks
Create effects masks with MAGIX Video Pro X5
Effects masks help you to apply effects in different areas of one video image with
varying intensity. A specific image is used as a mask to determine the specific areas
where the effect should be applied.
Typical application include:
Effects
• Image optimizations: A typical example are horizontal camera pans of the
horizon, where the lower or upper image area should be made brighter or coloradjusted.
• Eye-catching color gradients, colorations, etc.
• Special effects such as pixelation of a car license plate.
Effects masks are regular image objects, and as such may be animated or attached to
a certain image position to use them as moving video images.
Proceed as follows:
• Select the object in the arrangement to apply the
effects mask to.
• Open the desired effects page in the Media Pool.
• In Media Pool, set the effect parameters which should be applied with the effect
mask. These must be parameters from the "video effects" area (without "speed"
and "chroma key").
• Click on the button with the arrow
pointing down on the effects page and
select "Load effects masks" from the
menu.
In the folder that opens you will now find templates for SD and HD material. Double
click on the mask that you would like to use. The brighter the area in the effects mask,
the stronger the effect will be. Black indicates no effect, and white indicates full effect.
If you use your own color images, only the brightness values will be used.
• In the effect overview you can also
make settings that will apply the effect
mask for all other effects, too. Click on
the masking button for each effect, for
which the effect mask should be
applied.
• Click on the down arrow button again and select the "Delete effect mask" entry
from the menu to remove the effect mask.
153
154
To now apply the mask on a certain portion of the video image, you have to edit it
further. There are many options available for editing effects masks:
• You can define the size and the position of the effect mask in such a way, that the
mask fits exactly over the image element to be edited. Please read more on this in
the section "Position/size" (view page 137).
• You can attach the mask to the position in the video so that it moves together
with the image element. To find out more, read "Attach to picture position in the
video (view page 157)".
• Or animate the effect mask object directly. To proceed, please read the "Animate
objects" (view page 147) section.
T
Tip: You can also use your own effect masks. Any image or photo in JPEG format
can be used. You can draw a suitable image in a graphics program, save it as a JPEG
and load it using the "Load effects mask" option in MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Designing effect masks with Xara Designer
You can also create animated effect masks in Flash format to adjust the effect
regulation to the moving video images. To do this you will need to have either Xara
Photo & Graphics Designer 2013 (or newer) or Xara Designer Pro X (or newer)
installed on your computer.
Please proceed as follows:
1. Select the image or video object for which you would like to create an effect mask.
2. Open the effects page in the Media Pool that will be used as the effect. Click on the
down arrow button and select "Create effect mask".
Here you will also see the option for deleting the effect mask if necessary.
Effects
Xara Photo & Graphic Designer or Xara Designer Pro X will start with the animation
document and the opened frame gallery. The first frame will be added automatically
and will display the selected image or video object from MAGIX Video Pro X5.
3. Create effect mask:
Note: Be aware that the lighter the effect mask, the stronger the effect will be later in
MAGIX Video Pro X5. Black indicates no effect, and white indicates full effect. The
best option is to color the object that will be used as the effect mask white and to
adjust the intensity of the effect yourself in MAGIX Video Pro X5.
• Use the tools in the editor to create the desired mask form. Add an object that
marks the area where the effect should later be applied. It will automatically be
assigned to the first frame.
With the "Invert mask" function in MAGIX Video Pro X5 you can use an object to
indirectly select the precise area where the effect should not be applied.
• Color the object white.
• Give the object a name by clicking on "Names..." in the context menu. Enter the
name under "Names" and click on "Add" and then "Close".
• Create additional frames by clicking on "Copy" in the Frame Animation Gallery.
The object that should move will automatically be added to the new frame.
With each new frame the video moves to the corresponding position making it
easier for you to adjust the objects directly on the video image by moving them to
the right position.
155
156
Tip: More information about Flash animations is available in the documentation for
the editor.
4. Close the document from the external editor. You do not need to save it because it
is automatically transferred to MAGIX Video Pro X5 when it is closed. It will then
appear as a linked effect mask object under the image or video object.
If you would like to edit the effect mask retroactively, double-click on the effect mask
object to start the external editor with the opened mask.
The next thing to do is set up the effect that will be regulated by the effect mask.
5. Set up effect:
• Select the source object for which you just created the mask.
• Set up the effect parameters in the Media Pool that should be regulated by the
effect mask. These must be parameters from the "Video effects" area (without
"speed" and "Chroma Key").
The effect will be applied to the whole object.
Effects
6. Activate effect mask:
In the effect overview click on the mask icon in the bottom edge of the Media Pool for
every effect the mask will be applied to.
You can invert the effect mask by clicking on the small arrow on the left of the effect
mask object. The effects will then be applied to the rest of the image instead of the
mask.
Reverse mask
You can reverse masks: To do so, click on the arrow in the mask
effect object which appears as soon as you place the mouse
cursor over it. All dark areas will become light and all light areas
will become dark. By clicking again, you will remove the reversal
again.
157
158
Attach to picture position in the video
You can attach a video, picture or text object to moved picture content of another
video. The attached object automatically completes the movement of a picture
element from the film, making it appear magnetic. For example, you could use this
method to insert a hat that stays on someone's head throughout, even if the person
hops through the picture.
Let's roll:
• Place an overlay object (e.g. a photo of a hat) on a track below a video with a
moving image element (e.g. a walking person).
• Right click the object and select the "Attach to picture position in the video"
movie point.
• Then click "Continue" in the dialog that appears.
Note: If you want to attach two objects, e.g. a title and a speech bubble, an
additional dialog appears, which lets you select the objects you want to attach to
your video.
• The next dialog asks you to draw a frame around the image content to be tracked.
The content should have high contrast to its background.
• Movement will be automatically calculated and a series of keyframes that control
the position and size of the effect according to your wishes will be generated.
Create overlay graphic/animation
Create vector graphics or animations in an external editor such as Xara Designer Pro
in order to use them as overlay objects in MAGIX Video Pro X5. A typical use
scenario would be to draw an object in order to darken certain portions of the video,
such as a black bar to cover a person's eyes. Overlay objects aren't bound to the
source material by grouping. They can me moved and edited as you please.
Note: This menu will appear only when a corresponding graphics program is
installed on your PC.
To create an overlay object, proceed as follows:
1. In the arrangement, select the image or video object, for which an overlay effect
should be created.
Effects
2. Right-click on this object and in the context menu select "Create overlay
graphic/animation".
The external graphics editor will be launched. Your selected object will be displayed to
help you get a better idea of how to best design your overlay.
3. Create the template for the overlay object. You can use all editor functions.
4. Close the editor You don't have to save the project in the editor, as the overlay
object will automatically be transferred to MAGIX Video Pro X5 and placed below the
image or video object when the program is closed.
You can continue to edit it in MAGIX Video Pro X5 as you wish, for example using
Animated movement effects (view page 137).
Image stabilization
The motion stabilizer reduces unsteady camera motion and helps to smooth pans.
This option can be accessed from the context menu of a video object or the "Effects"
menu > "Open video objects".
Functionality
Image stabilization balances undesired picture movements. The motion stabilizer
equalizes inadvertent movements in the image by moving the image in the opposite
direction in accordance with the wrong movements. This produces unusable edges in
the footage that are cut off automatically, and black strips, which are then removed
using a zoom shot. The result: A clearly more stable, almost imperceptibly larger
picture.
159
160
Application
First you have to check the movie material for shaky scenes. To do this click on the
"Stabilize" button. Based on the preset parameters, a relative shift between the
pictures is calculated. After concluding the analysis, take a look at the suggested
correction, then use the slider for further adjustments. Once you are happy with the
final correction click OK. If the first scan did not provide a satisfactory result, try
changing the parameters below and repeat the process.
Image stabilization dialog
Stabilization radius for analysis: To prevent the image stabilizer from recognizing
every camera movement as unwanted shakiness, you can determine the radius within
which movement is accepted; the larger the stabilization radius, the more shakiness is
corrected. Changing this parameter will require re-analysis of the source footage.
Section of analysis: This area determines the area of the footage that should be
analyzed. The center of the image is preset. If shaking occurs in one area more than in
another, then you can move the analysis area (e.g. a foreground element at the edge
is especially shaky). To do this, use the mouse to “capture” the shaky area. The
smaller the area, the quicker the analysis will be calculated. Generally, changing this
parameter will require re-analysis of the source footage.
Maximum displacement: Correction moves the image accordingly to the shaking
movements. This means that the edge of the image will be removed. This value
determines how large the edge area is which may be cut away by the stabilization
feature; the smaller the value, the less movement correction. Changes to this value
are immediately applied.
Effects
Temporal smoothing: This value determines the speed of the movements considered
shaky. This allows you to differentiate between a panning shot and a nervous handheld shot. Changes to this value are immediately applied.
Cancel: Exits the dialog without accepting changes to settings.
Reset: Resets the current settings.
Image improvements for the entire movie
You can open the effects from the the settings via the "Effects" menu. All of the
settings made here influence the entire movie. Settings are made separately for each
individual movie in the project.
On the right, you'll see a preview of the current setting. Use the position slider to jump
to different positions in the movie or to various scenes in order to see how the
selected setting affects the image material.
Brightness/Contrast
Brightness: Use the sliders to reduce or increase the objects' brightness.
Selective brightness (gamma): “Gamma” determines the mean gray scale that can be
calculated from the various color ranges. "Selective brightness" is the most important
function for image improvement. In the preset list, select the various envelope curves
to edit only the dark, median, or brightest areas of the image.
Using the fader you can also set the power of the brightness/darkness adjustments.
Contrast: You can increase or lower the object's contrast.
Color space correction: This option is effective against powerful colors that violate TV
standards and can no longer be displayed correctly on-screen. The color saturation of
the affected material is thereby reduced until the maximum permitted value is
reached.
Color
Saturation: Use the saturation slider to increase or reduce the hue proportions in the
image. A newly developed algorithm is applied which makes color changes related to
other parameters (e.g. contrast settings) in order to achieve the most natural
coloration possible.
Hue: Use the palette to select a hue for coloring in the picture.
Red/green/blue: Changes the color mix using the slide controller.
161
162
Image sharpness
You can reduce (soften) or increase (sharpen) the object's focus using this slider.
"Fine adjustment" allows you to set how sharp surfaces or edges should appear. Using
it, you can effectively decrease persistent image deficits.
Anti-flickering filter intensity: The anti-flickering filter affects only still images. It is
especially intended for zooms in images with many edges and transitions with high
contrast (e.g. fences, bars, brick walls). High-frequency images such as these begin to
flicker when they are reduced in size. This filter smoothes these edges somewhat.
You should set the intensity of the anti-flickering filter according to your preferences,
because smoothing is always a compromise between good contrast and fluid image
sequence during playback..
Anti-flickering filter intensity: The anti-flickering filter affects only still images. It is
especially intended for zooms in images with many edges and transitions with high
contrast (e.g. fences, bars, brick walls). High-frequency images such as these begin to
flicker when they are reduced in size. This filter smoothes these edges somewhat.
You should set the intensity of the anti-flickering filter according to your preferences,
because smoothing is always a compromise between good contrast and fluid image
sequence during playback.
TV cropping
This option provides optimal adjustment of the image size for a real television screen
(anti-cropping). Without this adjustment, the screen could cut off edges of the image
in some cases.
Show TV screen area in preview monitor: This option displays the image borders of
the television as lines in the preview monitor. The four image borders of the TV area
may be specified via the four input fields. Of course, the real size of the TV image
must be familiar for this. The following process is available to determine this:
The four input fields also enable the borders of the four sides to be adjusted freely in
percent. In this case, the best approach is to determine a balance between reduction,
bar formation, and the image section:
• If all four edges feature the same value, then the image will be reduced
proportionately. In this case no distortions will occur, but there will be bars along
the edges.
• If different values are entered for the 4 fields, the image size is reduced
disproportionately. This will distort the image.
Apply border range to: With this option, the entered values for the four borders are
applied as an image reduction. The result may be checked immediately in the preview
monitor.
Effects
Determining the visible TV frame size
To determine the picture properties of your television as well as optimal image size
editor settings, you should perform a test run:
• Load the project "Visible TV image" from the folder "My Media -> Projects ->
Visible TV image" in the Media Pool.
• Play back the film and read the instructions on the video screen.
• Burn the project to DVD
• Place the disc into the player and play the film. Compare the TV picture to the
picture displayed on your video screen by MAGIX Video Pro X5.
• Determine the proportional value of the borders cropped by the television with
the four measurement scales along the edges of the test picture.
• Enter the values in the "Full TV size" editor.
The image size is now optimized to your TV picture. Please note: Depending on
device settings and disc media type, the cropping values may vary slightly.
Image improvements for individual objects
The context menu or in "Effects -> Video object effects" features various adjustments
for selected video and image objects.
Interpolation for interlace material: Select this option to remove interlace artifacts
from the (video) image. If, for instance, you extract still shots from a video, interlace
artifacts appear in sequences which feature movement.
Anti interface filter: Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and
high contrast. This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.
Border crop adjustment: Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback
on your television. Values stored in "Film effect settings (view page 162)" will be
applied.
163
164
Stereo3D
MAGIX Video Pro X5 enables the editing and creation of "genuine" 3D videos and
photos. First, let's create an overview of this complex topic by familiarizing ourselves
with the most important principles and the golden rules that are involved. Next, we'll
look at the individual steps of the workflow in more detail.
Note concerning 3D content: Some people experience unpleasantness (e. g.
headaches, straining, exhaustion of the eyes, or nausea) when viewing 3D videos.
We recommend taking regular breaks for this reason. In case of problems, the user
should immediately stop use and refer to a doctor or optometrist. Incorrect
production of 3D-content may also produce these symptoms.
Warning for small children: The sight of small children (especially those younger
than six years old) is still developing. We recommend referring to a doctor or
optometrist prior to allowing your child to view 3D-videos.
3D basics
Human eyes perceive objects from 2 different angles and our brain "calculates"
images from this information. This way we can tell the distance and position of an
object. For this reason, 3D material should be shot according to this principle.
Viewing 3D
A regular screen or TV can show images only in 2 dimensions, and various
technologies have been developed to enable perception of images in 3D. To this day,
all technologies share the following: You need special glasses to deliver different
information to the left and right eyes. We will examine these technologies in detail
later.
The three golden rules
• Stay within limits during recording: To make a 3D recording (view page 165) with
realistic depth information, certain limits must be respected. The most important
rule is not to go below the point of minimum distance. Minimum point is the
point in the picture, where the camera is the closest.
• Frame closest point: In order to place the 3D effect behind the imaginary frame,
both image components must over lay each other exactly at the closest point. At
the same time, the same objects must be visible at the edges of both partial
images, for which, if needed, you can use the Cropping function in the Media Pool
(view page 138).
Stereo3D
Note: The imaginary window is a type of a plane, behind which the 3D movie plays.
You select the closest, frontmost point. Not keeping up with this rule can result in
the object to "jump out" of the imaginary window, which when used too much, can
cause headaches.
• Maintain realistic eye angles: Object with a 3D depth effect viewed as a red/cyan
image (Anaglyph) without glasses will appear displaced. This displacement
should, if possible, take up less than 1/30 of the entire image. Otherwise, it will
appear that the eyes are looking in different directions.
Notice: Displacement may only occur along the horizontal axis. Displacements on
the vertical axis and rotated portions must be adjusted.
Record 3D
The distance between eyes in humans is ca. 65 mm, which forms the so-called
"stereo base width". But because our eyes are dynamic and we can even "cross" our
eyes, it is possible to focus on objects that are closer.
Various techniques exist for 3D recording. Each method has its advantages and
disadvantages:
• 3D cameras with two lenses: The advantages are obvious; these cameras produce
3D material without excessive work involved. The disadvantage is that the stereo
base width (lens distance) cannot be changed.
• Two cameras on a special mount: This involves a little more work. Two cameras
are mounted on a special support to record material for the left and the right side
of the 3D image simultaneously; microphone booms for stereo recordings may
also be used for this purpose.
The disadvantage in this case is that the shutter releases have to be pressed at
exactly the same time if there are moving objects in the picture. In case of video,
both movies must be synchronized before being edited.
Advantages: Stereo base width may be changed by adjusting the distance
between the cameras; larger selection of camera models.
• Two photos via the same camera: This technique only allows still images. The
camera is simply used to record two images from different perspectives, and
these are used as the right and left images. For best results, use a tripod.
• Consistently fast camera movement, e. g. along a street: Only a single
conventional camera is required in this case, but the range of applications is very
limited. This is the most cost-effective method for creating 3D videos. Material is
filmed at a speed of circa 6-to 15 km/h. During editing, the edited video object is
duplicated and one of the videos is played back with a time lapse. The movement
165
166
direction determines which is the right and left image. 3D photos may also be
created using this method.
Warning, minimum distance!
The position of the object closest to the lens is designated as the minimum point. This
minimum point may not exceed a specific minimum point; this is easy to calculate via
the following formula:
Note: Lens focal point (e. g. 25 mm) x stereo base width (e. g. 65 mm) x 1.5* /1
mm= minimum point (2437.5 mm ~ 2.44 m)
*1.5 is a factor derived from the cut-off appearing when filming through a lens.
**1 mm is the so-called "deviation" or "spatial dimension". This only involves a rough
value in this case.
Examples for 3D cameras:
Panasonic HDC-SDT750 ( base width 12 mm): minimum point is approx. 1.5 m.
Fuji REAL 3D W3 (base width 75 mm): minimum point at approx. 3 m; for longdistance recordings as much as 8 m.
This so-called minimum point has an important role in other aspects of 3D editing.
Prepare 3D editing
3D videos are filmed and saved by different cameras, which means: depending on the
camera model or recording method, the videos or images vary.
In one file
Many cameras, especially for photo recordings, create one single file containing the
left and the right image next to one another.
• Drag these files from the Media Pool directly into your arrangement.
• Select the created objects.
• Select the "Side-by-Side (left images left/right)" entry in the Media Pool under
"Effects > Stereo3D > Properties > Create stereo".
In multiple files
Some 3D cameras create a file for each the left and the right side. This working
technique works also if you simply take 2 pictures with a regular photo camera.
• In the Media Pool, open the folder in which the desired file can be found.
• Sort the files in increasing order according to the date. This way, all files will lie in
pairs one below the other.
Stereo3D
• Now, select the files and drag them from the Media Pool directly into your
arrangement.
• In the Media Pool select "Side-by-side (left image right/left) under "Effects >
Stereo 3D > Properties > Create stereo" for material with halved width.
Note: If you have created side-by-side material yourself (e.g. placed two photos next
to each other in an image file), proceed as described, but at the end select the "sideby-side (left image left/right)" for material with full width.
Set playback mode for 3D
There are various techniques available for playback of 3D videos on the computer.
Depending on the technology used, the corresponding playback mode may be
activated in MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Select the 3D mode you want to work with in the upper left corner of
the video monitor.
Here is a list of available techniques and the corresponding requirements:
3D mode
View partially interlaced
Equipment
Polarizing filter
Requirements
• Polarizing filter glasses
• Special monitor, typically referred
to as a 3D monitor or similar
Note: You can choose between right or left image first, depending on which type of
display produces better results on your monitor.
Shutter export
Shutter mode
• nVidia 3D Vision Kit
• 120 Hz monitor/projector
Side-by-SideDisplay
Side-by-side
• 3D TV device
Note: You can choose between right or left image first, depending on which type of
display produces better results on your monitor.
167
168
Note: These three modes should be set only when the preview image is to be
exported to a separate monitor or TV device. Shutter mode also requires a 3Dcapable graphics card.
Anaglyph display
Color anaglyphs
• Red/cyan glasses
Align videos and pictures for 3D
Anaglyph display is recommended for this and can be set in the video monitor (view
page 167). Only in this mode is precise geometric alignment of images is possible.
Note: In case you wish to edit 3D-video material, it is recommended to conduct
scene recognition and split the video into individual scenes. This is necessary
because the left and right side of each scene must be arranged individually.
The so-called minimum point is the point in the 3D picture that is closest to the
lenses. This forms the "center" of the 3D image and must be defined as such in
MAGIX Video Pro X5.
To do this, go to "Media Pool -> Effects -> Stereo 3D" > "Alignment".
Move both images one over the other, so that the minimum point of both sides is at
the same location on the screen.
You should first see whether automations for spatial adjustment and synchronization
deliver desired results. Click on the button "Automatic".
If this does not produce the desired effect, proceed as follows:
• Find the minimum point in the image.
Stereo3D
• If the images are offset vertically, they need to be balanced using the lower of the
two slide controllers under "Spatial alignment".
• If the images have rotational differences, you have to adjust these with the knob.
• Try to position the minimum points of both sides precisely one above the other
using the upper slider.
• To test the results, put on the cyan/red glasses. In case the image has an
exaggerated spatial depth, try to position the left and right sides closer to each
other using the controls under "Spatial alignment".
• Use perspective correction in case the left and right image haven't been recorded
in quite the right perspective in relation to each other in order to be able to join
them into a single clear 3D image. Enter values into the dialog or drag on window
edges in the video monitor.
Turn camera movements into 3D videos
Camera movements may be transformed into 3D videos by being duplicated and
converted via time displacement. To do so, you can simply record on the right or the
left side while, for example, driving along a street.
The speed should be set between 6-15 km/h (approx. 4-10 mph) and depends on the
frame rate, the focal point, and the distance of the objects being filmed (among other
things). At increased speeds, it may occur that the spatial impression is too strong
and the filmed material seems unnatural and unpleasant.
• If the video is in the arrangement, the stereo depth for the 2D object may be set
in the Media Pool via "Effects -> Stereo 3D --> Properties".
• Depending on the direction of the recordings, you will have to move the control
either to the right or the left.
• Check the results in the anaglyph display with red/cyan glasses
169
170
• Correct any unrealistic effects by adjusting the controller in the opposite
direction.
• If the spatial depth is exaggerated, reduce the changed parameters.
Note: Not only camera movements, but also other 2D materials may be arranged
spatially.
3D material may be edited with the same functions as 2D material.
Export and burn 3D videos
There are no special requirements for export and burning. Only the desired 3D
technique is specified.
Anaglyph: This technique is recommended for uncomplicated playback of finished
videos or playback via conventional TV sets or projectors. Viewers must simply put
on a pair of red/cyan glasses to be able to enjoy a 3D film.
Side-by-side: Create 3D movies for a 3D-capable playback device without having to
compromise the quality. It doesn't matter initially whether your video is viewed in
"Shutter" mode or via "Polarized filter".
• Depending on the playback device, you should set double the resolution in order
to get an image in full resolution for the left and right partial image.
• Not all playback devices are capable of double resolution. If this is the case for
your device, 50 % pinched images will be displayed. The quality is nevertheless
higher than output via the anaglyph technique.
Note: When exporting into Side-by-Side- formats, make sure that the horizontal
resolution equals the sum of both images, while the aspect ratio (such as 16:9)
relates to one test image!
Only left/right side: With these settings, you won't export in 3D, but just one side of
your 3D -video.
Flicker image: This way you can view 3D material without 3D glasses. The material
will be shown in an alternating order, creating an impression of flickering images.
On top of each other: This export option is similar to the "Side-by-Side" option. The
images will be exported not next to each other, but one over the other.
• Depending on the playback device, you should set double resolution to get an
image in full resolution for the top and bottom partial image.
Stereo3D
• Not all playback devices are capable of double resolution. If this is the case for
your device, 50 % pinched images will be displayed. The quality is nevertheless
higher than output via the anaglyph technique.
Note: When exporting into the one-over-the-other-formats, make sure that the
vertical resolution is the sum of both images, but that the aspect ration (e. g. 16:9)
relates to the partial image!
Export files/upload movies to the Internet
All file exports can be found via "File > Export movie" or "File > Online". Depending on
the export format and destination, the export dialog also allows the 3D technique to
be used to be selected.
Burn
When burning a Blu-ray Disc or DVD, you must first open the encoder settings in the
burn dialog and set the desired 3D technology. Next, you may proceed to burn the
disc as usual.
171
172
Audio editing
For comprehensive audio track editing that goes beyond volume level adjustment,
audio must be placed on a separate track.
1.
2.
To place audio on a separate track, right-click on the desired object. The
context menu will open.
Select "Audio and waveform display" > "Audio on separate track" or use the
"Ctrl + H" shortcut. The object's audio track will then be placed on its own
track directly below and can be edited.
In principle, any track in MAGIX Video Pro X5 can be used as a sound track. There are
no specific track types. You can also place other audio objects, such as background
music, on other tracks. But it is easier not to mix object types within one track.
Load and edit audio files
• All importable audio files can be selected using the Media Pool.
• You can load the file into the source monitor by double-clicking it in the Media
Pool. You can preview the file with the help of the transport control of the source
monitor.
• You can drag the files with a held-down mouse key into the project clipboard
(drag & drop). Tracks from audio CDs may also be integrated via drag & drop.
• You can activate the waveform display with a right-click on the audio object,
recognizable by its volume progression inside the object.
• Edits, fine positioning, volume settings, and fading in and out may all be adjusted
directly in the arranger using the object handles.
• Various effect curves (view page 149) may be selected for audio tracks,
dynamically controlling selectable effects, volume or stereo panorama.
Audio editing
Audio effects
Automatic track damping
This command from the context menu automatically dampens the volume of other
audio objects. The volume of the selected object on the track remains unchanged.
Only original sound: Here you can also specify whether you want to dampen the
original sound of the video or all audio tracks.
Transition length: In the dialog you can activate and deactivate the value of the
dampening. You can use this command while recording audio (view page 84) (Audio
recording, advanced options).
Create mono objects
Mono recordings can leave noise on the second track, e.g. a mono microphone
recording. You can deactivate the track with the noise by selecting the function "Use
only left side" or "Use only right side" (but not with mono videos).
You can find this function in the audio and video object context menu under "Audio
functions".
Using audio effects
Object effects
Just like with video objects, there are individually adjustable effects and effect
templates for audio objects. These influence only selected objects. These can be
found in the Media Pool under "Effects" > "Audio effects" or in the "Effects" menu >
"Audio object effects" (view page 143).
Track effects
Track effects always apply to all audio objects of a track. They are set in the mixer
(view page 174). You can open the mixer by pressing the M key on your keyboard.
Tip: You can adjust the volume of the entire track in the track header.
173
174
Audio effects plug-ins
MAGIX Video Pro X5 supports VST as well as DirectX audio plug-ins. These are
usually effects modules such as reverb, equalizer, dynamics compression, etc.
Installation
Before using audio effect plug-ins, they first have to be installed – this process may be
different depending on the plug-in. VST plug-ins are typically saved in a certain
directory, which must be entered in the MAGIX Video Pro X5 path settings. After the
path has been indicated, MAGIX Video Pro X5 scans it for working plug-ins and offers
them to be used. You can also indicated multiple locations where VST plug-ins are
installed.
Using plug-ins
Two so-called slots for track effects are located in the channel strip of
the mixer for the corresponding track as well as in the FX tracks.
Clicking on the small triangle will let you select an effect from the list.
Select "No effect" to remove a plug-in from the slot.
Master effects
Master effects influence the mixed sum of all audio tracks. For this purpose a Master
Audio Effects Rack and further plug-ins are installed in the Mixer window. The
MAGIX Mastering Suite (view page 183) is also available to help produce perfect
sound.
Sound optimization
This option opens an editor for correcting audio material discrepancies.
Select the cleaning function you desire from the upper part of the dialog:
• The equalizer (on page 177) allows you to manipulate the frequency spectrum –
perfect for cleaning up muffled dialog.
• The compressor is a dynamic volume control that lends the overall sound a
deeper, richer quality.
• The stereo FX processor justifies the position of the sound in the stereo
panorama.
• DeNoiser, DeClipper, and DeHisser are professional noise reduction tools that do
exactly what their titles say they do.
Presets: You can try out the suitability of a number of presets in the preset menu.
Audio editing
Temporarily deactivate all effects: Switches all the effects off.
Apply to all scenes: Applies the selected cleaning settings of all effects to every scene
of the movie.
Declipper
Should the input level of an audio recording be too high, overmodulation may result at
the louder parts (the signal peaks). This digital distortion is also called "clipping": At
the overmodulated area, the values that are too high are simply cut off, and typical,
quite unpleasant-sounding crackling and distortion appear.
MAGIX Video Pro X5 contains a special function for dealing with digital clipping and
analog distortions. Of course, this only works to a certain degree.
Using the fader you can set at what level the Declipper should register a signal as
being overmodulated and, if required, correct it (Clip level). This is important, as
different sound cards show different clipping methods. The more the fader is turned
up, the lower the level recognized by the program as overmodulated. If the clip level is
set too high, unwanted sound modification may occur.
Get clip level: The clip level is gaged automatically.
Denoiser
The Denoiser removes persistent background noise like computer hum, hissing,
noises from sound charts, disturbance from ground circuits, interference from audio
equipment with high-impedance outputs (such as record players), impact noise, or
the turntable rumble.
The Denoiser requires a noise sample. Some typical noise sounds are included in the
"Preset" selection menu.
Set the degree to which the noise should be reduced with the fader. It is often better
to reduce interference signals by 3-6 dB rather than as much as is possible in order to
keep the sound "natural".
A different option consists of creating a noise sample yourself. All that's needed is a
short section from the audio track in which the distortion can be found. To get it,
switch to the DeNoiser dialog by pressing "Advanced".
DeNoiser – Advanced settings
Step 1: Choose a noise sample
First of all, a sample of the distortion you wish to remove must be selected, i.e. a socalled "noise sample".
You have two options to choose from:
175
176
Pick out typical background noise: You can select and use a number of typical
background noises from the flip menu. Select one and listen to it by pressing the
"Play" button. If it is similar to the background noise in your sound track, go ahead and
use it (see "Step 2: Removing background noise").
Extract a new noise sample from an audio track: You can also pick out a short
passage (from the existing sound track) in which you can hear the background noise.
Automatic search: Searches especially quiet passages in which background noise is
most noticeable.
Previous / Play / Next: These buttons allow you to play all of the passages found for
easy comparison.
Save as: Once found, you can save noise samples to the hard drive. They then appear
as entries in the "Typical background noises" flip menu to be used in other projects.
If you only wish to use the noise sample in the current project, you don't have to save.
Instead just go to the "Remove noise" category.
Step 2: Removing background noise
Noise level: The level of the noise reduction function should be set as precisely as
possible. Values that are too low are expressed at a low distortion dampening level
and in artifacts, like noises or "twittering" (see below). High settings produce dull
results – useful signals that sound similar to hissing noises are also filtered away. Try
to find the best setting for the project at hand.
Reducer: This sets the balance between the original signal and the signal with the
applied noise reduction. It's often better to reduce interference signals by 3-6 dB
rather than as much as is possible, so as to keep the sound "natural". In case of
buzzing, it’s best to apply complete removal.
Dehisser
The Dehisser eliminates regular "white" noise typically produced by analog tape
recordings, microphone pre-amplifiers, A/D converters, or transformers.
Noise reduction can be regulated in decibels with the fader. It is often better to reduce
interference signals by 3-6 dB rather than as much as possible in order to keep the
sound "natural".
Noise level: You can choose between different noise levels. The level of the noise
reduction function should be set as precisely as possible. Low settings result in
incomplete deletion of the hissing. Incomplete deleting of hissing produces artifacts
and should be avoided, since high settings will produce dull results and some useful
signals (i.e. woodwinds) which are similar to hissing are also filtered away.
Audio editing
Equalizer
The 10-track equalizer divides the frequency spectrum into 10 areas (tracks) and
supplies them with separate volume controls to allow you to achieve many impressive
effects, from the simple rising of the bass to total sound transformation. If you raise
the low frequencies too much throughout the whole level, it might cause distortions.
Fader: The volume of each of the 10 frequency bands can be set separately with the
10 volume controls.
Link frequency bands: The frequency fields can be bundled together flexibly in order
to avoid artificial-sounding exaggeration in individual frequency fields.
Compressor
The compressor is an automated, dynamic volume controller. Loud passages become
quieter and the total value is raised. This makes the volume more consistent and
speech easier to understand. A compressor is mainly useful in case background noise
or music interferes with speech and simply increasing the volume of the individual
objects or tracks does not result in any significant improvement.
Level: Regulates the level of compression applied (the "ratio").
Function: Defines the compressor depending upon the sound material.
Stereo FX
The stereo FX processor provides adjustment of the alignment of the audio material in
the stereo balance. If the stereo recordings sound weak and undifferentiated, an
extension of the stereo base width can often provide better transparency.
Bandwidth control: Adjust the bandwidth between mono (on the extreme left),
unchanged base width (center) and maximum bandwidth ("wide" on the extreme
right).
Reducing the bandwidth can raise the overall level. In extreme cases, when the left
and the right channels include identical material and the bandwidth control is pushed
to the extreme left on "mono", the result can be a level increase of 3 decibels.
Raising the bandwidth (values of 100) diminishes the mono compatibility.
Effect devices controls
Some effect options open a graphic window, which has the appearance of the studio
effect device that it simulates (such as the "Echo/reverb" or "Timestretching" effect
menus).
These virtual effect devices are controlled either with common sliders, knobs and
buttons or alternatively with graphic sensor fields.
177
178
Sensor fields: Sensor fields can be controlled intuitively with mouse
movements, with the graphic and the corresponding effect setting
changing in relation to each other.
Power switch: Every effect device in the rack may be switched on or off
separately. This button allows you to directly compare the neutral, unedited
sound of the audio object with the effect setting you have chosen.
Reset: Every effect has a reset button that restores the effect device’s initial
default. In this state, the effect is not calculated into the sound, and the
effect is not rendered.
Preset selection list: Each effect device has a selection of
proven presets which can be selected from a drop-down
menu.
A/B: The A/B button compares two settings with each other. If you have
selected a preset for the effect and make manual changes to it later, you can
compare the original preset sound with the new settings by using the A/B
button.
Note: The displayed graphics serve only examples and can differ from device to
device.
Audio effect dialogs
Some of the following effects can be opened individually (via the context menu), or as
part of the track or master effects rack. However, the functionality remains the same.
Echo/Reverb
The echo/reverb effect device offers newly developed and very realistic reverb
algorithms to add more spatial depth to your recording.
Reverb
Reverb is probably the most important but also the most difficult effect to generate.
Parameters
The reverb effect has the following parameters:
Audio editing
Size: defines the size of the room (or the system for the plate and spring). The larger a
room, the longer the sound travels between walls or objects. With some low "size"
settings you can also reduce the distance between the individual reflections. This
allows resonance to develop (accentuated frequency ranges), which can sound
oppressive if the reverb sustain is too long.
Time: With this knob you can adjust the echo time and determine how much of it will
be absorbed and, simultaneously, the reverb's decay.
Color: You may influence the sound characteristics of the effect within certain limits.
The effect of this controller depends on the used preset. In rooms, "Color" controls the
dampening of the highs in the reverb (from dark to bright) as well as pre-filtering of
the signal. With plate and spring presets, this fader determines the dampening of the
basses as well.
Mix: This controller sets the mix ratio between the original and the edited signal. For
rooms, you can therefore move a signal further into the room by increasing the effect
share. The last four presets are intended for use in an AUX channel of the mixer and
are set to 100%.
Presets
The presets represent the basic settings for the various room algorithms, which can
still be varied along with the other parameters. Hence, they are more than just simply
parameter sets.
Delay
This effect is like an echo which delays the signal and repeats it.
Delay: This sets the period of time between the individual echoes. The more the
control is turned to the left, the faster the echoes will follow each other.
Feedback: This adjusts the number of echoes. Turn the dial completely to the left,
there is no echo at all; turn it completely to the right and there are seemingly endless
repetitions.
Mix: This fader determines how much of the unprocessed original sound (dry signal)
is subjected to the echo (wet signal). Application of this effect in an AUX bus requires
the controller to be set to 100% (all the way to the right).
179
180
Timestretch/resample
This option opens an effect device with which you can change the speed and/or pitch
of the object.
Pitch: This control changes the pitch independently from the object's speed
("pitchshifting").
Tempo: This control changes the speed independently from the pitch
("timestretching"). The object acts as if it were compressed or stretched on the track.
Tones/BPM: These fields serve for numerical alteration of pitch and speed. Only
MAGIX soundpool files are suitable for numeric entries because they are equipped
with information regarding pitch and speed.
Setup: This button opens a setup dialog, where you can choose between various
pitchshifting and timestretching processes.
• Standard: Timestretching and pitchshifting in standard quality. The method is
suitable for audio material without a pronounced beat. Existing beat markers are
evaluated to improve audio quality.
• Smoothed: Timestretching and pitchshifting for audio material without impulselike components. The method is suitable for several voice orchestra instruments,
surfaces, speech and singing. Beat markers will not be evaluated.
A complicated algorithm is used here, which results in a higher processor load.
Material can also be edited using very large factors (0.2...50), without large
artifacts. For this, material will be somewhat "smoothed", which will be
manifested in a softer sound and an altered phase length. This smoothing is
hardly audible, e.g. with speech, singing, or solo instrumentation. For complex
spectra, such as mixes of different instruments and finished mixes, this can lead
to problems.
• Beat marker slicing: Beat-synchronous timestretching and pitchshifting via
splitting and temporal repositioning. Exactly set beat markers are required at the
beats or transients. Markers can be generated in realtime (automatically) or read
out from the source file, as long as they are available (patched). A patch tool is
available in MAGIX Music Editor which lets the user set own markers. The
algorithm is suitable for rhythmic material that can be divided into individual
beats or notes. For this, the levels before and after the individual notes or beats
should be low.
Audio editing
• Beat marker stretching: Beat-synchronized timestretching and pitchshifting in
high audio quality. The material is stretched between beat markers positions so
that the impacts or attacks at the beat markers positions are not impaired by
stretching. The markers can be generated in real time from the audio material
(automatically), provided they are present (patched). The method is suitable for
rhythmic material which is not separated into individual beats or notes because
the beats or notes overlap.
• Beat marker stretching (smoothed): Beat-synchronous timestretching and
pitchshifting in high audio quality, even with extreme timestretching. Beat
markers are used at the beats or transients. The markers can be generated in real
time from the audio material (automatically), or read out from the wave file,
provided they are present (patched). The method is suitable for rhythmic
material which is not separated into individual beats or notes because the beats
or notes overlap. This method results in relatively high CPU loads, and should be
used carefully on less powerful systems.
• Universal HQ: Universal method timestretching and pitchshifting in very high
audio quality. Suitable for all types of audio material. Existing beat markers are
evaluated to improve audio quality. This method requires so much processing
time, that a realtime application is recommended only in exceptional situations.
For this reason, we recommend to use the apply function.
• Monophonic voice: Time-stretching and pitch-shifting for vocal solos, speech or
solo instruments. The material may contain no background noise, and even
strong reverb can reduce the usefulness of this method. With suitable material
the audio quality is very high. Additionally, formats are kept after pitchshifting.
Beat markers are not evaluated.
• Resampling: Pitch shift and tempo can not be changed individually. This method
requires comparably little CPU time.
Audio effects in the mixer
You can open audio effect devices in the mixer using the "FX"
button found in each track or in the right master area.
Under "Mastering" you will also find MAGIX Mastering Suite (view
page 183).
"Reset" resets all effect settings to original values.
181
182
Equalizer
The 10-band equalizer subdivides the frequency spectrum into ten areas ('bands') and
equips them with separate volume controls. This way it is possible to create many
impressive effects, from a simple boosting of the bass to complete elimination of a
certain range of frequencies. Note: If low frequencies are boosted too much, the
overall sound level is heavily increased which may lead to distortion. In this event,
adjust the overall volume downward by using the 'master volume' control situated at
the bottom center of the effect rack.
Slider control: Each of the ten frequency ranges can be separately boosted or turned
down with the ten volume controls.
Link bands: Using this button randomly combines the frequency ranges with each
other in to avoid artificial-sounding overemphasis of an individual frequency range.
Touch screen (right EQ section): This is the 'sensor field' of the EQ. Here you can
draw any type of curve with the mouse. This will be immediately translated into a
corresponding control setting on the left side of the EQ.
Compressor
The compressor is an automated, dynamic volume adjustment controller: louder
passages become quieter and quiet passages become louder. A compressor is useful
to make spoken passages more audible against background noise or music in case a
simple increase of the overall volume is insufficient. Several useful presets are
included for this purpose, however compression may also be set manually.
Ratio: This parameter controls the compression level.
Threshold: This sets the volume threshold below and above which compression is
applied.
Attack: Sets the algorithm's reaction time to increasing sound levels.
Release: Sets the algorithm's reaction time to falling sound levels.
Audio editing
Gain: The gain controller amplifies the compressed signal.
MAGIX Mastering Suite
MAGIX Mastering Suite is a special effect rack for use with the mixer master channel.
Its effects serve the so-called "Mastering" with which the finished mixed music file is
given its last "cut".
The On/Off switches can switch the effects on and off individually. Each effect offers
a number of presets, which can be selected from a list on the bottom edge of the
effect.
The settings of all effects can also be saved
together as one preset so that you can use your
ideal mastering setting again for other
arrangements.
Each effect can be reset by pressing the "Reset" button.
Note: 5.1 Surround mode only provides the compressor (view page 182) and
parametric equalizer devices in this case.
Parametric EQ
The parametric equalizer consists of four filter bands that can be used to adjust the
sound of the music track. Each band is a filter with a typical "bell shape". Within a
certain frequency range around an adjustable middle frequency you can increase or
reduce the signal level gain. The width of this frequency range is called bandwidth.
The bandwidth is defined by the Q value. The higher the Q value, the narrower and
steeper the filter curve.
You can influence the basic sound of the mix by boosting or cutting specific frequency
ranges (low Q value) to give it more "depth" (lower mids 200-600 Hz) or more "air"
(Highs 10Khz). You can also decrease very specific frequencies (high Q-value) to
remove unwanted noise.
183
184
Sensor field: The sensor field displays the
resulting frequency response of the equalizer.
The frequency is displayed horizontally and the
increase or decrease of the respective frequency
is displayed vertically.
The blue bullets 1-4 symbolize the four frequency bands. You can move them around
with the mouse until you find the frequency response you want.
It is possible to control the output level of the equalizer with the Peak Meter and with
the Master Gain Controller beside it you can balance level changes resulting from the
EQ adjustments.
The "Edit" button opens up the fine tuning options for the four bands:
With the buttons on the right you can select the parameter that can be adjusted with
the four faders of each band. There is also a numerical data entry field for each band
parameter.
Gain dB: These controllers allow you to raise or lower the filter. Setting the controller
to 0 deactivates the filter so it does not use any CPU power.
Freq. Hz: The center frequency of the individual filters can be set between 10 Hz and
24 kHz with the frequency controllers. Freely choosing the frequency enables multiple
filters to be set to the same frequency in order to have a greater effect.
Q (Bandwidth): Here you can set the bandwidth of the individual filters to between 10
Hz and 10 kHz.
Bands 1 and 4 are special: Their Filter Curves can be edited in three different modes.
The four editing points in the graphic have different functions in each mode.
Audio editing
Peaking: Here the effect curve is brought closer to the working point (which
represents the peak of the curve) from both sides simultaneously.
Shelving (Basic setting): Here the working point displays the beginning of the
filter curve. From this point on there is a gentle increase or decrease in the
frequency.
High or Low Pass:In Band 1 the working point displays the frequency which is
filtered out of particularly high or low frequencies.
MultiMax
MultiMax is a compressor with three independent frequency bands. The dynamics
are edited separately for each band.
The advantage of a multi-band compressor versus a "normal" compressor is that the
"pumping" tendency and other unwanted side effects are dramatically reduced while
editing the dynamics. For instance, it can prevent a peak in the bass range from
suppressing the entire signal.
Multiband technology also lets you specifically edit individual frequency ranges.
Link: When this function is activated and one controller is adjusted, all controllers are
changed at the same ratio. However, the way the dynamics are edited is not affected.
Setting the frequency bands: The settings of the frequency bands are changed
directly in the graphic. Simply click on the separator lines and move them.
Lo/Mid/Hi: These knobs define the level of compression for each frequency band.
Presets: MultiMax has a selection of presets for various applications.
Stereo FX
With the Stereo FX Enhancer you can determine the positioning of the audio material
in the stereo balance. If stereo recordings sound unfocused and undifferentiated, an
extension of the stereo base width can often provide better transparency.
185
186
Base width adjustment: This adjusts base width between mono (all the way to the
left), unchanged base width (center) and maximum band width (“wide”, all the way to
the right). Reducing the base width can produce an increase in the level. In extreme
cases – when the left and right channels include identical material and the base width
control is pushed to the extreme left on ”mono”–the result can be a level increase of 3
decibels.
Raising the base width (values over 100) diminishes the mono compatibility. This
means that recordings edited this way sound hollow when listened to in mono.
Volume controller: Adjusts the volume of every single channel, thereby adjusting the
entire panorama. The damping of left and right levels is displayed in dB underneath
the controllers. A centered recording can be moved later to the left or right of the
stereo balance.
Stereo meter (correlation gauge): This provides a graphical display of the phase
relation of the audio signal. You can use it to check the alignment of the signal in the
stereo panorama and the effect of the stereo enhancer.
In order to achieve the greatest possible compatibility with mono, the display should
come closest to a diagonal line. Otherwise some frequency ranges may cancel each
other out if the stereo signal is played on a mono device.
Karaoke presets: These presets open a special karaoke effect that more or less
eliminates vocals. It deletes middle frequencies typical for human vocals during
playback so that someone else can do the singing.
Digital Audio Meter
On the lower border of the MAGIX Mastering Suite there is a digital audiometer
which provides separate level displays for 10 frequency bands for each channel. This
device is used for orientation purposes, such as selective equalizer editing.
Limiter
The limiter prevents clipping by automatically
lowering the level if it is too high. Quiet parts remain
unaffected. In contrast to the compressor it tries to
leave the basic sound as unaffected as possible.
Audio editing
Audio CDs
Loading an audio CD works just like loading of any other files into the arrangement.
•
•
•
•
Place an audio CD into the drive.
Find the drive in your Media Pool The individual CD titles appear in the file list.
Double click on the song to preview.
Drag & Drop the CD title into a track of the current arrangement, and it will be
digitally scanned and copied to the hard-drive. The files will be saved in the
import folder (this can be indicated in "File" > "Settings" > "Program" > "Folder").
The audio object appears in the track and can be played back or edited immediately.
Import audio CD tracks
There is also a custom option for audio CDs in "File" > "Import audio-CD track(s)",
which allows simple import with additional options.
This option opens the CD Manager where you can select tracks from Audio CDs and
partially or fully import them into the arrangement. Audio tracks are imported in
WAV format, saved in a selectable directory and imported into the arrangement.
The tracklist dialog
Tracks can be selected from the list with a mouse click or with the key combination
Shift + arrow or Ctrl + mouse click.
Transport control in the dialog activates the preview function. The playback arrow
starts audio playback of the first selected track.
Select all tracks: This option selects all audio tracks in order to copy the complete CD.
187
188
Save selected tracks: This button opens dialog to save selected tracks. You can either
place all files into a single WAV file or create a separate WAV file for each track. A
new object will be created in the arrangement for each track in either case.
Options CD drive: With this option you can access the "CD-/DVD drive list".
CD/DVD drive list
Configuration: This button opens the configuration dialog, where various special
settings can be made.
Reset: sets drive settings back to default.
Add: Creates a new drive in the list, which first requires special settings.
Delete: Deletes selected drive from the list.
Load setup: Loads the current drive list and all configuration data from a *.cfg file.
Save setup: Saves the current drive list and all configuration files in a *.cfg file.
Audio editing
CD/DVD-ROM configuration
Drive Name: Lets you edit the name of the drive in the list. This is useful if you create
more than one entry accessing the same physical drive.
Host Adapter Number: Lets you specify the number of your SCSI adapter - normally
0.
Bus ID: Here you can enter the ID of your CD-ROM drive. Be sure to set the correct
ID, there is no error checking!
Bus LUN: sets the LUN parameter, normally 0.
Alias: Lets you select the manufacturer type of your CD ROM drive.
Normal copy mode: copies audio files without any software correction.
Copy mode sector synchronization: copies audio files with a special correction
algorithm. This is especially useful, since many CD drives have problems finding an
exact position again and gaps can occur.
Burst copy mode: optimizes the speed of the copy process, no software correction is
used.
Sectors per cycle: defines the audio sector count that should be read from the audio
CD in one cycle. The higher the number of sectors, the faster the copying process.
Numerous SCSI systems have problems with more than 27 sectors.
189
190
Sync sectors: sets the count of audio sectors, which should be used for software
correction. A higher number results in a better synchronization but also in a slower
copying process.
Mixer
The Mixer can be opened by pressing the "M" key or via the button bar in the main
window (also: "View" > "Mixer").
Mixer channels
Each arranger track is represented with a corresponding mixer channel in the mixer.
The mixer channel offers a range of options to regulate objects' audio signals together
in the track.
Audio editing
FX: Opens (view page 181) the audio effect rack .
Auto: activates the volume and panautomation (view page 192).
Plug-ins: You can access the audio plug-ins (view page 174) installed on
the PC using the triangle-shaped button.
Volume: You can adjust the track volume using the large slider.
Stereo panorama: You can set the stereo -position for each track using
the knob.
Note: Double-clicking on the volume or panorama slider sets it back to
its passive default position, in which no CPU is used.
Solo/mute: The "Solo" switches a track into solo mode, which means
that all tracks not switched to "solo" will be muted. "Mute" makes the
track silent.
Effect channels
In addition to normal mixer channels that correspond to the tracks in the
arrangement, you can create two separate effect channels. The principle behind them:
You can take a partial signal from a normal channel into an effect channel, where the
partial signal is then processed with additional effects. This is a common process used
in professional audio production.
In each mixer channel there are two FX-Send knobs (FX 1 and FX2 )
under plug-in slots.
Here you can determine the strength of the signal from the track that is routed into
both available effect channels.
The FX tracks are usually hidden in the mixer. When an FX-Send is used, they will
appear to the left next to the master section.
191
192
An effect channel is a complete additional mixer channel with
volume and panorama controls, an effect rack and two plug-in
slots.
Reverb is activated in the first effect channel by default because
this is the most important application of send effects.
The volume control regulates the strength of the effect channel and
corresponds to an AUX return control. The"Mute" button is used to
switch the FX function on and off. By activating "solo", you can
listen to the effect channel separately. Track peakmeters that send
to the FX track appear greyed out.
Master channel
The master channel is to the right of the individual channels. It controls the overall
sound and offers all editing options: volume, panorama, plug-ins and effects.
The FX buttons and the plug-in slots work just like in the other channels. The FX
button opens the master audio effect rack. With "Reset" you can rest all mixer
settings, including effect channels.
Mastering: Here you can open the MAGIX Mastering Suite (view page 183).
5.1 Surround: This button switches the mixer into Surround mode (view page 196).
Both faders control the total volume.
Link buttons: If the link button is deactivated, the
volume of the right and left channels may be set
individually.
Volume and panorama automation
You can automate volume and panorama for a track. This means that during playback
you can record the movements of the sliders on the track. This way, for instance, you
can simulate the movement of a sound source from left to right and make volume
adjustment instantly during playback.
Audio editing
As long as the autobutton for a track is activated, all movements of the
volume and panorama sliders will be recorded.
The automation is displayed as a curve in the arranger and can be edited later with
the mouse.
Note: The mixer's automation curves relate to a track, which means that they are
independent of the objects contained on it.
5.1 Surround
MAGIX Video Pro X5 supports playback and export in genuine 5.1 Surround sound.
Requirements
You will require a sound card or a sound chip which is integrated into the computer's
motherboard with six individual outputs to playback the individual channels:
• front left (L) / right (R)
• centre (C) / subwoofer (LFE)
• back left (Ls) / right (Rs)
Surround playback is possible with all audio driver models (see Playback settings),
(Wave, DirectSound).
DirectSound is supported by most of the standard sound cards.
Wave drivers are similarly supported by many standard sound cards; however,
individual sound cards (for example, Soundblaster) require access to DirectSound.
Output of the six output signals is achieved in all driver models in the output channels
in the same (standardized) order:
Channels 1/2: L-R
Channels 3/4: C-LFE
Channels 5/6: Ls-Rs
When using WAV drivers, the loudspeaker settings normally have to be changed to
5.1 playback in the control panel. On most systems the program does this
automatically while using DirectSound.
193
194
Importing and exporting surround audio files
Import
When importing MPEG-2 files with Dolby Digital sound (e.g. VOB files from DVDs or
DVB-TV recordings), you can choose from two different applications:
• Mixdown: Surround sound is displayed as an audio object under the video object,
playback of the surround track is reduced and recalculated to stereo playback.
Use this option if you don't wish to edit the surround sound, but rather wish to
export it. You can also use it if you think that a stereo export is enough to meet
your requirements
• Surround mix: The individual surround channel pairs (L-R, C LFE, Ls-Rs) are split
into three audio tracks as separate objects and the mixer is then set to surround
mode. This mode allows you to change the surround mix.
In MAGIX Video Pro X5 the import of Dolby Digital surround is always executed as a
mixdown. MAGIX Video Pro X5 can also import interleaved wave files (multi-channel
wave files), multi-channel Windows Media Audio and MP3 surround files; a surround
mix is always created.
Export
Surround mix exports can occur in any one of the following formats:
• 6-channel PCM files (interleaved wave)
• Windows Media files (as a surround soundtrack of a Windows Media Video or
WMV-HD disc)
• MPEG-2 files with a Dolby Digital audio track
The files created are fully compatible with the normal file formats, this means that
they can also be played on computers incapable of playing surround (in normal
stereo).
The export is performed via the same menu commands (e.g. "File -> Export movie ->
Audio as wave") like the normal stereo export. You will then be asked if the export
should be in stereo or surround format.
Export Dolby Digital surround via Smart Encoding
You can also burn material to be exported with surround sound again without the
need for the Dolby Digital codec (in MAGIX Video Pro X5 or MAGIX Video Pro X5
without Dolby Digital encoder activation) to DVD or export the corresponding MPEG
files while keeping 5.1 surround sound. To do so, use the "Smart Rendering" option
which transfers the unprocessed parts of the output material without renewed
encoding. Read more on this in the MPEG encoder settings section "General settings
(view page 352)".
Audio editing
The import has to be executed as a mixdown, the audio material cannot be changed
(no fades, no audio cleaning, no volume adjustment). Harder cuts, e.g. removal of
commercials are allowed, but they may not happen precisely according to the frame,
but at the GOP (group of pictures) borders.
The mixer in surround mode
To activate surround playback, open the mixer (M key) and click on "5.1 surround"
button in the master.
In the master, six peak meters for the individual channels are provided. The normal
panorama button turns into a representative display of the surround editor (see
below), which can be opened by clicking on the display.
The surround sound editor is also available to the effects tracks. For example, you can
send the original track to the front L/R speakers, the FX track however will remain at
the rear L/R speakers.
The master volume is applied to all channels, here the left controller influences
channels L and Ls, the right controller; channels R and Rs and the middle value of both
controller; the channels C and LFE.
The master plug-ins are only applied to the front channels.
The full effects palette of the mastering effects rack in MAGIX Mastering Suite is not
available in 5.1 surround mode, but rather only the compressor and the parametric
195
196
equalizer (from the Mastering Suite) are provided. The settings of these effects have
the same effect on all six channels.
5.1 Surround editor
The selected mixer track's 5.1 surround editor allows you to arrange the audio signal
of a track (displayed as two red sound sources) in stereo space. The signal is
dispersed to the 5 (blue) loudspeakers which represent the individual surround
channels.
There are 6 channels:
L:
R:
front left
front right
C:
center
Ls:
back left/left surround
Rs:
back right / right surround
LFE
subbass (Low Frequency Effect) channel
Dispersing the signal to the 5 loudspeakers occurs after the sound source emits a
sound field of a certain level (displayed as red circles). The further away a
loudspeaker's source is, the lesser its share of the corresponding loudspeaker channel.
The position of the loudspeaker can be moved with the mouse.
Audio editing
The subbass share (LFE) is set directly from the corresponding value table. It can also
be changed by dragging the mouse.
There are various modes in which you can use the source signal:
• Mono: The (stereo) source signal is seen as mono material, the left and right
channels are mixed together and arranged together. The original stereo
information is lost here.
• Stereo 1: Similar to mono mode insofar as the left and right channels are moved
together, but only a portion of the left source is audible in the loudspeakers L and
Ls and only a portion of the right source in the right channels R and Rs. The stereo
information remains as intact as possible.
• Stereo 2: The left and right channels can be moved individually. The distance
between the left and right source is retained when you move the left source. You
can move an individual source by holding down the "Alt" key.
• Center/LFE: Only the left channel is arranged. In return, the LFE share is drawn
solely from the right channel. This mode is only important for importing Surround
material.
Width determines the level of the sound field of an individual source.
Automation:
Panning of the sound source on the loudspeaker can be automated to simulate
movements in the room.
For this to happen "Automation" must be activated. There are two methods to create
automations: record and draw.
To record (when automation is on), the sound source is moved between the
loudspeakers during playback. When recording the automation, the "Record" check
box lights up red.
The draw function is an alternative to drawing out complex movements. When
drawing in active mode, all panning movements are transmitted to the time interval
between the start and end marker (when the mouse button is held). You can thus
draw the entire movement curve for the selected time range.
"Reset" deletes surround automation from the track.
There is no automation of the parameters for width and LFE, of the distance between
the left and right source in "Stereo 2" mode, or of the loudspeaker positions.
197
198
Transfer surround tracks from Samplitude/Sequoia to MAGIX Video Pro X5
Note: In order to be able to use Samplitude/Sequoia parallel to MAGIX Video Pro
X5, the programs will have to be synchronized with each other. Read more about the
topic "Synchronizing Samplitude/Sequoia with MAGIX Video Pro X5".
Existing surround tracks are transferred directly to MAGIX Video Pro X5 from
Samplitude/Sequoia. Set a playback marker first in MAGIX Video Pro X5 at the
starting position of the movie – the wave file will be added at the position of this
marker.
Note: In MAGIX Video Pro X5, the last six tracks must be free to ensure that correct
transfer can take place. Set the number of tracks to a higher number in the Movie
settings as required.
• Switch to Samplitude/Sequoia
• To transfer, open the menu item "Export to MAGIX Video Pro X5" in the "File"
menu under "Export".
• Please note that when exporting, a sampling rate of 48 kHz should be set, since
this is the sampling rate used in DVD audio streams.
• Click "OK" and enter the save location and a logical name for the surround sound
in the dialog that opens.
• After export, the six surround channels will be loaded directly into MAGIX Video
Pro X5. 5.1 surround mode will be activated and the channels will feature the
corresponding track settings.
Set multiple sound tracks
Multiple sound tracks are provided for adding multiple audio tracks to the video for
selection via the disc's menu. This has primarily two main uses:
• Creating audio tracks for different languages
• Mixing stereo and Surround audio separately
These two applications can be combined, since MAGIX Video Pro X5 features up to 8
separate multi-sound tracks.
Workflow
You can define any track as a "DVD track" using the track box context menu.
• Right click on the track box.
Audio editing
• Select "DVD audio track" > "DVD audio track: not used". A dialog for naming the
audio track will appear.
• Give the track a descriptive name. The name entered here will later appear in the
burned disc's menu.
Now you can assign additional arranger tracks to this DVD track. To do so you can set
a checkmark in the context menu of the track boxes. By default "All audio tracks" is
preset, which makes the audio material on the track audible on all audio tracks.
Normally, multiple DVD audio tracks should not be played at the same time. For this
reason, you can select the DVD audio track to be played in the arranger using the
small arrow on the speaker button.
199
200
Tip: You can use the multitrack structure for creating language options, for example.
First, define a multi-audio track for each language and assign all tracks that belong to
a certain language track as needed.
Combine Surround and stereo tracks
Note: The method described here is only recommended if the stereo track requires a
separate mix, since it normally isn't necessary to add an extra stereo track. Playback
devices automatically apply a downmix to stereo sound in place of 5.1 Surround
when it is required.
If you still wish to create a disc that contains a 5.1 Surround track as well as a regular
stereo track, proceed as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
Select the "Stereo" DVD audio track.
Open the mixer and proceed with normal stereo mixdown.
Close the mixer.
Select the "Surround" DVD audio track.
Open the mixer and activate 5.1 Surround mode. Conduct the Surround mixdown.
Set formats of individual multi-sound tracks
Next, make the necessary changes to the formats of the multi-sound tracks. This
takes place in the MPEG encoder settings, which can be opened form the burn dialog.
The simplified settings dialog displays an additional section for the multi-sound
tracks. From the flip menu, select the DVD audio track to be set. Now, you can assign
each track to the desired format.
Click "Edit" to open the advanced audio settings dialog for the MPEG encoder. Now
you can define which format the selected DVD audio track should have. For more
information, read the "Audio settings" (view page 355) section in the "MPEG encoder
settings" (view page 351) chapter.
Note: Even if you create all multi-audio tracks in 5.1 Surround, you must make this
setting for each separately.
Sound tracks which feature the setting "Apply to all multi-sound tracks" will always
be mixed with the other multi-sound tracks, although these will be created using the
format set for them.
Audio editing
Scrubbing
The term "scrubbing" originates from the age of cassette players and provides quicker
monitoring of passages of a film or a piece of music. The function plays short samples
at the original speed.
Note: In order to preview individual audio objects completely, use "Preview (view
page 46)" mouse mode.
Activate scrubbing
Scrubbing can be activated using the small arrow
next to the speaker button.
Scrubbing: Modes
No scrubbing: Scrubbing is inactive. If the playback marker is set or moved, then
sound will not be played.
Scrubbing (1 frame): Scrubbing is active and samples are only 1 (video) frame in
length. The speed is 25 fps, i.e. 1/25 second. This mode is suitable for positioning the
playback marker exactly.
Scrubbing (long): Scrubbing is active, the sample length amounts to approx. 0.5
seconds. In this mode, locating specific events is particularly easy.
Play 1x with scrubbing: If this option is active, the current position will be played one
time. If it is inactive, then it will be repeated.
Using "Scrubbing"
If scrubbing mode is selected, set the playback marker to a certain location in the
timeline using the mouse. Hold the mouse key and move the playback marker to
various locations in the arrangement.
Scrubbing may be used also by employing the jog and shuttle wheel on the video
monitor, as well as through various hardware controllers, which gives the software the
feel of an analog video editing system!
201
202
Edit disc menu
Switch to the "Burn" screen first by pressing the button displayed.
Here you can adjust the disc menu before burning and burn your movies with a menu
to a CD, DVD or Blu-ray disc.
All movies loaded into the project will be included. If you want to remove some of the
loaded films, then switch to the "Edit" screen again and delete the unwanted movies
from the project there. To do so, switch to the corresponding movie, open the "File"
menu and select "Manage movies -> Remove movie" (view page 278).
Note: For screen resolutions 1280 x 1024 pixels or higher, the program display will
be different. This makes the program more manageable and easier to use. The work
steps remain the same in spite of the different display.
Preview and editing
MAGIX Video Pro X5 provides two different modes for designing and previewing the
disc menu.
"Preview" mode simulates the behavior of a playback device, e.g.
DVD player or Blu-ray player.
You can select a template for the menu and burn the disc.
In "Editing" mode, you may adjust many features of the disc menu.
Templates are also available here that may be flexibly adjusted to
suit your needs.
Remote control
The virtual remote control is an important helper when it comes to checking how the
disc will perform later.
When the disc featuring the project is inserted into the player, this remote control will
control the preview picture just like a "real" remote control controls the picture on a
monitor or TV. The menu navigation may be activated via the arrow keys or the "OK"
button. Activated buttons are highlighted.
Edit disc menu
The number keys select the corresponding entry on the menu
page. All menu entries are marked with a corresponding number.
Within a chapter menu, playback is started from the particular
scene. In the movie menu, the corresponding chapter menu (if
available) is changed or movie playback is started.
Navigation button: Use these buttons to navigate in the menu of
the disc being burned. The individual entries may be changed and
confirmed by pressing "OK". The remote control reacts exactly
like a genuine DVD/Blu-ray player's remote control.
Skip/move forward/back: This allows you to skip to the next or
previous scene while playing back your movie. In the menu, you
can skip forward or back from one menu page to another.
Play: Starts the first entry in the menu. In case chapter menus are
available (view page 207), the chapter menu will be displayed
first. Press the play button again to start playback at the
beginning of the first scene of the first chapter.
Stop: Pressing stop halts playback.
Disc: Switches to the first page of the film menu.
Sub: Switches to the chapter menu (if available) for the currently selected film.
Menu
The selection menu is also burned to disc and appears when inserted into your player.
Just like with a store-bought DVD or Blu-ray Disc, you may easily select your movies
with the help of preview pictures, or access particular chapters within a movie.
203
204
Templates
You will find the menu templates below.
To the left, you will see a tree structure for selecting various menu templates. At the
top, you should first select whether you would like to use templates in ratio "16"9" or
"4:3".
• Animated (DVD): These templates contain background and introductory videos
as well as music. The control elements are displayed in various modes. The
templates can be used only for mini DVDs, DVDs and AVCHD discs.
• Static (4:3 only, DVD): Here you will find templates made up of regular
background pictures and control elements.
• Custom: These templates adjust to your disc project; the movies and scenes you
use are integrated directly into the menu.
• HD static (16:9 only, DVD, Blu-ray, AVCHD, WMV HD): These templates contain
super-sharp, high-res background images that are particularly noticeable on HD
TV devices.
• Movie templates (only 16:9): Here you will find menu templates that are specially
made for movie templates (view page 274) found in the Media Pool.
Note: These menus require "Film menu" and "Chapter menu" to be activated in the
"Edit" screen under "Disc options".
If you've selected one of the menu templates, you can use the horizontal scroll bar to
view all the others available. There are lots of options when using the templates:
• To apply a template to all menu pages, double-click the desired template. The
complete template will then be applied.
• You can also combine various elements from different templates with each other.
To do so, you must first switch into Editing mode. If, for example, you wish to
combine the text format of a template with the background of another one,
double-click on the template containing the background first. Then click on the
"Font" tab and select a template for the font.
Edit disc menu
• You can load the layout (or individual layout elements) for the current menu
(movie or scenes) as well as for all menus.
Note: Some menu templates include intro videos with a smooth transition to the
menu page!
Edit disc menu
To edit individual menu elements and the menu structure,
activate the "Edit" button.
Edit menu elements
Hold down the left mouse button and drag text boxes or graphical elements to the
desired position. You can adjust the size by dragging out the corners and edges of the
frame.
Undo: This command allows you to undo the last changes made.
Redo: This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.
Lock aspect ratio: To avoid distortion, use this button to lock the aspect
ratio for the menu elements.
Group: Menu elements are moved or resized simultaneously as a group,
including the description text and number.
Fade in TV display area in the preview monitor: This option displays the
image borders of the television (view page 162) as lines in the preview
monitor.
Grid: This button shows a grid to help position frames exactly next to
each other as required. Using the small arrow next to the button you can
open a dialog to fine tune the grid settings.
205
206
Export import PSD
Import PSD: With this option you can import a menu template created in PSD
format (for example, in Xara Xtreme Pro, Photoshop,…)
Export PSD: With this option, you can export your menu as a PSD file ( for
example for Xara Xtreme Pro, Photoshop,…)
Note: With the help of these two options, you can quickly adjust your menu to your
individual wishes. Simply export the menu, edit it in a graphics program, save it and
import the same file back into the program. To find out more, read the Edit DVD
menus in Xara Xtreme Pro or Photoshop (view page 212) section in the PDF manual!
Navigation
Using navigation links above you can reach the structure of the menu entries.
• All movies are listed as first entries. The
corresponding menu level is the film menu.
• All scenes are listed as second entries next to it to the
right. The corresponding menu level is the chapter
menu.
Removing the red check deactivates the corresponding
entry in the chapter menu. The scenes are still displayed
of course, but you can no longer select them directly from
the menu.
• You can open the movie menu for further editing by
clicking on the movie above it.
• If you click on one of the chapters, the chapter menu
in the preview will be opened for editing.
Disc options
Here you can activate or deactivate certain elements or even complete menus.
Intro video: Press this button to load videos to be used as introductions to your discs.
The following formats are supported: "*.avi", "*.mpg", "*.mxv", "*.vob". The intro is
played immediately after the DVD has been inserted into the player. The DVD menu
will then appear. A check mark "Do not skip" ensures that the intro video must be
Edit disc menu
played completely each time the disc is inserted and that it may not be skipped with
the remote control or otherwise.
Film menu, chapter menu, and audio menu
The disc menu essentially consists of two layers:
Film menu: The upper layer includes the film menu, which is only used if a project
contains multiple movies.
Chapter menu: This is the lowest layer of the disc menu, which utilizes the chapter
markers in a movie as menu entries. More information about this is available in
"Chapter markers (view page 110)".
Note: A chapter menu cannot contain more than 99 entries. If your movie has more
chapters, then you can either burn it without a chapter menu or split it into multiple
parts.
Audio menu: If your project features multiple DVD audio tracks, then a menu will be
added to the disc for the user to select an audio track.
Preview pictures: Shows/hides the preview pictures in the disc menu.
Numbering: The numbers beside the menu entries may be selected directly using the
remote control, but they might be unwanted at times. Use this option to show/hide
them.
Frame: A frame borders the preview pictures. If this is unwanted, it may be removed
easily using this option.
Create your own menu background
You can edit the existing menu background or create a new one from scratch.
A click on this button switches to the "Edit" interface and
loads the selected menu background as video.
Here you can change and design the background as you please. The background
movie will be set as the menu background automatically after pressing "Save".
Tip: If you would like to design a new menu background, simply delete all existing
objects from the menu project and load new ones.
207
208
Design page
Edit: This provides three options for setting the background of a menu page. You may
either set a certain "color value" for the background or you can select an image file
from your hard drive. You may also select a certain frame from a video in your project.
In external editor: A PSD file (view page 206) is sent directly to the program that has
been selected in the program settings as the menu editor (view page 250).
New menu pages may also be added or irrelevant pages may be removed.
Adds a new menu page.
Removes the selected menu page.
Animated selection menus
Audio-visual animations may also be added to the DVD menus. As required,
background videos are played as endless loops while the menu is shown on the
screen. Add background music in various formats or use any background picture for
each menu.
Sound/music: Load an audio file into the preview monitor and use it as an animation
in the menu background.
Video: Load a video or graphics file into the preview monitor and use it as an
animation in the menu background. In addition to the options for the background
graphic (see above), you may also use a sequence from a loaded slideshow or from a
different video file.
Background video options:
• Create animated menu buttons: The preview images for individual movies in the
movie menu are shown as small movie samples. Set the start point and length of
the animation using the sequence options faders.
• Use video's audio track: The audio track of the background video is used with the
menu.
• Play menu animation as a loop: The background video (audio and/or video) is
played back as a loop.
• Length of the menu view is set by: Audio/video or whichever medium is longer.
You can specify how long the background video should be here. The other
medium will be played as a loop.
Edit disc menu
Create a button design
MAGIX Video Pro X5 enables easy editing of all buttons together with their menu
entries.
You can edit menu entries that you created using this
button or with a double click on the menu. The dialog with
the properties of the menu entries (view page 210) will
open.
Edit in MAGIX Photo Designer: You can open MAGIX
Photo Designer for additional editing of elected menu
elements.
Apply to all objects: Applies the properties of the selected
button to all remaining buttons.
New menu entries may also be added or irrelevant pages may be removed.
Adds a new menu entry.
Removes the selected menu entry.
Tip: If you would simply like to deactivate unused menu entries, this may be done
via the navigation.
Note: The chapter menu is formed via chapter markers (view page 110) and can be
influenced in detail with these.
Pressing this button or double-clicking the menu entries
allows menu entries you have created to be edited. The
dialog with the properties of the menu entries (view page
210) will open.
These buttons open MAGIX Photo Designer for
further editing of your background pictures or
the selected menu elements.
Jump to linked page
To test the targets of menu entries, select the desired
menu entry and click the button.
209
210
Menu entry/menu page properties
Double clicking the preview picture or a menu entry opens an editor for you to adjust
the preview picture or menu entry.
Menu text
In the text input field, you can enter any text to match the chosen menu entry.
Set the vertical direction of the text (upwards, centered or
downward).
Set the horizontal direction of the text (left, centered or
right).
Font size: Set the height of the text in pixels.
Font color: Define the foreground color of the text.
Font: Set which font and which style (bold, italic, etc.) should be used.
Shadow: Set the color and size of the shadow that will appear underneath the text.
3D effect: If you would like to make your text appear three-dimensional, you can set
the width, height, and color of the 3D effect.
Edit disc menu
Apply to all: Except for the text, all settings are applied to all entries in the current
menu.
Menu image
Use frame from movie: Use the fader to set which frame should be used in the video
as a preview picture. The numerical input fields are sorted as follows:
Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames.
Use different graphic: You can also load your own bitmap images to be used as menu
pictures.
Hint: It may be the case that there are no menu pictures in some menu templates,
so changing the menu picture won't have any noticeable effect.
Actions at the end of the movie (preview images in film menu only)
Enter which action should be carried out once the film has finished playing here.
Select from:
• Stop playback: This option depends on the DVD player being used. Most DVD
players show the DVD player's own menu (or background picture) after playback.
• Jump to movie menu/chapter menu: Jumps back to the previously displayed
menu.
Tip: If one of these two options is not available, please check which menu mode is
set.
• Jump to next movie: The next movie will be played without any additional action.
• Play movie as endless loop: Any movie may be burned onto a disc as a loop. This
means that the movie will be played as a endless loop until the next menu entry is
accessed using the remote control or playback is stopped. This way, you can
transform your TV into an aquarium, a train journey, a fireplace or anything that
you could watch over and over again.
Note: This option only functions for DVDs, Mini DVDs, or Blu-ray Discs.
211
212
Edit your own menu entries
Note: This function is available only in the deluxe version.
There is another view in this dialog to edit menu entries you have created. Menu links
can be edited here. This makes it possible to link a menu entry with a certain action,
menu page, or a certain position in the movie.
No link: The menu element cannot be selected and has no function other than to
display menu text.
Link to page in current menu: Jumps to a menu page in the current movie or chapter
menu in the current film.
Link to another menu: Opens another movie or chapter menu.
Link to chapter in a movie: If this option is selected, enter a film and chapter marker
where playback should start.
Note: For DVDs, only chapters within the current movie may be jumped to.
Link to film start: The movie will play back from the start.
Edit DVD menus with Xara Xtreme Pro or
Photoshop
Besides the option of editing the menu template directly in the preview (view page
205), menu templates may also be exported as a Photoshop file (*.psd) and edited in
an external graphics program. There you have complete control of menu appearance,
including complex text effects and highlighted state management.
Export menu
The transfer of the menu templates to the graphics program takes place in one of two
ways:
If a complex, longer edit is required or if you have created a menu without
a template, then use the PSD import/export (view page 206) function in
the menu editing functions.
Next, open the PSD file in the graphics program of your choice.
Edit disc menu
For smaller changes, you can also shorten this process: click the button "In external
editor" in the "Disc options" on "Design page".
A temporary PSD file will be added and opened in the program that has been selected
in the program settings as the menu editor (view page 250). After editing has been
completed and saved in this external program, the temporary PSD file will be
imported again and the menu page will be updated immediately.
Menu text with external menu editing
Menu elements are transferred as a bitmap during PSD export as well as during
import of the edited PSD. This also applies to the text displayed in the menu. This text
may also normally be changed in the "Menu entry properties" dialog. The menu text
are adjusted if movies or chapters are added or removed.
The PSD contains these texts as a bitmap and cannot be changed. During importing,
the bitmaps replace the original text entries. By the way, this is maintained, and the
font will only be set to a size of 0 so that texts are not displayed in duplicate; the
menu will therefore look identical after external editing.
It is important that no more movies or chapters are added to the menu. Otherwise the
preview images, that have also changed along with the menu structure will no longer
match the bitmap text, since the bitmap text will not match the changed references in
the menu structure!
An example
A chapter with two entries is present. Entry 1 is named "travel preparations". Entry 2
is named "arrival". A chapter named "the trip" is going to be added between chapter
1 and chapter 2. The second chapter now becomes chapter 3 and moves to the next
menu page.
Normal text behavior: The second entry (now with preview image for the newly
inserted chapter) receives the new title "the trip". The next menu page features
chapter 3 as the first entry with the name "the trip".
Text after external menu editing: The second entry will feature the title "arrival" (as
a bitmap, as a component of the button), but the preview image will feature the new
chapter "the trip"! The next menu page now features the preview image for chapter
3 (formerly chapter 2, "arrival"), this is now called "travel preparations"! The name is
213
214
a component of the button as a bitmap for the first menu entry on the page, and this
is "travel preparations" on the first menu page. Completely out of order!
If the number of menu entries displayed is increased, this results from copying the
layer groups in the PSD (see below). Of course, the rendered text layers are also
copied into the layer groups, which results in incorrect text again.
The best way to proceed is to edit the text entries at the very end, since changes
normally will not follow at this point. If changes are required nevertheless, then
proceed as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Restore the "correct" chapters or movie names by resetting the font size in the
dialog "Menu entry properties" to the default value. Two texts will be
displayed; the incorrect bitmap and the correct one.
Export the menu template as a PSD.
Delete the incorrect bitmap object in the corresponding layer and re-import
the PSD.
Of course, the menu text may also be added from the start via an external graphics
editing program only (in order to take advantage of the additional options provided in
this case). Delete the corresponding bitmap objects in the PSD immediately after
export and replace these with your own text objects.
Structure of a PSD file
MAGIX Video Pro X5 produces a PSD file during export that contains a layer for each
object of the menu entry. This uses a naming scheme that enables assignment of the
objects in the file to their contents. Individual layers feature mathematical signs that
indicate their function. This naming scheme is similar to that featured in Adobe
Premiere and which is only expanded occasionally in MAGIX Video Pro X5 to
describe additional mechanisms.)
This is how these mathematical characters are used:
Characters for layer groups
(+-) or (+)
(++)
(+>)
(+<)
(+^)
(+*)
(^^)
Play button/start film
Chapter menu button
Next page
Previous page
Root menu button (jump back from chapter menu)
Menu title:
Layer group is ignored
Edit disc menu
Characters fro individual layers
(-)
(=1)
(%)
Layer contains text
Layer contains a bitmap with a highlight of the menu element.
Preview image/thumbnail from the movie to be referenced
Bitmap information will be ignored during import and only the size and
position will be exported.
Edit menu templates
The resulting PSD file will now be loaded into the external application. The following
steps may differ slightly depending on the application that is used. The following
steps, for example, describe the workflow in Photoshop CS, Photoshop Elements 8,
and the download version of Xara Xtreme Pro.
Editing a menu from 3 to 5 movies.
Photoshop Elements:
In Photoshop Elements, it is enough to touch an object with a held-down Alt key on
the video monitor and drag a copy of it to a new location. A movie button and a
chapter menu button should be duplicated each two times.
Assigning the movie takes place later via the index in the layer group hierarchy. Make
sure that the "x" chapter menu button ends up next to the "x" movie button in the
optical hierarchy. Otherwise, the screen will cause confusion for its users.
Save the results.
Photoshop CS1:
In the context menu of the layer group to be duplicated in Photoshop CS1, select
"duplicate layer set". This must be done twice for the movie button and the chapter
menu button. Drag the created layer sets to the required positions. To do so, the layer
must be selected and the Ctrl button be held down during the click.
Save the results.
Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6:
In Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6 you must first open the object gallery after loading the
PSD file. There, for each layer of the PSD file, corresponding Xara layers will be
created with contained objects. The layer groups are represented with the names of
individual Xara layers, with PSD layer names separated by backslashes.
Find the layers of the group, which you would like to duplicate. In the example, this
refers to the 4 layers on the movie button ad two l ayers of the chapter menu button.
To ensure visual assignment of the objects to the work area, you have to invest some
effort since the Designer does not select the corresponding objects when a layer is
selected, and conversely it doesn't select the layer when the work area with objects is
215
216
selected. You have to open a layer in the object gallery and select the contained
object. Now you will see the selection on the work space.
Now, the 6 layers will be copied along with the corresponding objects in the object
gallery by clicking on "duplicate". The newly created layers will always be placed at
the top position, so it makes most sense to copy the existing layers from the
lowermost to the topmost. Otherwise, you will have to restore the correct order of the
new layers using drag & drop.
Now, select all objects of the button while holding the Shift key and move them to a
new position. Usually, you also have to select the frame and chapter meny objects
behind the highlight layers and move those, too. Mutliselection in the object gallery is
not possible because the objects are in various layers, and the program will prevent
you from selecting them together.
These steps must be repeated for the second additional button.
Finally, the changes must be saved as a PSD file. To do so, select "Export" in the File
menu ("Save as..." wouldn't work).
Change text font
Photoshop Elements:
In Photoshop Elements it is recommended that you export the template after
changing the font size of the text to be edited to 0. This way, no text will be visible in
the PSD to be exported. This step is necessary because in Elements you cannot
change anything in the created layer groups and nothing in the existing font layer can
be removed.
Create the desired font objects using the text tool. A separate layer will be created for
each font object. Name the layers clearly by selecting "Rename layer" from the
context menu. Change layer names so that they begin with "(-)". If additional layers
are needed for the text (for example background picture/frame, etc), their names will
also have to start with an "(-)".
Add the created layer to the proper layer set using drag & drop (for example, the new
label for the movie button to the "(+) menu entry" layer set or the new header to the
"(+) title" layer set. To do so, you select the layers with the mouse inside the layer
container and drop them into the proper layer group.
Save the results.
Photoshop CS1:
In Photoshop CS1 you can access layer groups and can first delete text layers in order
to add your own text objects. Replace labels on movie buttons, by opening all "(+)
menu entry" layer sets and deleting text layers ("(-) ..."). Using the text tool, create
Edit disc menu
new text objects, one next to each movie button. Use all of the program's functions in
order to realize your ideas.
Drag the text layer using drag & drop into the layer container into the respective layer
sets. Adjust the layer names. Add an "(+)" to each text layer. You can generate
additional layers that may be necessary for the text, such as shadows, background
frames or bitmaps, etc. During reimport, all layers of a group with a (-) in front will be
pooled into one text object.
Save the results.
Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6:
In Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6, activate the text tool after loading the PSD file and
write the desired text next to the movie button.
Now, you have to localize the existing movie buttons (object gallery technology, see
above). You can drag and drop the text object from the background into the found
layer and delete the text object there (Del or "Delete" in the object gallery). Because
naming takes place in the surrounding layer and the objects in Designer themselves
don't have names, you don't have to rename anything.
Repeat this for every movie button and "Export" the result.
Adjust background and butttons
Photoshop Elements:
In Photoshop Elements you can only add something to existing button graphics and
highlights since individual layers in layer sets cannot be deleted an no new layer sets
can be created. The general method is similar to text editing: create new layers and
add these to existing layer sets using drag & drop. Finally, adjust the layer names: All
layers, containing the highlight to be displayed, must again recieve a name that begins
with a "(=1)".
You can create graphics for your new menu for "Prev" and "Next" buttons by dragging
them into the open PSD file. They are, for example, 4 layers, two button graphics and
twop highlights. The highlight layers must be renamed and scaled and placed on the
screen using the mouse. Move the layers using drag & drop into the "(+>) next
button" or "(+<) prev button" layerset.
Save the results.
Photoshop CS1:
In Photoshop CS1 everything works similarly to Photoshop Elements. In contrast to
MAGIX Video Pro X5, generated layers can also be deleted, so that button graphics
can really be replaced.
217
218
Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6:
In Xara Xtreme Designer Pro 6, the workflow is similar to creating new texts. When
the menu template is open, you can drag and drop, for example, 2 graphics for
navigation buttons into the ready PSD. Two new layers will appear in the menu
template with two new graphics objects. Drag these into the layer with the Bitmaps to
be replaced. Renaming is unnecessary, since the surrounding layers do this, too.
Localization, scaling and moving on the screen is analogous to Photoshop programs.
Import menu back into MAGIX Video Pro X5
After editing, a PSD file is created, which is imported into MAGIX Video Pro X5 again
and must then be assigned to a menu page as a template.
If access takes place through "Edit externally" see "Export menu" (view page
212), this is done automatically during saving and closing of the graphics
program. Otherwise, use the button "Import PSD" to do this.
This imports and converts the PSD (saved to an automatically generated folder in the
folder Content\DVD\Layouts, with TPL files and the generated bitmap files).
Create DVD menus without a template
It is recommended that an existing menu template is adjusted first with a graphics
program. This exercise will help you learn about the functions and structure of a DVD
menu as a PSD file to create menus without using any templates.
You can create PSD files without templates if the following is observed.
• MAGIX Video Pro X5 can only use bitmap layers from the menu PSD file. Text
layers are read as a bitmap (graphic) so that MAGIX Video Pro X5 cannot make
any changes to the text. Layer effects, etc. cannot be read by MAGIX Video Pro
X5. For this reason, all layers featuring additional features in the graphics
program need to be reduced/combined to bitmap level.
• The correct naming of layers is very important! MAGIX Video Pro X5 assigns the
layers and layer groups to the menu items via their names, which makes their
correctness important. The characters added in front (view page 212) of the layer
names should therefore be observed.
A correct menu PSD contains the following elements:
• background
• menu title
• x movie buttons with preview image, frame bitmap, text for menu, text for
numbering, highlight
• one chapter menu button per movie button with bitmap and highlight
Edit disc menu
• 3 navigation buttons: in front, in the back, and the root menu
Background: The background utilizes all layers from the PSD file from the very back to
the foremost "usable" layer groups. All of the layers up until this are combined via
alpha layering. If the appearance of the background in the graphics and in MAGIX
Video Pro X5 is different, then this step may also be made in the graphics program. In
Photoshop, all associated layers would be combined with the background layer.
Menu titles: In the next step, the layers of the menu title are added and combined into
a single layer group. This must feature a name that begins with "(+*)". Besides the
text layer, additional layers such as text background, shadows, etc. may be present.
All layers are unified as a single layer via alpha layering.
Film buttons: Layers for film buttons are each combined as a layer group that features
the prefix "(+-)" or "(+)" at the beginning of its name. The layers themselves have
different functions that are kept together via this naming prefix.
Preview image: The name of the layer for the preview image begins with "(%)". In this
case, MAGIX Video Pro X5 only reads the position and size of the layer and uses this
range to generate the preview image. In case multiple preview images are present,
their right corners will be combined during importing.
Text layer: This includes text layers beginning with "(-)". "(-) index text" serves as an
identifier for the naming, all other text layers will bear the name of the button label.
Highlight layer: The highlight layer is the top of the layer groups. Its name begins with
"(=1)". This should contain a highlight version (e.g. altered color) of the frame bitmap.
All other layers will be combined into a frame bitmap.
Chapter menu buttons: The last portion features the layer groups for the chapter
menus and navigation buttons. These are named variously ("(++)" or "(+>)","(+>)",
and "(+^)"), by they feature the same principle the structure. All highlight layers
(beginning with "(=1)") become the highlight bitmap; all other layers become the
buttons bitmap via alpha layering.
The sequence of the layer groups from the PSD file is basically not considered by
MAGIX Video Pro X5. Characterization in the program takes place in the order
outlined here, even if the associated layer groups in are saved in a different order in
the PSD file.
An exception is formed by movie and chapter menu buttons: arrangement in MAGIX
Video Pro X5 takes place in the sequence featured by the PSD file. The first chapter
menu button detected belongs to the detected movie button, the second to the
second movie button, and so on.
219
220
Burn disc
Switch to the "Burn" screen first by pressing the button displayed.
Here you can burn your movies to CD, DVD, or Blu-ray Disc including selection
menus.
All movies loaded into the project will be included. If you want to remove some of the
loaded films, switch to the "Edit" screen again and delete the unwanted movies from
the project there. To do this, switch to the movie, open the "File" menu and select
"Manage movies -> Remove movie" (view page 278).
Note: At a screen resolution of 1280 x 1024, the program display changes. This
makes the program more manageable and easier to use. The work steps remain the
same despite the different display.
Attention! If the current project contains data in the BDMV/MVC (Stereo 3D)
format, the burn process cannot proceed. Due to licensing stipulations of the Blu-ray
Disc Association, files in BDMV/MVC (Stereo 3D) format cannot be burned to
blank optical media.
Burning wizard
Click "Burn" to open the dialog for creating DVDs, Blu-ray discs, AVCHD
and other video media including a menu.
Burn disc
Select what kind of disc you would like to create.
The burn dialog
Here you can select your burner, the type of disc, the encoder settings. MPEG-2 is
used for DVDs. Blu-ray discs also use MPEG-2, and higher bitrates are employed in
order to reach the higher HD resolutions. AVCHD discs use a much more complex
MPEG-4/H.264 codec, which is documented in detail in the "MPEG-4 encoder
settings (view page 341) section of the PDF manual and in Help (F1 key).
Proceed as follows to burn a disc:
• Set up burner and burn speed: If multiple burners are installed, you may select
which device you wish to use in this menu.
• Encoder settings: Use the "Encoder" button to access the selection dialog to
specify settings for the MPEG encoder (memory requirements, quality, and
duration of the MPEG conversion). "Advanced settings" accesses a dialog
featuring additional options. You can adjust all the fine settings for the MPEG
encoder here.
• Burning disc/starting video encoding: The button "Burn disc" starts the disc
burning process. Every time you burn and every time a simulation is carried out,
the disc project is encoded. Please note that the MPEG file is not deleted from the
hard disk after the burn process has finished. Depending on the length of the
project, encoding and burning may take some time. The time required can be
seen in the dialog.
221
222
Creating an ISO image
The simplest way to create an ISO image is to select "Image recorder" under "Burner".
When starting the "Burning process", you have to specify a name for the image file
you wish to create.
Options
Simulate first: If you are not sure about the write speed or memory requirements of
the selected disc, you can simulate the write process before burning.
Activate buffer underrun protection: Many burners support techniques that prevent
the much-feared "buffer underrun". Use this option to activate this protective feature
and burn your files at higher speeds without risking making a coaster out of your blank
disc.
Completely format DVD/CD-RW media: This option reformats the RW media and
deletes all existing file material.
Shut down computer after burning: Activate this option to automatically turn off the
computer after encoding and burning has been completed. You could, for instance,
start the encoding and burning process in the evening, and you don't have to wait for
the process to finish to switch off your computer.
Burn standard video DVD onto same disc: You can use this option with a WMV HD
disc to burn an additional normal DVD video. This ensures that your discs can also be
played back on standalone DVD players. See Multi disc.
Activate the burner's defect management option: If a certain section of the disc is
defective, then this will be recognized by the burner and labeled as such. No content
will be saved there as a result.
Check data after burning disc: The finished disc will be checked for any mistakes after
burning.
CD/DVD title: This is the title of the DVD as it will appear on the PC. The disc project
name is displayed here by default.
Memory
Disc type
Storage media
DVD
DVD
Blu-Ray disc
Blu-Ray disc
(view page 340)
Menu
Quality:
Length (optimal quality)
Yes
Yes
***
*****
98 min.
110 min.
Burn disc
AVCHD (view
page 340)
DVD/Blu-ray
Disc
Yes
*****
30 min./DVD
160 min./Blu-ray Disc
* The display time for some DVD players can be determined in this menu. The
amount of image material that can be put onto a CD or DVD depends on the sizes of
the picture files.
It is difficult to acquire reliable information regarding required memory, especially
with the MPEG-2 encoder. If the “Variable bit rate” of the MPEG-2 encoder is
activated, encoding will occur according to the movements in the picture. The
required memory depends on the film material; an action film would need more
memory than a drama, for instance.
In the MAGIX Video Pro X5 burn dialog there is a display of remaining capacity,
which estimates directly how much space remains on the selected disc type with
current settings. As soon as you change Encoder settings, the capacity display will be
updated.
Tip: The capacity display is only an estimate. For this reason, always make sure that
you never completely fill the disc space. Instead, leave a buffer in case the files end
up being larger than the provided estimate.
If you cannot save your disc project on a single blank CD, you will have to divide it up
into various parts.
Note: Further information on MPEG compression and formats can be found in the
chapter PDF manual in the chapter "Video and data formats" (view page 336).
Separate project onto multiple discs
Automatically: If the disc project requires more memory than is available on the disc,
a dialog will appear before burning asking whether the disc project should be
automatically segmented for multiple discs. Confirm this by clicking “Yes”. The disc
project will then be automatically divided into individual disc projects and burned
sequentially onto multiple discs. This is the easiest method as everything is automatic
and all you have to do is insert a new blank CD when required.
Manual
Case 1: If several movies do not fit on a single disc:
In this case, switch back to the “Edit” interface and delete as many movies as
necessary until the remaining movies fit onto the disc. You can create a new disc
project and load and burn the other movies afterwards.
223
224
Case 2: If a long movie doesn’t fit on a disc...
In this case, the movie has to be split into two or more parts that will be burned
separately onto disc.
• Switch back to the "Edit" view and place the playback marker to the position
where you want to divide the movie. In the "Edit" menu, select "Cut -> Separate
movie".
• All passages behind the playback marker will be removed from the overly long
movie and made into a separate movie. Both movies can be controlled in the
movie tab in the Arranger. Save both of them separately to your hard disk (“File >
Manage movies > Export movie file” menu option, for example, as “Part 1” and
“Part 2”).
• Remove one of the two movies (for example, "Part 2") from the disc project
("File" > "Manage movies" -> "Remove from project (view page 278)" menu
option).
• Switch to the "Burn" interface and burn the first film ("Part 1") to CD or DVD.
• Create a new disc project (“New” button), switch to the “Edit” view and load it
into the second film (“Part 2”).
• Switch to the "Burn" interface and burn the second movie to ("Part 2") CD or
DVD.
Encoder settings
Use the “Encoder settings...” button to access the selection dialog to specify the
properties of the MPEG encoder (memory requirements, quality, and duration of the
MPEG conversion)
Preset: Here you will find useful presets for the selected disc type. Here are some of
the presets for a DVD:
Longplay DVD Video
Longplay music DVD
Standard DVD
Widescreen DVD
DVD with extra-long playing time. The bit rate is reduced,
which compromises image quality.
DVD with extra-long playing time for music. The bit rate for
the soundtrack remains at the highest quality level.
Normal DVD
Normal DVD in 16:9 format
Note: For all settings, you can choose between NTSC (USA and Japan) (Europe).
Bitrate: Bitrate determines the size on the disk that the finished video will take up. The
greater the bit rate, the larger the file, and the shorter the maximum playing time of
the movie that fits on a disc.
Burn disc
Adjust bit rate: The expected file size of the finished video is estimated, depending on
the set bit rate. If the movie does not fit onto the disc, the bit rate is corrected
accordingly.
Quality: Specifies the quality of the encoding process. The higher the quality, the
better the finished video will look; however, encoding will take considerably longer.
Smart Rendering: With Smart Rendering you can significantly reduce the encoding
effort for MPEG files. During the production of MPEG files, only those parts of the
movie that were changed in the program are re-encoded. Please note: The MPEG files
contained in the movie must have the same format, i.e. the bit rates (variable or
constant), audio formats, image resolutions and video formats must match.
Anti-interlace filter: Activate this option only for playback on a TV screen, where it
reduces horizontal flickering around fine details.
Calculate video effects on GPU: To accelerate exporting, you can let video effects be
calculated on the graphics card. At this time this applies to brightness, gamma,
contrast, color, saturation, image size, cropping and position effects as well as various
fades and mixes. Please note that external effect plugins and elaborate artistic effects
must be processed on the CPU and for this reason using this function will not yield
any speed advantage.
Note: This function is specifically optimized for NVIDIA graphics cards. You can,
however, experience acceleration with other types of graphics cards, too.
3D mode: If you have 3D material in your project which has been edited with
Stereo3D, you can select here in which mode it should be burned to disc here. 3D is
switched off by default.
To return to the standard settings, press the Reset button.
Via "Advanced" you can reach the "Advanced settings" dialog. Here you can make
changes to all MPEG encoder settings. Read the \ "MPEG-1/2 encoder-settings"
appendix (view page 351) and "MPEG-4 encoder settings" (view page 341) in the PDF
manual or program help.
225
226
Use Quick Sync Video, Open CL or CUDA for
rendering
MAGIX Video Pro X5 supports hardware acceleration for AVCHD exports, AVCHD
Disc and Blu-ray (H.264) Disc encoding (burning). This can noticeably speed up the
encoding process.
The following hardware acceleration technology is supported: Quick Sync Video
(Intel), OpenCL (AMD) and CUDA (NVIDIA).
Note: Ask your graphics card manufacturer whether your graphics card supports
hardware acceleration. Make sure that all the necessary drivers are installed.
If your system does support hardware acceleration, you can activate it through
"Advanced..." > "Hardware acceleration". The program will make the adjustments
according to the available technology.
Export movie
Export movie
A movie may be exported in different video formats via "File -> Export movie". The
options available vary according to the selected format.
Presets: These are typical settings for the selected format for the most important
applications.
Click "Save" to save your own settings and "Delete" to remove them
from the list.
Export settings: Specify general export parameters like resolution, aspect ratio, and
frame rate here. Select the most frequently used values from the list fields; to set your
own values click on the "..." button. The "Advanced" button opens the specific
settings for the selected video format. "File" enables you to export your file to another
folder than the preset one. The option "Overwrite file without confirmation" option
allows you to execute multiple exports in the same file.
Other: "Other" also provides the option to switch off your computer automatically
after long encoding processes and to limit export to the selected area (between the in
and out point).
Other
•
•
•
•
Export selected range only
Apply anti-interlace filter (suppresses flickering)
Shut down PC after successful export
Calculate video effects on GPU
Output after export: Some formats allow special playback options (e.g. DV-AVI on
the camera or WMV export with output via Bluetooth to your mobile phone).
Note: Burning a disc takes place on the "Burn (view page 67)" screen. Read more on
this in the chapter "Burning a disc (view page 220)".
Video as AVI
When exporting to AVI video, you may set and configure the size and frame rate of
the AVI video and the compression codec for audio (audio compression) and video.
Please see the general information about AVI video formats (view page 337) as well.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + A
227
228
Video as DV-AVI
This option exports the video as a DV encoded AVI. The arrangement can be easily
transferred to a connected camera using a FireWire interface.
The dialog will provide further information on all available options. You can access it
via "Advanced" in the export dialog. You will also be asked for which video standard
you want to export the DV data - PAL (Europe) or NTSC (USA).
Shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + D
Video as MPEG video
MPEG stands for "Motion Picture Experts Group" and is a high-performance
compression format for audio and video files.
We recommend finding a fitting preset from the list first, since there are many various
devices and applications for this format. You will also find, for example, intra-frame
presets (starting with "Intra422") for video playback in professional studio
environments.
Details about settings for the MPEG encoder are provided in the program's "Help" file
in the "MPEG encoder settings (view page 351)" appendix.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + P
Video as MAGIX video
Exports the project in MAGIX video format. This format is used for video recording by
MAGIX Video Pro X5 video software and is optimized for digitally editing high quality
video material.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + M
Video as QuickTime movie
Exports the project in QuickTime Movie format. This format enables streaming
playback of audio or video files via the Internet.
Note: The Apple QuickTime Library must be installed for QuickTime files (*.mov).
Keyboard shortcut:
"Ctrl + Alt + Q"
Export movie
Uncompressed movie
When exporting an uncompressed AVI video file you can adjust the size and frame
rate of the AVI video you wish to create. The video material will not be compressed
by a codec.
Note: This will create very large files!
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + U
Video as MotionJPEG AVI
Opens the export dialog for AVI video in MotionJPEG format. This format is
supported by digital picture frames, for example.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + O
Movie as a series of individual frames
This option exports the video as a sequence of single frames in bitmap format. This
means a graphic file will be created for every frame of the video. The image count may
be determined in the export dialog under "Frame rate".
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + E
Windows Media Export
Exports the arrangement in the Windows Media format. This is a universal
audio/video format from Microsoft. Accordingly, the settings options in the
"Advanced" dialog are very complex.
Manual configuration
Audio/video codec: Various codecs corresponding to the various Windows Media
versions (7, 8, 9) are possible. Should compatibility problems arise on playback, try an
older codec with a lower version number.
Bit rate mode: Constant and variable bit rates are possible, most devices and
streaming applications require constant bit rates. For VBR two pass modes the movie
is compressed in two passes in order to optimally use the bandwidth for highlycompressed movies for the Internet.
229
230
Bit rate/quality/audio format: The bit rate is decisive in defining the display/audio
quality. The higher this is set, the better the videos will look and the larger the files
and the required encoding time will be. For variable bit rates, the bit rate is adapted
dynamically to the requirements of the corresponding picture or sound material.
Either the quality value may be set between 1-100 or, for two-pass encoding, an
average or maximum bit rate. For audio, the bit rate is set additionally by the audio
format.
Import: For the most common applications (other than for playback on mobile
devices, for which you should use the supplied presets) like Internet streaming,
Microsoft provides diverse system profiles to choose from. If you have the Windows
Media Encoder 9 installed, which is available from Microsoft as a free download, you
can edit the profiles or create your own. These may be loaded by pressing the
"Import" button.
"Clip info" enables the title and artist names, copyright details, and descriptions to be
entered.
Keyboard shortcut:
"Ctrl + Alt + V"
Video as MPEG-4 video
MPEG-4 is the most advanced video format available at the moment. Unlike other
formats, this provides very high-quality pictures at the same file size. The presets list
is correspondingly long. We recommend looking through this list for settings for each
application and corresponding device.
MPEG-4 refers to a highly complex "academic" standard that operates and is
supported variably according to make. To go into detail on these differences and
parameters would be beyond the scope of this documentation. For this reason,
indications, along with the operational manual of your device, are given that should
help create executable MPEG-4 files. For more experimental users, the complete
setup options of the MPEG-4 codec can be found behind the "Advanced settings..."
buttons.
Video/audio: MPEG-4 and the newer MPEG-4 H.264 are currently available, and
these are used with new devices especially. MPEG-4 video may be combined with
AAC or AMR sound (the latter is mainly for mobile telephones). The combination of
MPEG-4 H.264/AAC is more seldom applicable (Apple iPod Video). MPEG-4 H.264
featuring AMR will almost never occur.
Multiplexer: This features so-called container formats and special options for Apple
iPod, iPhone, and Sony PSP. MPEG-4 is usually used as an output format, while
mobile phones (but not iPhone) mostly use 3GP.
Export movie
For more information about MPEG-4 encoder read the "MPEG-4 encoder settings
(view page 341)" chapter.
Keyboard shortcut:
"Ctrl + Alt + G"
Export as media player
Note: This option is available in the export dialog of the basic mode. In the standard
mode it is found in "File" > "Video as MPEG 4" > "Presets" as "FlashPlayer" options.
To be able to play back your movie in an Internet browser or to embed it into web
pages, you can export it as an HTML-enabled media player.
Select the desired quality and click on "Save video". In target folder, an HTM and an
MP4 file will be created for further use.
231
232
Audio as MP3
Note: MP3 export requires Windows Media Player version 10 and up.
The MP3 encoder cannot be used as a codec for the AVI audio file audio tracks.
Options
The "Options" section allows the format and the compression level for the audio file
to be set.
Bit rate: "Bit rate" selection specifies the compression level: the higher the bit rate, the
higher the quality of the exported audio file will be. On the other hand, the bit rate also
determines the final file size: the smaller the bit rate, the smaller the files will be.
Mono/stereo/5.1 Surround: Most mobile devices have only one loudspeaker. To save
on memory, you may export in mono for these devices. In "5.1 Surround" mode, you
can also export in MP3 Surround. Read "Mixer in Surround mode" for more about this.
Normalize: This function should always be activated. It guarantees that the music is
not too loud/overmodulated or too quiet.
Transfer format:
Specify here whether the created file should be transferred via device connected via
Bluetooth or via email.
Audio as wave
The movie's audio track is exported in the wave (*.wav) audio format.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + W
Export as transition...
The movie is exported as an alpha fade in the MXV format. The brightness value of
the movie depends on how the fade functions. The option "Export the selected range
only" also specifies that only a small part specified beforehand via the in and out
points will be exported.
If you do not change the save location, you will locate the saved fade in the Media
Pool under "Fades -> Standard".
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + T
Export movie
Single frame as BMP file
Exports the image located at the playback marker and displayed in the video monitor
as a bitmap (*.BMP) file.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + B
Single frame as JPG
Exports the image located at the playback marker and displayed in the video monitor
as a JPEG (*.JPG) file.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + J
Animated GIF
The video will be exported as an animated GIF file (also called "AniGIF). This file
format is supported by many mobile phones.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + F
Export movie information as EDL
Exports the current movie in a Samplitude-compatible EDL format. This export is
mainly intended for transferring audio files to Samplitude/Sequoia, since the program
cannot process all of the video formats MAGIX Video Pro X5 can manage. Only
object cuts, tracks, pans, and volume (with curves) are transferred, since the EDL
format only saves this information in a limited manner.
Items that are not transferred: All effects, Surround positions, video transitions,
markers (chapter markers, scene markers).
The basic audio and video files will not be exported. They will either be loaded by the
EDL-importing program automatically (if they are available in the same folder of the
EDL file) or requested during importing.
The following is a recommended approach for using an editing list in EDL format:
• Save the media you use beforehand in a folder (e.g. via "File -> Backup copy ->
Copy film and media to folder".
• Export your film as an EDL editing list and add the EDL file in the same folder as
the media.
233
234
• Load the EDL file into the importing program (e.g. Sequoia). The EDL file provides
the correct positioning of the individual media. After editing, you can export the
audio track as a WAV file, e.g. to import it again into MAGIX Video Pro X5 to
replace existing audio objects.
Note: Cut lists may also be imported from external programs. Select the menu item
"File -> Import cut list (EDL)" to do this.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + D
Upload to Internet
You can upload your movie to various platforms such as MAGIX Videocloud,
YouTube, Vimeo and Facebook by going to "File > Online". YouTube is a portal for
self-created clips of any kind. Vimeo is a growing video portal for sophisticated
movies. Facebook is the world's largest online community.
Community: Here you can select the desired platform.
Title: Here you can enter your movie's title.
Export movie
Description: Here you can enter a short description of your movie in order to inform
other community members about your movie.
Category: Pick a category for your movie.
Publish: Decide whether your movie should be "Private", or meant only for you and
persons authorized by you, or freely accessible, or "Public".
Export settings: Here you can select between various quality settings.
Upload to Internet (MAGIX Online Album)
The menu "File -> Internet > MAGIX Online Album -> Upload movie as video"
accesses the login dialog for MAGIX Online Album directly. Next, present your
photos together with videos and music in custom-designed online albums.
235
236
Export to device
The menu "File -> Export to device" allows you to transfer your video to the
connected playback device.
Besides the Camcorder options for digital camcorders (DV/HDV) and VHS recorder
for playing analog video for recording onto digital camcorders and analog VCRs
includes many options for further players such as mobile video players, Smartphones,
PDAs, or games consoles.
Output as media player
To be able to play back your movie in an Internet browser or to embed it into web
pages, you can export it as an HTML-enabled media player.
Export movie
Select the desired quality and click on "Save video". In target folder, an HTM and an
MP4 file will be created for further use.
Output as video file
With this option you can recalculate a movie including all objects, effects settings,
fades, text, etc. into a video file and save it to a computer.
Select a certain quality (e.g. DVD quality) and a file format (e.g. MPEG -4). The dialog
provides further information about the properties of your selection. Please note that
MAGIX Video Pro X5 also adjusts the quality when you change file format, if this
wasn't optimally selected for your chosen format.
237
238
Settings for and management of video
projectors
Movie and project settings
When you create a new video project, you can make settings for the new project
already in the start dialog. You can change these later.
In the following chapter, we'll discuss the various settings included in MAGIX Video
Pro X5 for your movies and projects.
All settings dialogs may be accessed via "File -> Settings".
Movie settings
Open the movie settings via "File -> Settings -> Movie..." or by pressing "E". The
following dialog opens:
The buttons at the top are for the four tabs in the dialogs: "Movie settings ->
Synchronization ->Movie information" and "Project settings".
Settings for and management of video projectors
Movie settings
Play movie in loop mode: The movie will be played back endlessly. Playback starts at
the playback marker and after reaching the end of the project will restart at its
beginning.
Use current settings as presets for new movies: If this option is activated, all new
movies will receive the settings that you have chosen in this dialog.
Crop new images to fit the screen automatically: Fits all images and videos inserted
into the project automatically so that they fit the screen.
Number of tracks: Here you can change the number of tracks.
Audio sample rate: The preset sample rate is 48 kHz. This sample rate is used for all
recordings and is also the standard setting for DVD audio tracks. This setting
guarantees optimal sound quality. Audio material at different sample rates (e.g. CD
Audio with 44 kHz) is automatically converted when loaded (resampling). Only
change this value if you want to use audio with a different sample rate or if your sound
card does not support this sample rate.
Video settings: You can select the standard settings for the picture format and frame
rate for PAL or NTSC images or for your own format. Make sure that the entries for
aspect ratio and frame rate correspond to your target format so that your finished
movie will play smoothly on the intended screen, no undesired black strips are seen,
and all video/image objects are in their correct positions.
Note: MPEG encoding requires a width/height ratio that is divisible by 8.
239
240
Synchronization
Synchronization dialog
Note: You will find descriptions of all synchronization dialog elements here. You can
find a description of how the synchronization settings are made in the
"Synchronization settings" (view page 241) chapter.
Input synchronization: Here you must select the driver which the MAGIX Video Pro
X5 will receive the MIDI timecode. This setting will also be used for SMPTE. With
synchronization via SMPTE, please make sure that the device corresponds to the
SMPTE input of your MIDI interface.
Frame rate: Here you can determine the fitting SMPTE frame rate, for example 24 for
cinema film, 25 for PAL video and audio synchronization, 29.97 drop/non drop or 30
for NTSC video.
Preroll: Here you can enter a frame number which MAGIX Video Pro X5 will ignore
before it starts synchronization. This accommodates the fact that analog devices need
time to reach their correct speed. To make sure that MAGIX Video Pro X5
synchronizes to a valid time, this segment can be skipped using pre-roll frames.
Settings for and management of video projectors
Output synchronization: Here you must select the driver, which MAGIX Video Pro X5
will use to send MIDI timecode. When synchronizing via SMPTE, please make sure
that the device corresponds to the SMPTE output of your MIDI interface.
Start offset (ms/SMPTE): Here you can enter a time value in milliseconds or in
SMPTE frames to be subtracted from the SMPTE time before the time is used for
synchronization. With an offset of 60:00:00 (1 hour), a tape whose SMPTE code
starts at 1 hour may be synchronized by MAGIX Video Pro X5 as starting at 0.
Specify synchronization
MAGIX Video Pro X5 is capable of being synchronized by external sources or
synchronizing external sources.
Synchronizing MAGIX Video Pro X5 with Samplitude or Sequoia is also possible via a
virtual MIDI cable (e.g. "MIDI Yoke" or Hubi's MIDI Loopback Device"). The
requirement in this case is simply that the virtual MIDI cable has been installed
successfully.
MAGIX Video Pro X5 as master
If MAGIX Video Pro X5 should synchronize external programs or sources, then
proceed as follows:
• Open the Synchronization dialog (view page 240).
• Under "Output synchronization", set the MIDI device that is connected to the
device that MAGIX Video Pro X5 is supposed to sync with.
• In case you want to synchronize another program (e.g. Samplitude/Sequoia) via a
virtual MIDI cable with MAGIX Video Pro X5, please make sure that the
corresponding MIDI device is set in both programs. The program to be
synchronized must support MTC and be configured as the "slave".
• For example, if you use "MIDI Yoke NT1" under "Output synchronization", then
the device "MIDI Yoke NT 1" must also be set in the MTC input of the program to
be synchronized.
MAGIX Video Pro X5 as slave
MAGIX Video Pro X5 set as the slave causes the program to follow an external
source or another program during playback.
• Open the Synchronization dialog (view page 240).
• Under "Input synchronization", set the MIDI device that is connected to the
device that MAGIX Video Pro X5 is supposed to sync with.
• In case you want to synchronize another program (e.g. Samplitude/Sequoia) via a
virtual MIDI cable with MAGIX Video Pro X5, please make sure that the
corresponding MIDI device is set in both programs. The program that is set to be
241
242
the synchronization source must support MTC and be configured as the
"master".
• For example, if you use "MIDI Yoke NT1" under "Input synchronization", then the
device "MIDI Yoke NT 1" must also be set in the MTC output in the master.
Synchronizing Samplitude/Sequoia with MAGIX Video Pro X5
This section should help you synchronize MAGIX Video Pro X5 with
Samplitude/Sequoia for Surround productions.
The introduction featured here provides a single example. In this case, MAGIX Video
Pro X5 is the master: Samplitude/Sequoia follows the time information from MAGIX
Video Pro X5 but sends information from the transport control to MAGIX Video Pro
X5. This method allows playback from both programs to be started while they run
synchronously.
The chapter "Transferring a Surround project to MAGIX Video Pro X5 (view page
198)" explains how completed Surround projects are transferred from
Samplitude/Sequoia to MAGIX Video Pro X5 and how they are processed.
Requirements
Since synchronization occurs via MTC (MIDI time code), a virtual MIDI driver must
be installed. Examples are "MIDI Yoke" or "Hubi's MIDI Loopback Device". Configure
the driver as required so that at least two virtual MIDI devices are available.
If a Surround project is to be created, then you require a Surround-capable sound card
with at least 6 channels.
Setting up MAGIX Video Pro X5
• Open the synchronization dialog
• Activate the box "Input synchronization active".
• Under "Device", set the first free virtual MIDI device (e.g. "MIDI Yoke NT 1").
Now set the transport controls via MMC (MIDI machine control):
•
•
•
•
Click the "MMC button" to open the "MIDI machine control".
Activate the box "Receive MMC commands (slave)".
Under "Device", set the second free virtual MIDI device (e.g. "MIDI Yoke NT 2").
Close both dialogs by pressing the "OK" button.
Settings for and management of video projectors
Setting up Samplitude/Sequoia
• Start Samplitude/Sequoia; MAGIX Video Pro X5 can remain open.
• Open the Samplitude/Sequoia synchronization dialog. Right-click the "Sync"
button on the transport console, or select the entry "Synchronization settings" in
the "Options" menu.
• Activate the box "Output synchronization active".
• Under "Device", set the first free virtual MIDI device (e.g. "MIDI Yoke NT 1").
Now set the transport controls via MMC (MIDI machine control):
• Click "MMC settings" to open the "MIDI machine control" dialog.
• Activate the box "Send MMC commands (master)", "Transport window as
remote control for external device", and "Space bar for remote control".
• Under "Device", set the second free virtual MIDI device (e.g. "MIDI Yoke NT 2").
• Close both dialogs by pressing the "OK" button.
Now you can conveniently dub your movie in Samplitude/Sequoia while you edit and
cut your work in MAGIX Video Pro X5. Playback can be started from both programs
and always runs synchronously.
MIDI Machine Control (MMC)
MMC modes
The synchronization window provides settings for remote control via MIDI Machine
Control. MAGIX Video Pro X5 supports the control of external devices or through
external devices through MMC.
Send/receive MMC fullframe: With activated output synchronization (MAGIX Video
Pro X5 is master), MMC commands are sent additionally. If the input synchronization
option (MAGIX Video Pro X5 is slave) is activated, MAGIX Video Pro X5 receives
MMC commands.
While playing a range in MAGIX Video Pro X5, the MMC device stops once the end
of the range is reached. If this option is activated, the start and stop commands sent
by the space bar only control the MMC device.
Movie information
This option opens an information window:
Name: Here you can enter the name of the current movie.
Date of creation: Displays the time the movie was created.
Last changed: Displays the time of the last save.
243
244
Number of used objects: Displays the number of all objects in the movie.
Used files: All files used in the movie are listed here.
Project settings
You can change project settings here. A project can consist of multiple movies and is
saved as an MVP file.
Name and path: Displays the name of the movie and the location where it is stored on
the computer.
Description: Here you can give your project a description - perhaps a few statements
about the state of the editing progress, e tc. This is something like a notepad function.
Date: Here you can assign your project a specific date. You can choose between a
date - e. g. "Dec. 25, 2010" - or a written description - e. g. "Christmas 2010".
Preview: This is the preview in a file manager such as Windows Explorer. You can use
the automatic selection for the preview image or choose an image from your hard
drive. You can also use a preview image from movie project.
Select preview image automatically: MAGIX Video Pro X5 uses an automaticallyselected preview image.
Use image file
Clicking the folder button opens a dialog to load image files. In this dialog, you can
navigate to the directory where the image file is found and select it by double clicking.
Use preview image from movie
Use the controller to select a frame from the corresponding directory.
Settings for and management of video projectors
Start dialog
A start dialog will open when the program is launched or a new project is loaded.
Here you can make important presets for the project. You can change these settings
at any time by going to "File" > "Settings".
Load existing project: Here you can select and load a previously saved project.
View introductory video: Here you can launch the introductory video with
information about workflows in MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Create new project: Here you can assign a name to your new project.
Project file: Here you can set the path for the project directory where all project files
should be saved.
Movie settings: Here you can set the movie's target format (display norm, resolution,
frame rate). This setting has no effect on the internal processing quality and can be
changed at any time by going to "File > Settings > Movie".
Audio sample rate: Here you can set the audio track's audio sample rate.
Use movie template: Here you can choose an included movie template for a new
project. Read the "Using movie templates" (view page 274) section for more details.
Editing mode: For editing, you can choose between standard and basic mode (view
page 37).
245
246
Open
With this option you can load a project or a media file. Please note that all
media files associated with it must be loaded along with a project. MAGIX
Video Pro X5 will search for all used sounds and video files in the folders in
which they were located when the move was saved.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + O
Save project
The current disc project is saved with the name displayed in the project window.
If you have not specified a name for your project yet, a dialog will open for you to
do so.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + S
Save project as...
A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the video for saving.
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + S
Program settings
All basic settings for MAGIX Video Pro X5 are made in program settings.
Open program settings from the menu tab "File > Settings > Program" or use the
shortcut by pressing "Y".
Playback
Audio playback
Driver selectionHere you can specify whether the Windows Wave driver or the
DirectSound driver will be used for audio playback.
• DirectSound is a component of DirectX and, if necessary, is installed together
with MAGIX Video Pro X5. DirectSound has the advantage that the sound output
(for all modern sound cards or onboard soundchips) can also be used by other
programs open simultaneously.
• WAV drivers are recommended if the CPU load is higher, as the larger buffers
allow better handling of the load peaks (otherwise this would cause crackling).
Output device: Use this option to specify which sound card plays the wave audio
objects. This is especially important if you have multiple sound cards installed on your
computer, e.g. "onboard sound" as well as an additional sound card.
Settings for and management of video projectors
Audio buffer: In order to allow smooth playback of a complex arrangement, MAGIX
Video Pro X5 creates a RAM data buffer into which the current data is loaded. This
allows for step-by-step preprocessing instead of preprocessing for the entire
arrangement.
• Number of buffers: Here you can specify how many buffers should be used. More
buffers increase reliability and improve playback performance, but they also
increase the memory requirements. When playback goes through DirectSound,
only one buffer is used automatically.
Note: As a rule, if response and loading times are too slow, reduce the number and
size of the buffers. Otherwise, increase the buffer size if you are still having problems
with playback performance. Since error-free playback is usually more important than
fast reaction times, the buffer size should be raised to 16384 or 32768 to avoid
drop-outs. The possible number of used buffer updates is between 2 and 10.
• Multitrack size/Preview size: Specify the buffer size used to play the entire
arrangement or for previewing waves in the file manager.
Video playback
Overload optimization for realtime playback: Here you can activate or deactivate
overload optimizing during realtime playback of the arrangement. This feature is
particularly suitable for lower performance PCs.
Instant cache refresh in Multicam Mode: Activate this mode to empty the cache in
short intervals which will make the preview for multicam editing immediately visible
in the preview monitor. This may result in juddering during playback.
Track number for parallel track optimization: It makes sense to limit the number of
tracks when the program is running low on disk space and the project has multiple
videos in parallel.
Arranger
Autoscroll during playback: If autoscroll is activated, the screen view automatically
shifts when the playback marker reaches the right edge of the screen, which is useful
for longer arrangements. You can select the size of the scrolling steps from either
"Fast" (whole pages) or "Slow" (half pages).
Attention: Scrolling requires constant recalculation of the screen view which may
lead to interrupted playback if system RAM is too low. If this happens, simply
deactivate the autoscroll feature.
247
248
Update in background: The update of the object display after move and zoom
operations in the arranger is performed in the background in order to let you work
smoothly.
Spacebar function: You can set whether the playback marker returns to its original
position or stays at its current place when playback is stopped with the spacebar.
Image playback
Resizing high-quality image material: Use this feature to improve the quality during
resizing, particularly when downsizing to less than half of the original size (e.g. for
picture-in-picture effects). Keep in mind that this function requires more processing
power.
Load images in background: Images will be loaded in the background to save
computing power.
Folders
Set the path where
• projects are saved (Projects) here,
• where files are exported (Export) or imported (Import), and recordings
(Recordings) are saved,
• where disc images are saved,
• where EXE files for the external audio and picture editor are located so that they
are able to be launched via the context or effects menu.
• and where the VST-plugins were installed.
Settings for and management of video projectors
Video/Audio
In the "Video/Audio" tab you will find all settings options concerning video and audio
files.
Video standards
PAL is used in Europe; the United States, Canada, and Japan use NTSC.
Movie display
The resolutions that can be set here concern only the picture display in the arranger. If
playback becomes jerky, we recommend entering a lower value. This does not
influence the quality of exported videos.
Automatic interlace processing: MAGIX Video Pro X5 usually automatically detects
whether the loaded video files were recorded using interlace or progressive method;
for interlace videos, the half-frame sequence is also recognized. In case automatic
detection fails, you can deactivate it here and set the object properties (view page
306) of video objects to the correct process.
Options
Automatic preview of exported clips: This option plays the clip directly after export to
check the result.
Extract sound from video: If a video file contains video as well as audio files, you can
also import the audio file of the video if this option is selected. It will be displayed as
an audio object in the arrangement below the video object. Both are automatically
grouped together. If the audio track has to be edited or replaced later, you first have to
ungroup it ("Ungroup" button in the tool bar or via the "Edit" menu).
Allow user-defined names for sound extracted from VOBs: This determines whether
a dialog will appear for each imported file during VOB import (VTS_01_1.vob) where
you can give your film a name (box checked) or whether an automatically generated
name should be assigned (box unchecked).
Adjust small deviations from 4:3 aspect ratio during bitmap import: This option
automatically adjusts photos that have nearly a 4:3 aspect ratio to the 4:3 TV format.
The pictures are therefore easily stretched or compressed. This inevitably brings
about distortions in the picture. If this option is deactivated, black bars appear along
the sides.
Load effects from JPX file automatically for images: If the images were edited with
other MAGIX programs (e. g. MAGIX Photo Manager), description files with jpx
extensions have ben created for each, containing certain effects and image titles.. This
option adds that information into your editing process.
249
250
Apply image effects during export to MAGIX Online Services: If this option has been
activated, all image effects will be calculated into the sent file.
GPU acceleration for standard fades: Here you can (de)activate hardware
acceleration of your graphics card for 3D effects. More information can be found in
the 3D fades (view page 101) chapter.
Automatically create frame table during import: Sometimes, rebuilding a frame table
can get rid of problems in certain MPEG files. For example, such problems can be
present if the navigation (positioning of the playback marker, transport) is bumpy or
doesn't function at all.
Normally, when loading MPEG video, a frame table is not created in order to speed up
the loading process. If you do create one anyway, MPEG files are normally noticeably
faster and easier to edit.
Reduce bitmap resolution for preview: Resolution fro image files will be reduced
during playback to conserve resources. This requires less computing power than
playback in full resolution; full resolution is always calculated during export.
Outsource memory for bitmaps in other process: If this option is activated, your
bitmaps become easier to handle because they are edited in a different process.
System
Reactivate warning dialogs:In its newly installed state, MAGIX Video Pro X5 displays
a number of security queries in various sections of the program. Each of them can be
switched off by clicking the small box at the bottom that says "Don't show this
message again". To display these warning messages, select the "Reactivate dialogs"
option. "Hide news" enables current messages concerning MAGIX Video Pro X5 to be
deactivated, and the screen can also be set to darken when dialogs are displayed.
Start online configuration: Configure the various services for MAGIX Online World
here.
Undo/Redo: Here you can set the maximum number of steps the "Undo" function can
have. Please note that memory requirement increases with the number of steps the
program must save.
Automatic save: Here you can set up an automatic backup function, which saves the
project as a backup file with an "MV_" (instead of the normal project file "MVD") in
the project folder. You can choose whether or not your project should be backed up
and at what intervals this will take place.
Other
Automatic preview when changing transitions: When this option is activated, a short
preview of the transition effect will be quickly played between the two objects you
selected.
Settings for and management of video projectors
High-quality output for dynamic zoom and combination effects: This improves the
display quality of zooms and effects, but results in longer loading times.
Move playback marker when selecting objects: This option automatically moves the
playback marker to the beginning of the selected object.
Import Formats
File formats that you never use can be de-selected here. Once de-selected they won't
be imported anymore. Please keep in mind that several import modules exist for some
file types (AVI, WMA); MAGIX Video Pro X5 uses the fastest one in each case. If you
experience problems during the import of certain files, you can experiment with
deactivation of certain import modules, forcing the program to use the slower, but
more compatible import module.
Display options
Activate video output
With this option, you can display your arranger view on an additionally connected
monitor. Without additional hardware, you can play a preview in any mode in order to
see how the final material looks.
Preview in the Arranger/preview window and playback in video
recorder/analog recording
You can set the playback mode separately for the arranger (including all preview
windows and effects dialogs) and the preview monitors during recording and in the
video recorder.
Always use DirectX9: Normally DirectX11 is activated for the preview in the arranger.
DirectX9 can be activated for Windows XP and graphics cards that don't support
DirectX11. You can also activate it if you are having general problems.
Video mode
The default setting is "Hardware accelerations (Direct3D)", which you shouldn't
change because it delivers the best results. If you are running into problems, such as if
the image remains black, you can see if the other modes work better. "Compatibility
mode (VideoForWindows)" switches hardware acceleration completely off, and thus
this setting should work best. It is also the slowest mode, in which the project
probably won't play smoothly. These options are irrelevant for file export and disc
burning.
Tip: Change video modes only in case of problems with presets, such as jerks or
persistent image artifacts.
251
252
Preview in arranger
Compatibility mode (Video for Windows): This is the (tried-and-true) standard
mode, which works on all systems.
Hardware acceleration (Direct 3D): This mode offers extreme speed advantages,
processing effects, mixing and various transitions directly on the graphics card.
Depending on the graphics card, performance can increase by 300%. The graphics
card will not be used during export.
Warning: To be able to use this mode, the graphics card must have at least 128 MB
disk space of its own. Direct 3D 9 or higher must be installed and the graphic card
driver must support "High Level Pixel Shader Language 2.0". MAGIX Video Pro X5
checks the corresponding properties when this mode is selected, and switches it off
if necessary.
Preview and playback on VCR/Analog recording
Alternative mode 1 (Overlay Mixer): In this mode you can use hardware deinterlacing
for export to PC monitor or progressive scan-enabled projector, which noticeably
improves reproduction quality of analog video recorded with interlacing.
Alternative mode 2 (Video Mixing Renderer 9): This mode uses hardware
deinterlacing of modern graphics cards together with DirectX9. Make sure that you've
installed the latest graphics card drivers and the card is compatible with DirectX9.
This mode works better than the standard mode (Overlay Mixer) only for a few
graphics card models.
Standard renderer: The DirectShow standard renderer is used for viewing.
Image formation in Vertical Blank Intervals (VBI)
The image formation takes place in the vertical blank intervals of the monitor signal
(or the connected TV signal). This helps avoid image interruptions. Warning: Because
of the necessary waiting time on the next VBI, this process adds significant
computation time!
You can deactivate this option for digital displays such as TFT monitors. In "Overlay"
mode, image formation occurs exclusively via VBI.
Acceleration for high-resolution MPEG2 files
This option can be selected only in the "Hardware acceleration (Direct 3D)" video
mode and indicates that videos in MPEG-2 format will be processed directly from the
graphics card GPU. Depending on the graphics card performance, an improvement of
up to 300% can be achieved!
Settings for and management of video projectors
De-interlacing
The DirectShow modes "Overlay mixer" and "Video mixing renderer 9" enable
activation of hardware de-interlacing for the graphics card. For general information
about de-interlacing and the options "Top/bottom field first", please read the
corresponding article "De-interlacing (view page 359)" in the manual.
Comparison image in source monitor for editing effects in the Media Pool
If this option is activated, the "Selected objects without effects" comparison mode will
be automatically activated when switching into the Media Pool effects, and will be
automatically deactivated when the mode is exited. This serves to compare the
original and edited image.
This automation will be suppressed if the option is deactivated.
Proxy and Preview Rendering
Use this dialog to set how MAGIX Video Pro X5 renders a set range in the arranger.
The dialog can be accessed through "File -> Settings -> Proxy and Preview
Rendering".
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + R
Info: Proxy and preview rendering enables smooth video previewing by rendering
complicated sections of the video project in advance. You can start this function in
the context menu of the marker bar. More details are available in the "Preview
rendering" section.
253
254
Presets: Select a preset that is suitable for your project. The rendered files will be
sampled at either a higher or lower quality accordingly and the preview quality will be
determined.
• Playback: The lowest quality level. Preview rendering should only be used for
better playback performance within the program and should not be used for
exporting or burning. This setting is preset.
• DVD output: Playback in the program becomes smoother and the creation of a
standard video DVD is accelerated.
• HD output: Playback in the program becomes smoother and the creation of a Bluray/AVCHD is accelerated.
• Manual setting: The dialog is extended:
Format settings: Here you can specify which format should be used to render a set
range. "Advanced settings..." enables you to adjust the selected format to suit your
own particular requirements. You can even save your own settings as presets for
future projects.
Options
• Use files created during rendering for exporting and burning: If the resolution of
the rendered files is satisfactory, you can use them for the final export. This
decreases the processing time for the finished movie.
This function optimizes the quality for export and is the default setting for the
DVD output and HD output presets.
You cannot select this setting if you have activated the option "Best Performance
during Playback".
• Extract audio when creating proxy files: In addition to the proxy files for videos,
separate audio files (*.wav) are created in order to improve playback
performance.
• Create Stereo3D files for preview rendering: This enables a 3D preview.
Settings for and management of video projectors
Note: Rendering may take longer depending on the selected format and size of the
set range.
Backup copy
Files must be saved to be able to be easily retrieved in case of a hard drive crash or
some other error.
Copy movie and media to folder/copy disc project and media to folder
This menu option allows you to put a complete MAGIX Video Pro X5 arrangement,
including all applied multimedia files, into one folder. This is especially useful if you
want to archive an arrangement for later use or in case the files are on multiple data
carriers (CDs, DVDs, etc) so that on loading you continually have to change them.
Effects files used are also saved in a folder together with the other files.
If the option "Copy disc project, movies, and media in folder" is activated, all movies
in the current disc project, including all of the related media, are combined and copied
into the selected folder.
Note: MAGIX Video Pro X5 also features DV logging. Large DV-AVI and audio files
no longer need to be backed up, since MAGIX Video Pro X5 saves the position of
this material on the DV tape and imports missing files automatically when reloading
the DV tape.
A dialog opens to specify the path and name of the video.
Shortcut:
Copy movie and media into folder
Copy project and media into folder
"Shift + R"
"Alt + S"
Burn project and media onto CD/DVD/burn data to CD/DVD
Use this option to burn the film as well as all associated files to disc. To do so, you
must have a burner installed on your computer and a blank CD must be inserted.
If you choose the option "Burn project and media", the current project and all of the
associated media files are grouped together and burned onto disc.
Even larger projects can be burned straight to disc. The project, if necessary, will be
split up and burned automatically to multiple discs. A restore program which is
burned to the first disc of this type of backup guarantees that the backup can be
restored without any problems.
255
256
Restore project from video disc
This command restores a project backup that has been saved on a disc. The disc must
have been burned with the option "Add project backup" (see "Burn disc" dialog
options).
Choose which of the movies contained on the disc should be restored by selecting it
from the list and highlighting and selecting the corresponding directory. You must
also indicate the directory where the project should be saved. A subfolder
"Backupxxx" will be created in this folder where all project files from the disc will be
saved. All of the restored movies will be loaded into MAGIX Video Pro X5 for editing.
Select the option "Restore image files only" and only the original image files
contained on the disc will be restored.
Load backup project...
This option loads an automatically created slideshow backup. This type of automatic
backup gets the file extension MV_ (underscore). This command is only intended for
use in emergencies, for example, if you unintentionally saved your change and wish to
return to the previous version of the movie.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + O
Tip: Under "File -> Settings -> Program...", you can determine how often an
automatic backup will be created in the "System" tab under "Automatic backup".
Importing & exporting EDL files
Import EDL (edit list)
The menu "File -> Import edit list (EDL)..." allows you to import edit lists in the
Samplitude EDL format into MAGIX Video Pro X5. It is important in this case that the
folder structure remains unchanged. During importing into MAGIX Video Pro X5, the
file locations must match the place where they were when the cut list was created
using Samplitude/Sequoia.
• If an empty project is opened, the complete EDL file will be imported.
• If the tracks are muted before importing the EDL file, then they will not be
removed.
• If there are already objects in the project, then you will be asked the files should
imported into the project or if a new project should be created for them.
Settings for and management of video projectors
Export EDL
The menu item "File -> Export movie" enables EDL files to be created using the
"Export movie information as EDL..." for additional editing in other programs, e.g.
Samplitude or Sequoia.
This section features a completely new input mask. Use the check boxes to select
whether video and/or audio should be exported. As required, a selection may be
made whether individual tracks should be rendered or referenced as original files via
EDL. Video rendering takes place in the DV-AVI format, and audio rendering as WAV
stereo. For Surround projects, 6 mono files will be rendered.
An export folder may be specified via the selection dialog. The EDL file and the
rendered files will be stored there as required.
Check boxes may be used to select whether the EDL file should be loaded directly into
Sequoia (if present). The program will either be launched automatically, or the files
will be added into a running instance of the program. The user may enter the path to
Sequoia in the input mask.
Clean-up wizard
The clean-up wizard helps delete projects from the hard drive, including all of the
media files used. Use this function to free up disk space for future projects.
Caution: If the files you used in the movie have also been used in other movies (like
trailers, opening music, etc.), then you should make backup copies of these files
beforehand.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + Y
Delete specific files
Choose this option if you would like to select certain files for deletion. In the file
selection dialog, you can select the desired files. In the next step, the clean-up wizard
searches for other files which belong to your selection. Using this method, you can
delete an entire movie with all of its accompanying media, help, project, and backup
files. Before they are deleted, you will receive relevant information in a dialog and a
confirmation request.
Search and delete superfluous files
Choose this option if you would like to find unnecessary files or free up some space on
your hard drive. The clean-up wizard automatically looks for extraneous files created
during use of MAGIX Video Pro X5. Before they are deleted, you receive relevant
information in a dialog and a confirmation request.
257
258
Advanced
"Advanced" lets you set which files and folders should be included in the cleaning
process.
Special functions and wizards
In this chapter, we will introduce you to some of the especially useful special
functions.
Proxy editing
If performance deteriorates and playback becomes shaky due to hardware limitations,
hi-res source material or very complex projects, it is recommended to use proxy files
for editing. Lower resolution copies of the original file in a format that is better for
playback are created and used for the editing process. The original files in a higher
resolution are then used for the export process by default.
You can activate the "Create proxy files automatically" function directly in the start
dialog or at a later time in "File" > "Settings" > "Movie..." > "General movie settings".
By default this option is not selected.
When this option is activated, proxy files will automatically be created for all video
files imported to the arranger or the project folder.
Note: Make sure there is sufficient memory available if proxy files are going to be
created.
You can set the quality of the proxy files in the dialog "Configure proxy and preview
rendering" > "Presets". (Shortcut: Alt + R). The rendering process can be cancelled by
pressing the "ESC" key. Proxy files will not be created if the quality settings for them
are higher than the quality of the source material.
• It is not possible to create proxy files on an FAT file system (such as on an SD
card) so the source material for proxy files should be saved on an NTFS drive
(Windows standard).
Proxy files are not created for the preview on the source monitor. The conversion only
takes place when the material is moved from the source monitor to the project folder.
Now editing can be done more smoothly on the source monitor.
Special functions and wizards
Tip: You can activate or deactivate proxy files using the Quick function for a
smoother playback. This is useful during proxy editing if you want to quickly check
how an effect will look on the original material.
Use proxy files during rendering: If you want to burn your HD material to DVD, you
can reduce the rendering time. Activate the settings „Best performance for DVD“ in
the dialog „Configure proxy and preview rendering“ before the proxy files are created.
This will ensure that the quality of the proxy files is sufficient for output on DVD. You
should also activate the option "Use files created during rendering for export and
burning" to use the proxy files during export.
Automatic scene detection
In the "Effects" menu automatic scene recognition can be opened. The scene
recognition function analyzes the film for scene transitions and scans for drastic
changes in the brightness and color distribution within the picture.
Digital Video “time stamps” (points in time at which the device was switched on and
off) are also recognized as separate scenes.
1.
First select "Start" from the "Search scene change" box. The search for possible
scene transitions will then start. If you have a large amount of material, this
can take a while, but the image analysis has to be done just once for each
recording. The results are saved together with the video file.
If the scene recognition is performed again with the same source material, the
scene transitions found are immediately displayed. If you are still not happy
with the resulting scene partitioning, simply repeat and correct where
necessary.
259
260
2.
All found scene transitions in the list can be checked in the dialog. Every scene
marker can be selected or deleted. Select a scene transition from the list of
found scene transitions and use the preview images to check whether the
found transition is really a scene change or not.
Tip: This option is helpful, for example, if a camera flash was captured in the source
footage. The flash from the camera would cause a sudden brightness modification
even though there was no actual scene change.
The preview always displays the end of the previous scene and the beginning of the
new scene. If the images do not differ except for the brightness, the scene may have
been falsly recognized. In this cases select "Delete scene marker".
Via the zoom +/- buttons you can enlarge the part of the arranger where the selected
scene begins or previous scene ended.
You can use the "Sensitivity" controller to change the sensitivity of the scene
recognition, so that different scene changes can be found depending on the setting.
With "Action on OK" you can specify whether the movie should be cut at the selected
scene transition or at all scene transitions and whether the found scenes should be
saved in the project folder.
Musical cut adjustment
Behind the "Adjust cuts to music" function in the "Edit" menu hides the option to
adjust the rhythm of an existing arrangement with cut scenes to a song in order to
transform the movie into a music video. Requisite is that the song contains
information about rhythm and beat.
• Place the arrangement with video sequences on the top track (track 1), which
should be used for the musical edit adjustment. If possible, the arrangement
should have the same length as the song and contain many cuts.
• Load the song, on which the cuts should be based, onto the track below.
• Select "Edit" > "Musical cut adjustment".
Special functions and wizards
Normally, an info dialog will appear, stating that no beat information exists for the
selected audio object.
• Select the "Open assistants" option in the dialog.
This opens the "MAGIX Remix Agent" beat recognition assistant. This tool can
analyze the song's rhythm.
After the song's BPM value (= beats per minute) has been found, the music will be
separated into short, similar passages (remix objects). The individual objects that
261
262
result in (However, nothing prevents you from doing just that. To do so, click on
"Ungroup".)
The resulting object borders are important for editing. Because all objects always
"snap to grid" on their edges, videos can be arranged in such a way so that they are
cut exactly to the rhythm of the music: the positions on the track where the videos
will snap lie on the positions of the beat.
Checking the automatic tempo recognition
A song must have the following properties in order to be analyzed:
• It must be longer than 15 seconds.
• It must contain "rhythmic" (danceable) music.
• It must be in stereo.
The analysis takes place in four steps:
Step 1: Checking the start marker
Step 2: Tempo recognition
Step 3: Specifying beat starts
Step 4: Application of BPM and beat recognition
Step 1: Checking the start marker
Before you start the analysis you should set the start marker at the position where the
rhythmic music begins. This means that if the song has a long ambient intro, the start
marker should be set after the intro. If the wizard can't detect any rhythm it will ask if
the start marker has been set after the intro. If not, you can move it to a better
position in the dialog.
If the beginning of the song does not have a definite rhythm, you will be asked if you
want to move the start marker.
Step 2: Checking the automatic tempo recognition
The Remix Agent will analyze the audio material and try to determine the tempo. The
object is played back while a metronome click can be heard and numbered green beat
lines appear in the waveform.
Under the waveform on the left side the established tempo is displayed in BPM. There
is a small transport console in the middle to make navigating easier. The slider serves
as a position controller. To set the metronome volume, an additional fader and mute
button are provided on the right-hand side.
The automatic tempo recognition doesn't always work right away. If you don't hear
the metronome clicking in time with the music, click the "No" button in the upper
section of the dialog in order to access the manual tempo input dialog.
Special functions and wizards
To correct the metronome speed and any timeshift that may occur between the
metronome clicks you can use the tempo correction as well as the "Tap tempo"
button:
Tempo correction: The Remix Agent offers various speed settings. The most probable
tempo detected by the Remix Agent is preset. If this tempo isn't correct, you can
choose another one from the list. The next time you play back the song it should be in
sync with the metronome.
On/Off beat correction: Now it may happen that the tempo is right, but the beats
have been displaced. "On/off beat correction" provides a number of alternatives for
moving the beats according to the complexity of the rhythm. Try out various
alternatives until the metronome clicks are in sync with the beat.
Tap tempo: Alternatively, click rhythmically on the "Tap tempo" button or press the
"T" key. Additional blue lines are displayed in the wave display. After at least four
taps, the Remix Agent attempts to select the correct tempo from the list in "Tempo
correction". The display next to the "Tap tempo" button displays the current status.
Keep tapping until the red display showing "Unlocked" changes to the green "Locked"
setting.
Use the "0" key to manually set the quarter beats while the music plays. Surrounding
markers will automatically be removed to ensure that the set tempo remains intact.
You can move the markers with the mouse. If you hold down the "Ctrl" key
simultaneously, the subsequent markers are also moved.
If the metronome clicks now correspond with the music, you can continue to the next
step.
Step 3: Determining the start of a bar:
Next you can set the time signature. The default setting is 4/4 but you can adjust this
if necessary. The beat at the start of the bar should coincide with the high sound of
the metronome, or the red line in the waveform display.
It can now be corrected in one step: If the start of the bar can be heard, click on "Tap
One" once using the mouse or press the"T" key on the keyboard.
Alternatively, select how many quarter notes the "One" is to be moved back.
Use the "0" key to manually tap the position of the beginnings of the bars during
playback. This allows you to correct the beginnings of the bars in longer sections.
Continue to the last step if the starts of the bars are now correct.
263
264
Step 4: Apply
The final step is to apply the musical information to the audio material.
The images on track 1 will be repositioned according to this information.
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker automatically generates music tracks that correspond to
the indicated mood. Even mood changes are possible.
You can open MAGIX Soundtrack Maker by going to "Edit" > "Assistants (view page
288)".
Select music style
Choose a musical style first. The option "Apply only between start and end marker"
limits the length of the background music you want to create. Start and end markers
(view page 109) may be set with the left and right mouse button if MAGIX
Soundtrack Maker is open.
Set mood change:
You can select a mood from the list.
Preview audio: Preview the selected mood here.
Position: Use the position slider to skip to a certain position in order to set the mood
for a certain position. The start marker may be moved instead with the left mouse
button. The preview will be displayed in the video monitor simultaneously.
Add emotion: This button inserts the selected mood at the current position. MAGIX
Soundtrack Maker will then suggest a new position for the next emotion by
repositioning the position slider. Of course, you may also position this elsewhere to
insert further moods.
Special functions and wizards
Delete emotion: Removes the currently set.
Generate background music
Clicking "Create soundtrack" creates a new soundtrack. "Progress" shows the current
status.
Variations
If the background music that has been created is not suitable, a variation may be
created. This process may be repeated for the entire background music as well as for
individual emotions:
• If you want to vary the entire background music, then simply click on "Create
variations".
• If you only want this to apply to a certain emotion, then move to it with the
position slider first in the dialog (or the play marker on the main screen). Activate
the option "Vary only selected emotions". Now click "Create variation".
Automatic cut adjustment: This option re-arranges the video and photo objects in
your project to match the music. Make sure this option is deactivated in case this
function is unwanted.
265
266
Slideshow Maker
Slideshow Maker is ideal for converting still images into moving pictures, adding
background music, and effects.
• Open Slideshow Maker via "Edit -> Wizards".
Style templates
Select a template that best matches your needs.
This button plays a sample slideshow with the selected style template.
Intensity
Controls the portion of video and image objects that feature effects. With "Normal"
you will see a balanced amount, whereas with "Weak" or "Strong", correspondingly
fewer or more effects.
Transitions
Transitions can be individually activated or deactivated using this button.
The slider in the transitions dialog can be used to adjust the amount of each type of
transition.
Special functions and wizards
Transition duration: Set the length of the transitions in seconds.
3D transitions use Stereo 3D mode: If this option is activated, 3D transitions use
Stereo 3D mode.
Random transitions: The transitions are set to random values.
The "play" button below the preview monitor plays a preview.
Effects
Various effects can be individually activated or deactivated using this button.
The slider in the dialog controls the amount of each effect type.
Random effects: The faders that control the amount of effects are set randomly.
Treat special image formats intelligently
Treat special image formats intelligently: Panoramas and portrait photos can be
treated "intelligently". If this option is activated, then panoramas and portraits will be
treated with special effects adjusted to the format. These effects can also be selected
and unselected in the detail view.
If this option is not selected, then these images will use the same effects as all other
images.
You can turn effects and fades belonging to each category on or off using the list
symbol. The arrow below the preview monitor plays a preview.
Properties & titles
Film length
Resulting film length: This is an estimation of how long the film will be after applying
Slideshow Maker.
Available music: This is the complete length of the music that is currently selected.
Background music (view page 268) enables detailed settings for the pieces of music
to be used.
Adjust film length to the music: An attempt is made to adjust the length of photo
objects to the background music. If the film is too short the music will be cut off. If the
film is too long, the music will repeat.
267
268
Adjust music length to the film: Photo objects have a set length, and the resulting film
is filled with music. The music at the end of the movie is simply faded out.
Including video objects
Process videos: If this option is set, then videos will be automatically processed with
effects and transitions.
Length: Settings may be made here about whether the original length of the video
should be maintained or if it should be shortened.
Opening and closing credits
Set the text for opening and closing credits here.
Text: Enter the corresponding text for opening and closing credits that should be
added by Slideshow Maker.
File: A title template, a video, or an image file may also be used.
Note: Titles created using Slideshow Maker may also be edited at any time.
Group associated images together
If this option is active, an attempt is made to detect associated events via their date
information and to separate them from each other optically. Detection of individual
events is based on the time span of these events to achieve a sensible separation.
Begin group with black fade:A black fade is added between the different events.
Begin group with date/time below thru black:A black fade is added between the
different events.A title is also faded in with a suitable duration, e.g. 1st/2nd/3rd day,
provided the events take place over multiple days.
Begin group with date/time below picture:A black fade is added between the
different events.A title is also faded in with a suitable duration after the black fade, e.g.
1st/2nd/3rd day, provided the events take place over multiple days.
Background music
Specify if and which music should be used for the background here.
Use background music: Adds background music.
Load file(s): A file selection dialog will open to choose a folder featuring music; select
one or multiple files.
Remove: The selected pieces of music are removed from the list and will not be used.
Special functions and wizards
Insert random: MAGIX Video Pro X5 selects random pieces of music from the folder
"Import -> My Media -> Slideshow music" in the Media Pool.
Preview: This button previews the selected piece of music.
Volume ratio: This slider controls the volume ratio between the original sound and
the background music.
Tip: Music objects, located on the 5th track will be listed and used together with
audio objects for background music.
269
270
Produce panorama pictures
This special function may be selected for highlighted photos under "Effects > Video
object effects > Create panorama". Using it, you can combine several photos into a
wide panorama photo. You don't need to create exclusively "proper" panoramas; Let
your imagination run wild and put together anything you want to.
Tip: Optimize you photos beforehand, so that the transitions are not to be seen in
the finished panorama.
Select pictures for panorama
Load all necessary images into the film project as usual. The images that should make
up the panorama should be selected one after the other while holding down the
"Shift" key. Select the entry "Create panorama" from the context menu "Effects" (view
page 292) > "Video object effects".
Invert image sequence for panorama image
Sometimes photos are accidentally loaded in the wrong sequence. To sort the photos
properly, click on the "Invert sequence" button.
Calculating the panorama image
If you click on "Create" the panorama image will be processed. Depending on the
resolution and number of original images this may take some time. The original
photos are replaced in your slideshow with the panorama image in the movie. The
original files on your hard disk are not affected.
Special functions and wizards
Note: You can use up to six images to create a panorama image. Click on "More
options", to find out more about the upgrade.
Finished panorama (2 images)
Finished panorama from 2 images
Batch conversion
Batch conversion makes it is possible to convert multiple video files, movies, objects,
or whole projects into another format in just one step.
Open batch conversion
Batch conversion can be opened using different presets. A pre-selection appears only
if you have loaded a film or a project.
The following scenarios exist:
• Batch conversion has been opened from the context menu in the Media Pool: The
file selected in the Media Pool beforehand will be transferred to the task list and
can be converted to the available formats. In case of projects which contain
multiple movies, all movies will appear as individual tasks.
• Only one empty movie is open: A dialog opens additionally for batch conversion,
in which video files that have to be converted to other formats can be selected
and loaded.
• A movie with video material and more than one object in the first track is opened.
A dialog opens, in which you can select which tasks should be created for batch
conversion.
-
All scenes in the movie: All objects present in the 1st track will be used as
starting points for the video files to be exported. An application for this could
be that all scene beginnings of a movie should be exported as bitmap files or
a backup for a movie is to be created as individual scenes.
271
272
Multiple movies: The opened movie will be exported as a whole video.
Additional movies can be added to the list in the dialog.
• Multiple movies with video material are open: The opened movie will be exported
as a complete video. This is especially useful for large projects with a lot of
individual movies, eliminating the need to export each one individually.
-
Batch conversion dialog
Presets: Save and load your settings here. These include the list of files to be exported
and the export settings and names of all entries.
Caution! Batch conversion references the projects, movies, and the objects contained
therein directly. Keep in mind that when converting entire movies, the source material
must also be available. During conversion of individual objects from movies, you have
to make sure that the movie file has not been changed between loading and saving.
This is the list of all objects that have to be converted into the indicated format. Each
task can have its own export settings.
Add files (not during conversion of individual objects from movies): Manually add
files, including video files and projects.
Remove selected: The marked tasks will be removed from the list.
Special functions and wizards
Duplicate selected: If you would like to export tasks in multiple formats, you can
simply mark and duplicate them and assign individual export settings to them.
Format settings: These are settings for the currently selected tasks, and multiple tasks
can be given a setting simultaneously. Select one or more tasks from the task list.
Note on format setting for multiple tasks: If one of the marked tasks already has an
individual setting, its will be lost after another format is selected. To prevent this,
remove the selection for each task using Ctrl + mouse-click.
Set the target format in the flip menu. Windows Media Video format (*.wmv) is the
default.
Advanced settings: This opens the dialog for the advanced format settings. This
corresponds to the dialog for normal video export of a movie.
Tip: If you give several tasks the same file name, the files created will be documented
intelligently. For example, you can easily convert and simultaneously line up multiple
movies that belong together thematically.
Shut down computer after successful export: This option is especially useful when
you export long movies and are using an especially high-quality and resourcedemanding export format. You can leave the computer to work on the individual tasks
and after finishing them it will turn itself off.
Start batch conversion: Click on "Start conversion" to start the process. After ending
conversion processes, a list of all export processes with a message informing of its
success will appear.
Hint: During batch conversion, messages that appear during normal file import will be
for the most part suppressed. This is to enable the smoothest conversion of all tasks.
Therefore, please make sure that all files to be converted or the project can be easily
loaded before starting a batch conversion.
273
274
Blackmagic Design video cards
MAGIX Video Pro X5 supports the display and recording of screens and monitors that
are connected through certain Blackmagic Design video cards such as DeckLink and
Intensity.
Fullscreen preview monitor
The image from the video monitor will be displayed on an external monitor, which is
connected to the card output. Activate this in the "Program settings > Display options
> Video output to external device > Activate video output" and select the connected
device.
The display on the external monitor is dependent on the settings of the current movie
(resolution / frame rate / interlace properties). This makes a very precise preview of
the movie possible during editing.
Recording
These cards can also be used to record various signals, such as HDMI. Some DSLR
cameras output preview images through an HDMI. These images can be recorded
directly into a high-quality and editing-friendly format if the camera's internal image
compression is bypassed.
HDMI capture can also be useful for creating presentations with applications
requiring high computing power. An image from a PC with an HDMI out can be
recorded by a second PC with an HDMI in.
Special functions and wizards
Use movie templates
Use movie templates in order to tell a whole story using just a few mouse clicks.
You can open movie menus either in the start dialog or in an already open program in
Media Pool > Menu templates. Double-clicking on a menu template will open it in
Storyboard Mode.
Insert own material
You can add your own content everywhere you see a placeholder (indicated with an
arrow in the illustration). Drag the desired video from the Media Pool in front of the
placeholder, which it should replace. The placeholders' names indicated which type of
material should be inserted here (e.g. "Group recording").
If your video is too long for a placeholder, you will see a green bar in the mini timeline
below the video monitor. You can grab it using your mouse and move it in such a way
that just the right section of the video appears in the placeholder. If your inserted
video is too short, it will be rejected by MAGIX Video Pro X5.
275
276
Audio tracks of inserted material
Menu templates contain audio material. For this reason, the
audio track of the inserted audio material will be muted.
You can, however, switch it on again by clicking on the
speaker symbol in the preview image.
A speaker slide controller appears which lets you control
the volume of the original audio track of the inserted video
clip.
Design title
Click on the T symbol in the preview image to edit the title
included with the movie template.
You can enter your own text in the title editor (view page
120).
Menus
Menus
Certain menu items are not available on the "Record" and "Burn" screens. The menu
reference describes the full menu as found on the "Edit" screen.
File Menu
New project
Creates a new MAGIX Video Pro X5 project. A dialog with settings for a new
disc project or a new film (view page 245) opens to get started.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + N
Open
With this option you can load a project or a media file. Please note that all
media files associated with it must be loaded along with a project. MAGIX
Video Pro X5 will search for all used sounds and video files in the folders in
which they were located when the move was saved.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + O
Recently opened projects
Project that you have recently opened in MAGIX Video Pro X5 are listed and can
quickly be opened with a click.
Save project
The current disc project is saved with the name displayed in the project window.
If you have not specified a name for your project yet, a dialog will open for you to
do so.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + S
Save project as...
A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the video for saving.
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + S
Manage movies
New movie
Use this option to create a new movie for your recordings and imported files. Since a
film is normally already opened, you will have to decide whether the movie should be
inserted into the existing project or if a new project should be created.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + N
277
278
Delete movie
This option lets you remove the current movie from the project. However, it is still
available on the hard drive and can be loaded again at any time.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + F4
Attach movie
Using this function you can attach a movie to an opened one. This is then attached to
the end of the movie and automatically takes on the original movie's settings.
Import
Use this option to load a movie into your disc project. Please note that all media files
associated with it must be accessible. MAGIX Video Pro X5 will search for all used
sounds and video files in the folders in which they were located when the movie was
saved.
You can use the tabs to switch from one movie to another.
Export movie file
A dialog will open to enter a file name for the movie to be exported. The movie may
then be imported into other projects again.
Note: The movie file (*.mvd) includes all information about the media files used,
cuts, effects, and titles, but not about the image and sound material itself. This is
always contained in the recorded or imported media files, which remains unchanged
during editing with MAGIX Video Pro X5. In order to save a movie in its own folder,
e.g. for use on another PC, use the function "Copy film and media to folder (view
page 255)".
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + L
Export movie
This provides all export formats supported by MAGIX Video Pro X5 that aren't
covered by burning. Refer to "Exporting (view page 226)" for more information.
Project folder
Import media files into project folder
The files selected in the Media Pool will be imported into the project folder (view page
62).
Menus
Clean up project folder
Unused media files will be removed from the project file.
Note: This function applies to the entire project.
Record audio / images / video
A selection window will open to choose the desired recording type. This may also be
accessed via the "Audio or video recording" button in the transport controls.
Keyboard shortcut:
R
Import Audio CD track(s)
A CD track may be imported via drag & drop from the Media Pool just like a normal
file. If this convenient method fails for some reason, then this menu command may be
accessed via the CD manager to insert tracks from audio CDs directly into the
arrangement. More about this is available in the section "Import audio CD".
Scan image
Select scanner
The twain interface connects MAGIX Video Pro X5 with almost all current scanners
or digital cameras. Here's how to proceed the first time you scan via the twain
interface:
279
280
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install the twain software for the device.
Restart your computer.
Start MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Click on "File -> Twain scanner -> Select source", if the scanner works with 32bit software.
Click the device that you want to use in the dialog. This step will no longer be
necessary as long as the same device is used.
Start the scanning process
The scan window of your scan software will appear. Specify the resolution and color
depth in this window. Once the scan process is finished, the twain software will
normally switch off by itself – the scanned image file will be added to MAGIX Video
Pro X5 automatically. If the twain dialog remains open, you will be able to scan
multiple images in succession.
Import edit list (EDL)
Import cut lists in EDL format (view page 256) may be opened via this menu.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + D
Output to device
This command opens the dialog for exporting finished video or its soundtrack to
analog or digital VCR/camcorder or various mobile devices such as smartphones and
tablets.
Please read the chapter "Output audio/video".
Shortcut: H
Batch conversion
This menu item accesses the batch processing (view page 271) function. This quickly
and efficiently converts multiple files, movies, or projects into various video formats.
Keyboard shortcut:
S
Burn CD/DVD
Manually compile files
Opens MAGIX Speed burnR to burn videos or other files onto CD/DVD. File selection
is done via drag & drop from MAGIX Speed burnR's Explorer.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + B
Menus
Copy CD/DVD direct
The dialog provides several options for creating a copy:
• Copy: Here you can directly copy a non copy-protected CD or DVD.
• Shrink: Compresses a DVD to the size of a regular single layer DVD+/-R/RW. All
files of the original DVD have to be on the hard drive.
• Analog copy: Copies your video onto a disc via analog recording.
Read more about this in the chapter "Record (view page 68)".
Burn an already created (S)VCD/Video DVD
All necessary files, menus, and encoded video files needed to burn a CD/DVD will be
temporarily stored on your hard drive. After your disc is burned, these are not
automatically deleted. Using "Disc image" multi-copy, you can uses these images to
burn as many discs as you would like without having to encode the files again.
In the dialog, choose the image you want. All necessary files are then transferred to
the MAGIX Speed burnR burning tool.
For more information on using MAGIX Speed burnR, read the program's help file.
Online
This is a list of menu entries regarding all of the services that are available directly
from within MAGIX Video Pro X5.
MAGIX Online Album / Catooh
Note: For more information about MAGIX Online World please read here „Share“
(view page 322).
Export to magix.info
This command allows you to export your movie to magix.info.
First, export your project in one of the following formats: asf, mov, mpg, mpeg, mp4,
wmv, 3gp, or avi. Next, access "File -> Internet -> magix.info -> Present videos on
magix.info" to reach a page where you can upload your video. You may need to
register with magix.info.
Online login details
In this dialog, you can save your login information (login and password) for MAGIX
Online Album and all other MAGIX Online World as well as for Catooh, making it
unnecessary to login each time you access MAGIX Online World.
281
282
The saved data are valid for all other MAGIX programs for the corresponding
computer user.
Youtube / Vimeo / Facebook
This is the direct connection between MAGIX and various communities such as
YouTube and Vimeo.
Youtube / Facebook
Uploads the current film to the selected portal or to the selected community. Enter
the data for video into the fields provided, so that the search function for this portal
can also find this video.
MAGIX Video Pro X5 partially uses the H.264 format for this, which is a component
of the MPEG-4 codec. Since Flash supports this format directly and most
communities and portals use the format, the film does not need to be re-rendered on
the corresponding server. This avoids loss of quality.
When HD material is uploaded, a resolution of 720p is used for the HD format.
Upload all selected media in Media Pool
Uploads the media selected in the Media Pool to the corresponding portal or the
selective community.
Backup copy
Files must be saved to be able to be easily retrieved in case of a hard drive crash or
some other error.
For detailed information, read the Backup (view page 255) section in the "Video
project management" chapter.
Load backup project
This option loads an automatically created slideshow backup. This type of automatic
backup gets the file extension MV_ (underscore). This command is only intended for
use in emergencies, for example, if you unintentionally saved your change and wish to
return to the previous version of the movie.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + O
Menus
Clean-up wizard
The clean-up wizard helps delete projects from the hard drive, including all of the
media files used. Use this function to free up disk space for future projects.
Caution: If the files you used in the movie have also been used in other movies (like
trailers, opening music, etc.), then you should make backup copies of these files
beforehand.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + Y
For detailed information, read the clean-up wizard (view page 257) section in the
"Video project management" chapter.
Settings
Movie settings
Opens the movie settings of the currently selected movie.
Program...
Opens program settings.
Shortcut:
Y
Keyboard shortcuts...
This menu entry opens a dialog for editing keyboard shortcuts (view page 333); this
enables you to adjust MAGIX Video Pro X5 however you like.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + U
Preview rendering
This menu opens the dialog for the preview rendering (view page 253) settings
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + R
Reset Program Settings to Default...
Use this function to reset all program settings you made in MAGIX Video Pro X5 to
their original settings.
Exit
Closes MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + F4
283
284
Edit Menu
Undo
With this command you can undo the last changes you made. This way, it's no
problem if you want to try out critical operations. If you don't like the result,
then you can always revert to the previous state by using "Undo".
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until now,
allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings. In
general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Z
Redo
This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until now,
allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings. In
general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + Y
Empty undo and cache memory
Using this function, you can empty undo and cache memory in order to be better able
to conduct memory-intense processes such as exporting
Cut objects
This function extracts the marked scene and copies it to the clipboard. You
can then use the "Paste" command to copy it into any movie.
Copy objects
This function copies the selected scene (or the selected object in the Timeline
mode) to the clipboard. You can then use the "Paste" command to place it into
any movie.
Menus
Paste objects
This command inserts the clipboard material (photo or object) at the current
position of the start marker.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + V
Duplicate objects
This command duplicates all selected objects. The copies appear beside the original
and can be placed in the correct position using drag & drop.
Keyboard shortcut:
D
Delete items
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected object in the Timeline
mode).
Keyboard shortcut:
Del
Select all objects
All objects in the arrangement will be selected.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + A
Cut
Editing functions are also accessible using the toolbar. The last selected function will
appear in the toolbar as a button.
Split scene
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker is
positioned. This way, two free-standing objects are created.
Keyboard shortcut:
T
Remove scene start
This command cuts a scene at the point where the start marker is positioned,
and deletes all material that precedes the start position simultaneously.
Keyboard shortcut:
Z
285
286
Remove scene end
This command cuts a scene at the point where the start marker is positioned,
and deletes all material behind the start position simultaneously.
Keyboard shortcut:
U
Remove scene
If you want to cut a scene out of a movie retroactively, this option
automatically moves all objects, titles, and transitions on all tracks forwards
so that no gaps result.
Objects on other tracks which project into the area of the selected scene will not be
moved automatically; they will remain at the current position.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Del
Split movie
This command divides the movie into two individual movies at the position of
the playback marker.
The current arranger retains the portion that is located in front of the playback marker.
The latter part will be removed from the current arranger and placed as a new film.
You can find this movie by going to the "Window" menu.
Shortcut: Alt + Y
Musical cut adjustment
If you have edited your background music with the beat detection wizard and a
musical tempo was provided, then you can adjust the cuts to change automatically in
time with the beat using this command. All of the cuts (even transitions) will be
moved to correspond with quarter note positions.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + H
Range
MAGIX Video Pro X5 provides object-based functions as well as "band-oriented"
editing functions. These always refer to the whole arrangement from the first to the
last track as well as to the area between the start and end marker.
Cut
The section between the in and out points is cut from the current arrangement and
placed on the clipboard. It can, for example, be pasted in again at a different position.
Shortcut: Alt + X, Shift + Del
Menus
Copy
The section between the in and out points is copied from the current arrangement to
the clipboard. If can be pasted back at another location.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + C
Delete
The section between the in and out points is deleted from the current arrangement
and not copied to the clipboard.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + Del
Insert
The contents of the clipboard are inserted at the current arrangement's position of the
in point.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + V
Extract
The section between the in and out points is preserved, and all of the material in front
and behind it are deleted. Use this option to isolate a specific part of an arrangement
for further individual editing.
Shortcut: Shift + X
Insert blank space
An empty section the length of the period between the in and out point will be added
to the first track. The objects following this will be moved.
Keyboard shortcut:
C
Group objects
All selected objects are assigned to a group which may then be selected and
edited jointly by clicking the mouse.
Shortcut:
G
Ungroup objects
This command splits an object group into separate objects.
Shortcut:
Shift + G
287
288
Wizards
Slideshow Maker
Opens the Slideshow Maker (view page 265)
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + M
Soundtrack Maker
This command opens MAGIX Soundtrack Maker (view page 264).
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + S
Travel route animation
This menu entry opens the separate Travel route animation program. This enables
simple creation of animated travel routes with the help of online maps.
Note: In order to be able to use current map data, maps are fetched by Travel route
animation directly from the Internet. This requires an active Internet connection.
Audio mixdown
This option joins all audio objects in one audio file. Afterwards, the audio material will
only occupy one track and take up hardly any RAM (does however take up space on
the hard drive [ca. 10 MB/min in stereo]). This way you get a clear overview of
further objects and space for them.
MAGIX Video Pro X5 automatically normalizes the audio file, i.e. the loudest part of
the wave audio object is identical with the highest figure of the 16-bit resolution
ceiling. This guarantees the same sound quality, even if you repeat the mix down
procedure or you combine the mix down file with other wave audio objects again and
again. The mix down function is very helpful if you want to go on using the mix down
object.
Tip: Instead of using the mixdown function, use the various options found in the
"Export movie" submenu of the "File" to create the final *.avi or *.wav (or another
multimedia) file.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + D
Audio and video mixdown
In addition to the "Combine audio" function (see above), all video objects including
effects, fades, and edits are combined in a single MAGIX video file (view page 228). If
your computer starts to approach its limits, this enables you to free resources for
further editing.
Menus
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + M
Start preview rendering
You can render a pre-defined area for the preview or automatically search the
material for critical areas. See "Preview rendering".
Shortcut: Ctrl + R
Remove areas for preview rendering
All rendered previews will be discarded; the video material will be rendered again via
the arrangement in real time and played back.
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to
particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is
called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed
out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions
where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title
should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
• With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If
in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap
point will be moved.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point":
Ctrl + P
Marker
Set project marker
This option places a project marker at the current playback position. More information
about project markers is available in the chapter "Markers" under "Set project marker
(view page 108)".
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Enter
Delete project marker
Deletes the selected project marker (view page 108). Project markers can be deleted
and renamed via the context menu.
289
290
Set chapter markers
Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This creates a
chapter entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being burned to disc.
You can rename the chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename". The
new name will appear in the chapter menu (view page 203).
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + Enter
Set chapter markers automatically
This option automatically sets chapter markers in the arrangement according to
specific rules that will then appear in the film menu of a disc as chapters. This is useful
if a disc should be burned immediately after recording.
There is a selection of options available for automatic chapter generation:
At beginning of movie: The movie only contains one chapter in this case.
At beginning of object in track: Every object in a track creates a chapter; track 1 is
preset.
At position of existing title objects: Subtitles, for instance, as faded-in subheadings,
give the position of the chapter markers.
Menus
Specified interval (minutes)/Specified amount: If the chapters are separated without
any particular method and are just needed for quicker navigation, chapter markers
may also be inserted in pre-defined intervals or as a pre-defined number of chapter
markers.
Naming of chapter markers: To title the chapter markers, a user-defined name
featuring consecutive numbers or the object name or text from the text objects may
be used.
Optionally, existing chapter markers may be deleted and the automatic chapter
marker function may be limited to the area between the start and end markers.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + Shift + Enter
Delete chapter markers/delete all chapter markers
Delete one or all chapter markers. This removes chapter entries in the disc menu if the
film is burned to disc.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + Enter
Marker -> Set range start/end
Sets a range start/end marker at the position of the playback marker.
Keyboard shortcut:
I/O
Marker -> Jump to range start/end
Sets the playback marker at the position of the range start/end.
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + I/O
Range above blank space
The start and end of the range in the film will be set to the respective borders of the
empty space that is clicked on.
Keyboard shortcut:
X
Marker -> Reset selected range
Deletes the range start and the range end.
Move screen view
Using these commands, a viewable portion together with the start marker will be
moved in the timeline. You can quickly skip between different markers (skip, chapter,
scene, ad-marker) and object edges.
291
292
Keyboard shortcut:
See "Keyboard shortcuts", "Arranger". (view page 328)
Search for gaps
MAGIX Video Pro X5 enables you to locate gaps between objects where no image
material is located. This hinders unintentional black spots from appearing. This option
is located under "Edit -> Find gaps". A corresponding dialog opens.
Optimize view: Zooms to the selected gap.
Mark gap as range: Spans a section over the selected gap.
Edit selected gaps: The selected settings are applied but no additional action is taken.
Keyboard Shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + C
Multicam
This command switches to Multicam mode.
Mute audio tracks (Multicam)
As soon as you switch into multicam mode, all audio files in the source tracks will be
muted. You will hear only the audio track of the final movie.
If you would like to deactivate this function, uncheck the box. You can now mute
audio tracks one by one in the track boxes.
Effects Menu
Master effects
This menu item accesses the movie's effect settings (view page 161). The settings
affected here apply to the entire movie.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + H
Video object effects
Scene recognition
Calls up the automatic scene recognition, which "cuts up" longer videos into scenes
for storage in the "Takes" directory.
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + Z
Image stabilization
Opens the image stabilization dialog to correct "wobbly" recordings. Read more about
this in the chapter "Image stabilization (view page 159)".
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + L
Menus
Edit in external editor
Graphics files (BMPs or JPEGs) may be edited retroactively with an external graphics
program from the arranger. The selected image file will be loaded automatically and
used in MAGIX Video Pro X5 in place of the original material automatically. MAGIX
Video Pro X5 includes the high-performance image editing program "MAGIX Photo
Designer" for this purpose.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + Shift + D
Save photos with effects
This allows you to save photos used in the movie and add the object effects used in
MAGIX Video Pro X5 (e.g. StoryMaker) to the photo.
Create panorama...
Opens the dialog for setting a panorama. Place as many photos in the correct order as
you like, and align brightness and color settings to get the best results. You should
make sure that the photos harmonize at the transitions.
Video effects
Here you can find adjustable effects for video and photo objects. The effects can be
set only after selecting an object in the respective effects dialog. For more
information, go to the "Video effects in the Media Pool" (view page 128) section in the
"Effects" chapter.
Movement effects
These are movement effects you can use to animate the frame by using zoom or
camera movements. For more information go to the "Effects" chapter, section
"Movement effects in Media Pool" (view page 137).
Movement effect templates
These are templates for movement effects. These can be added from the Media Pool
into the arrangement by double-clicking or via drag & drop.
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read the "Video effects"
chapter for more details.
Stereo3D
This accesses the program's Stereo 3D functionality. Please read the corresponding
chapter "Stereo 3D". (view page 163)
293
294
Background design
Select a color, a picture, or any video on your hard disk which you would like to serve
as the background for the photo displayed. This function is especially useful when
photos have black bars around them, or if they are reduced in size.
Reset background
Resets the background design (view page 294) settings to default settings.
Set as background
Uses the selected photo or video as the background.
Load video effects
This command enables a saved effects combination to be loaded for the currently
loaded object. If multiple objects are selected, then the effects combination will be
applied to each selected object.
Shortcut:
Alt + Shift + O
Save video effects
This command saves the current effects combination for each object separately.
Shortcut:
Alt + Shift + S
Reset video effects
This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects. The material will be
reset to the state it was in before you applied the effect.
Shortcut:
Alt + Shift + H
Copy video effects
Effects settings for an object may be copied to the clipboard to add (view page 294)
them to other objects.
Keyboard shortcut:
-
Insert video effects
Video effects may be inserted into the selected object from other objects. The
settings must be copied (view page 294) beforehand into the clipboard.
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + -
Apply video effects to all
The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in your movie.
Menus
Apply video effects to all of the following
The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in your movie
which lie behind the selected object.
Audio object effects
Normalize
The function "Normalize" raises the level of an audio object to the maximum possible
level without clipping the material. This searches for the largest signal peak in the
audio material and raises the level of the object so that this position matches exactly
0 dB (maximum overdrive).
Shortcut:
Alt + N
Automatic track damping
Please see Reduce volume (view page 173) in the audio effects chapter.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + L
Set volume
This function, located in both the effects menu and the context menu, controls the
sound volume for individual objects, just like the object handles in the arranger.
Audio cleaning
Opens the "Audio Cleaning (More information can be found in the section "Sound
optimization" on page 174)" dialog.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + A
Echo/Hall
Please see "Reverb/Echo" in the chapter "Audio effects".
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + H
Timestretch/resample
Read more about this in Timestretch/resample.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Q
Load audio effects
This command enables a saved effects combination to be loaded for the currently
loaded object. If multiple objects are selected, then the effects combination will be
applied to each selected object.
295
296
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + +
Save audio effects
This command saves the current effects combination for each object separately.
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + +
Reset audio effects
This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects entirely if you want to
undo the changes.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Alt + +
BPM Wizard
Read the section concerning the Tempo and beat recognition in the chapter "Audio"
for more about this.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + Shift + K
Edit wave files externally
This opens the audio track or audio object in the included audio editor MAGIX Music
Editor.
Volume curve
The most important effect, the volume, is available here directly. The volume is also
available via the Media Pool under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General (view page
143)", where it may also be animated.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + V
Title Effects
Title Editor
Opens the Title editor for the selected photo, video, or title object.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + T
Load title template
Use this command to load previously saved title effects for the current object.
Shortcut:
Alt + Shift + T
Menus
Save title template
You can save the current effect combination for each title object separately and apply
it to other title objects later.
Shortcut: Alt + T
Design elements
Picture-in-picture: Here you will find various presets for picture nestling.
Collages: work similarly to regular picture-in-picture effects, but employ multiple
objects. Depending on the collage, arrange the selected objects one after the other
and drag the collage onto the first object.
Test images: Professional test images for calibrating your system are included.
Backgrounds: Here you can find static and animated photo and video backgrounds.
Video backgrounds are capable of being looped, meaning that their length can be
extended by duplication. The special "User" template opens a color selection dialog
where you can choose the desired color.
Image objects: Here you will find various image objects such as black bars, thought
bubbles for cartoons and others.
You can find additional information in "Effects" chapter, in the section "Design
element in Media Pool".
Effects library
Using these menu choices, you can control the corresponding directories in the Media
Pool.
297
298
Windows Menu
Window arrangement
Switch between the classic Movie Edit Pro screen with a single monitor or the normal
MAGIX Video Pro X5 view. More information can be found in the chapter "Notes for
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro users (view page 18)".
Movie Edit Pro and Video Pro X each have default window arrangements. However,
you can save any other arrangement and combination of visible windows. You can
then easily switch between them using menus. Us the "Save..." menu..
At the top you can select a
name for the window
arrangement.
In "Media Pool" you can
additionally determine whether
selected tabs (main
navigation) and sections
(subnavigation) should also be
saved.
Keyboard shortcuts F10, F11 and F12 are automatically assigned to the first three
window arrangements; by going to "File" > "Settings" > "Shortcuts..." every other
arrangement can be assigned a keyboard shortcut (view page 333).
Each user-defined window arrangement can also be deleted. You can select the
arrangement to be deleted in the dialog found under "Window arrangement" .
"Delete" and then press the "Delete" button.
Edit mode
In MAGIX Video Pro X5 you have a choice of 2 Editing modes (view page 35): the
simplified Basic mode (view page 37) and the Standard mode (view page 36).
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make fine adjustments
to the position of the selected video or image objects and their handles – as well as
the transition characteristics (transition type, length). Please read the "Fine
adjustment of video ("Trimming")" chapter for more details.
Keyboard shortcut:
N
Menus
Object trimmer
Shows or hides the trim window. This enables the position of the selected video or
image object and its handles to be adjusted more finely. Read the chapter "Adjusting
videos precisely" ("Trimming").
Shortcut:
Shift + N
Mixer
With this option you can open and close the real-time mixer. Further information can
be found in the Mixer (view page 190) chapter.
Shortcut:
M
Master audio effect rack
Opens or closes the master effects rack; you can also use the "Master FX" button in
the mixer window for this.
Shortcut:
B
Mastering Suite
This opens the Mastering Suite (view page 183).
Program monitor
Hides or shows the program monitor.
Shortcut:
Shift + V
Source monitor
The source monitor provides an opportunity to preview and edit files in the Media
Pool, and these can in turn be dragged into the project folder or the arrangement from
the source monitor.
For the exact options for cutting in the source monitor, please see the chapter
"Section markers in the source monitor (view page 109)".
Media Pool
With this option you can hide the Media Pool or make it visible again.
Shortcut:
F
Project
Shows/Hides the arranger
299
300
Project folder
Hides or shows the project folder.
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + B
Activate next window
You can switch between the various program windows (screen areas) back and forth.
Show movie overview
With this option, you can display an overview of the entire arrangement on the video
screen. It is particularly suitable for long and complex arrangements to prevent you
from losing track. You can view the whole movie and you are, despite this, able to
access the object you're looking for in a split second – you can zoom in directly on the
video monitor or move around the clip displayed in the arranger.
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + A
Optimize movie view
The zoom level is set to 100% so that you can see every object and the entire
film.
The start and end markers are set to the beginning or end, so that the entire movie
can be played.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + F
Zoom horizontal
Here you will find a range of functions for altering the visible time axis section.
Zoom vertical
The number of simultaneously visible tracks can be changed here. The more tracks
are visible, the smaller they will appear.
Remove all movies from project
All movies are removed from the open project.
If you want to use these movies with the current changes such as effects and titles
again, export these movies first via "File > Manage movie > Export". This saves the
movie's editing state, but not the original material. If you were to delete the source
material, the editing state won't be restored.
Menus
Help Menu
Help
This command is available for almost every feature of the program, and it opens the
"Help" file for the corresponding topic. Use this command to get help on any of
MAGIX Video Pro X5's functions.
Keyboard shortcut:
F1
Context help
The mouse cursor will turn into an arrow with a question mark.
Click on any button of the main screen, to open program help which will describe the
control element in question.
Shortcut:
Alt + F1
PDF manual
Opens the manual in PDF format. Similar to the Help feature that can be accessed by
pressing F1, this manual contains all of the important information about the program.
Display tooltips
Tooltips are small information windows that open up automatically if the mouse
pointer stops briefly on a button or some other area. They provide information about
the function of the button. These information boxes can be switched on or off with
this option.
Open magix.info
Directly from within the program you'll be able to access magix.info, the Multimedia
Community from MAGIX. You'll find answers to all the most frequently asked
questions about MAGIX products and multimedia in general. Were you unable to find
a solution to your particular problem? No problem, just ask the question yourself.
Online tutorials
Interesting tutorials and useful tips for working with MAGIX Video Pro X5 can be
found on the MAGIX website.
An online connection is required.
Register online
This option opens the MAGIX homepage for online registration where you can
register as a MAGIX user.
301
302
Registration grants you access to the MAGIX support website
http://support.magix.net where various program updates and help programs can be
downloaded.
With the registration form supplied (start menu under MAGIX Video Pro X5 ->
Service and Support -> Register) you can register by post or fax. Simply print it out, fill
it in, and send it off!
Online Update
Connects directly to the online update page where you can get the latest version of
your program.
Download video effects plug-ins
This command lets you download new video effects plug-ins.
About MAGIX Video Pro X5
Displays copyright info and version number of MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Context menu (right click)
Context menu (right click)
Context menu can be reached by right clicking on a selected object. It offers functions
which are available and can be expected in the given context.
Video objects
Audio functions
Create wave form
In most cases, the waveform display of an audio file will not be required. However, if
you require this, e.g. to navigate while cutting video, a waveform display can be
produced manually via this function.
Video/audio on one track
Video material and the corresponding audio material (original sound) will be
displayed as one object on one track. Using the top object handle you can adjust the
video's opacity. The lower object handle adjusts the object's volume.
Video/audio in separate tracks
Audio material will be displayed on a separate track below the corresponding video
material. This makes it easier to make advanced adjustments to audio material that go
beyond changing the soundtrack's volume.
Remove audio object
When you no longer need the audio object, remove it.
If you decide that you need the original sound after all, you can "Restore audio object".
Create frame table (new)
Sometimes, rebuilding a frame table can get rid of problems in certain MPEG files. For
example, such problems can be present if the navigation (positioning of the playback
marker, transport) is bumpy or doesn't function at all.
Normally, when loading MPEG video, a frame table is not created in order to speed up
the loading process. If you do create one anyway, MPEG files are normally noticeably
faster and easier to edit.
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make fine adjustments
to the position of the selected video or image objects and their handles – as well as
the transition characteristics (transition type, length). Please read the "Fine
adjustment of video ("Trimming")" chapter for more details.
303
304
Keyboard shortcut:
N
Object trimmer
Shows or hides the trim window. This enables the position of the selected video or
image object and its handles to be adjusted more finely. Read the chapter "Adjusting
videos precisely" ("Trimming").
Keyboard shortcut:
Shift + N
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to
particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is
called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed
out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions
where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title
should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
• With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If
in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap
point will be moved.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point":
Ctrl + P
Create still frame
MAGIX Video Pro X5 can create a still frame of an object at the position of the start
marker.
Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the "Video effects"
chapter.
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a
movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 157)".
Context menu (right click)
Interpolation for interlace material
Choose this option to remove interlace artifacts from your video image. If, for
instance, you extract freeze frames from a video, ridge structures appear in sequences
which feature movement.
Anti-flicker filter
Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and high contrast. This
filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.
Border cropping adjustment:
Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your television. Values
stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 162)" ("Effects" menu) will be applied.
Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.
Insert objects into the project folder
Every single object can be added to the project folder and used again later. All of the
object's properties will be maintained. This is useful, for example, if the video material
should be edited beforehand and then arranged in the next step.
Fade in date as title
MAGIX Video Pro X5 is also able to insert the time and date into the image material.
To do this, select the option "Show date as title" in the video object's context menu.
If a DV-AVI file is involved (e.g. a digital recording from a camcorder), then the
recording date for the selected position will be used. If another type of file is involved,
then the creation date of the file will be used as the timecode. Following this, the title
editor will appear to adjust the information.
The context menu of the program monitor also features the option "Show playing
time". This also creates a timecode.
305
306
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as
file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor also defines the
foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on
the type of object, the elements displayed will vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio for the
object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information is also
displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video
material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Video Pro X5 automatically makes suitable
settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video footage. If playback
of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or if some effects do not look
how they should, you can reverse the source material frames.
Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing" does not
have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and passed to the encoder
when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Video Pro X5 will perform high-quality
interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source
material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 359).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen motion
during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or halved
here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they will
appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the object.
Context menu (right click)
Image objects
Change photo length
This dialog gives exact values regarding the display duration for the selected photo.
You may select multiple photos beforehand to change their display duration at once.
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to
particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is
called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed
out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions
where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title
should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
• With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If
in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap
point will be moved.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point":
Ctrl + P
Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the "Video effects"
chapter.
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read the "Video effects"
chapter for more details.
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a
movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 157)".
Cut automatically to fit screen
This function ensures that images don't have black edges (in case they don't fit into
the given format).
307
308
Anti-flicker filter
Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and high contrast. This
filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.
Border cropping adjustment:
Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your television. Values
stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 162)" ("Effects" menu) will be applied.
Export to MAGIX Online Album
Log in to the MAGIX Online Album service and load images and music into the album
to share them with your friends and acquaintances in the Internet. The assistant will
lead you step-by-step through the uploading process. After the process is finished,
you can access your updated MAGIX Online Album.
Export to MAGIX Online Print Service
Use MAGIX Online Print Service to order high-quality photo prints or fantastic printed
photo gifts of your valuable digital photos simply with one click.
Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.
Insert objects into the project folder
Every single object can be added to the project folder and used again later. All of the
object's properties will be maintained. This is useful, for example, if the video material
should be edited beforehand and then arranged in the next step.
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as
file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor also defines the
foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on
the type of object, the elements displayed will vary.
Context menu (right click)
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio for the
object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information is also
displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video
material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Video Pro X5 automatically makes suitable
settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video footage. If playback
of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or if some effects do not look
how they should, you can reverse the source material frames.
Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing" does not
have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and passed to the encoder
when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Video Pro X5 will perform high-quality
interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source
material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 359).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen motion
during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or halved
here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they will
appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the object.
309
310
Transitions
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make fine adjustments
to the position of the selected video or image objects and their handles – as well as
the transition characteristics (transition type, length). Please read the "Fine
adjustment of video ("Trimming")" chapter for more details.
Keyboard shortcut:
N
Audio objects
The options in the context menu for audio objects correspond to the menu options
"Effects" > "Audio effects" and the "Edit" menu with the following exceptions:
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to
particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is
called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed
out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions
where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title
should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
• With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If
in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap
point will be moved.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point":
Ctrl + P
BPM Wizard
Read the section concerning the Tempo and beat recognition in the chapter "Audio"
for more about this.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + Shift + K
Insert objects into the project folder
Every single object can be added to the project folder and used again later. All of the
object's properties will be maintained. This is useful, for example, if the video material
should be edited beforehand and then arranged in the next step.
Context menu (right click)
Edit wave files externally
Audio files from the arranger can be post-edited in an external wave editor program.
The selected audio file is loaded automatically and, once editing has been completed,
is used in the MAGIX Video Pro X5 instead of the original material. For this purpose,
MAGIX Video Pro X5 comes with a powerful audio editing tool: MAGIX Music Editor.
Keyboard shortcut:
Alt + Z
Volume curve
The most important effect, the volume, is available here directly. The volume is also
available via the Media Pool under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General (view page
143)", where it may also be animated.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + Shift + V
Audio effects curves
This feature provides direct access to diverse object effects, and these can be
automated using a curve. All of the audio effects listed here are found in the Media
Pool under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General".
Align other audio objects with this track
Video objects grouped with audio objects may be used to synchronize recordings
from different camera perspectives.
For more information, please see the topic "Synchronize video objects using the audio
track (view page 116)".
Split stereo objects into mono objects
An audio object in stereo format can be split into two mono objects very easily using
this function. The original track will then feature the audio object with the left channel,
and an automatically added track will feature the object with the right channel.
This is useful if the channels were switched by accident during recording, i.e. due to
incorrect cabling. In this case, simply open the mixer and set the pan setting to the
correct position for each channel.
Display track curves
The most recently selected track curve is displayed on the object for editing. Use of a
curve causes the parameters set in the mixer to be disregarded.
Note: The track curves of audio objects can be animated in the same way as video
effects. Read more about this in the chapter "Animating objects (view page 147)".
311
312
Reset track curves
All track curves can be reset with this function. The settings made in the mixer will be
applied to the track again.
Caution! Before applying this function, make sure none of the track curves will be
need in the future.
Export to MAGIX Online Album
Log in to the MAGIX Online Album service and load images and music into the album
to share them with your friends and acquaintances in the Internet. The assistant will
lead you step-by-step through the uploading process. After the process is finished,
you can access your updated MAGIX Online Album.
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as
file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor also defines the
foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on
the type of object, the elements displayed will vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio for the
object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information is also
displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video
material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Video Pro X5 automatically makes suitable
settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video footage. If playback
of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or if some effects do not look
how they should, you can reverse the source material frames.
Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing" does not
have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and passed to the encoder
when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Video Pro X5 will perform high-quality
interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source
material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 359).
Context menu (right click)
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen motion
during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or halved
here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they will
appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the object.
Text objects
Title Editor
Opens the Title editor for the selected photo, video, or title object.
Keyboard shortcut:
Ctrl + T
Disable effects
All effects applied to the text will be deactivated.
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to
particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is
called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed
out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions
where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title
should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
• With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If
in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap
point will be moved.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point":
Ctrl + P
Load title template
A dialog for loading a title template will open.
313
314
Save as title template
This allows you to create your own templates using your title creations. The function
"Load title template" enables these templates to be used again quickly.
Save as special effect
This function saves the title with all objects that have been grouped (view page 287)
with the title object. This enables you to create title templates that contain all required
overlay objects.
Convert to 3D title
The title object will now be turned into a MAGIX 3D Maker object, and a limited
version of MAGIX 3D Maker will open.
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a
movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 157)".
Border cropping adjustment:
Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your television. Values
stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 162)" ("Effects" menu) will be applied.
Insert objects into the project folder
Every single object can be added to the project folder and used again later. All of the
object's properties will be maintained. This is useful, for example, if the video material
should be edited beforehand and then arranged in the next step.
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as
file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor also defines the
foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on
the type of object, the elements displayed will vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio for the
object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information is also
displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
Context menu (right click)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video
material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Video Pro X5 automatically makes suitable
settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video footage. If playback
of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or if some effects do not look
how they should, you can reverse the source material frames.
Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing" does not
have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and passed to the encoder
when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Video Pro X5 will perform high-quality
interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source
material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 359).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen motion
during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or halved
here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they will
appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the object.
MAGIX 3D Maker objects
Edit settings...
A limited MAGIX 3D Maker version is opened to edit the selected object.
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to
particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is
called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed
out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions
where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title
should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
• To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the
position where you would like the snap point to be.
315
316
• With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit
snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If
in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap
point will be moved.
• "Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point":
Ctrl + P
Create still frame
MAGIX Video Pro X5 can create a still frame of an object at the position of the start
marker.
Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the "Video effects"
chapter.
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read the "Video effects"
chapter for more details.
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a
movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 157)".
Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.
Insert objects into the project folder
Every single object can be added to the project folder and used again later. All of the
object's properties will be maintained. This is useful, for example, if the video material
should be edited beforehand and then arranged in the next step.
Context menu (right click)
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as
file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor also defines the
foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on
the type of object, the elements displayed will vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio for the
object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information is also
displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video
material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Video Pro X5 automatically makes suitable
settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video footage. If playback
of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or if some effects do not look
how they should, you can reverse the source material frames.
Deinterlace options: Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing" does not
have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and passed to the encoder
when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Video Pro X5 will perform high-quality
interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source
material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 359).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen motion
during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or halved
here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they will
appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the object.
317
318
Project folder
Rename
This command allows you to rename an object in the project folder. The name is also
used as a file name if you save the object as a take (*.tk2).
Save
This command enables an entry in the project folder (object or object group) to be
saved as a take file (*.tk2). More about this is available in the chapter "Objects" under
the section "Saving objects separately".
Delete
Removes the object from the project folder. The associated source file (photo, video,
audio, etc.) will not be deleted.
Properties
Displays the properties of the object (view page 306) in the project folder.
Insert movie
Inserts the selected object into the movie.
Open in video monitor.
Displays the selected object in the source monitor.
Track
This menu opens by right clicking on an empty range in the track.
Paste objects
Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the click position.
Range above blank space
The start and end of the range in the film will be set to the respective borders of the
empty space that is clicked on.
Keyboard shortcut:
X
Display track curves
This option hides or shows track curves for the corresponding track. Track curves are
only available fro the volume and panorama of an audio track. These result if these are
Context menu (right click)
automated via the mixer. Read more about this in the chapter "Audio tracks (view
page 192)".
Shortcut:
Alt + -
Reset track curves
The volume and balance track curves are reset; the automation for the corresponding
mixer settings (view page 192) is removed.
319
320
Problems and solutions
File will not load
If files cannot be loaded, this means that the format is either not supported by MAGIX
Video Pro X5, or the corresponding codec must be activated first. Read the section
"Import formats (view page 17)" for more information.
In case of AVI files, it is possible that the necessary codec in not installed. For more,
please refer to "General tips for AVI videos (view page 337)" in the appendix "Digital
video and storage devices".
Choppy or uneven playback
Don't panic if the picture on your screen is choppy or uneven. The finished product
will look perfect and play smoothly. Don't forget that MAGIX Video Pro X5 calculates
all effects in real time. This lets you see for yourself what sort of influence each of the
effects will have on your video footage. Some effects make even today's highperformance PCs work quite hard, and often, a steady, continuous video stream is
simply not possible on your PC. The final product, free from previous choppiness, is
only available after rendering it to DVD or exporting it. For that reason, you should
first edit the movie in its raw version without effects. The preview generally delivers a
steady picture, allowing you to work quickly and quietly. Towards the end, you can
add effects to your movies to give them a special touch of Hollywood!
Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto
Remix Assistant
Problem: The playback stutters, the metronome is suspended, the computer is
overloaded... (on older computers.)
Remedy: We recommend changing to wave drivers ("P" key, "Playback parameter"
dialog) instead of DirectSound.
Problem: The metronome does not work and there are no lines on the the waveshaped display.
Probable cause: The material does not contain beats or the song contains a passage
without beats.
Remedy: The song should be limited in such a way that only rhythmic passages are
contained.
Problems and solutions
Possible 2nd reason: Inaccurate tapping or a false BPM value has been entered.
Remedy: Try the tempo correction buttons or tap until the "locked" condition is
attained.
Problem: The metronome sounds inaccurately or is jerky, the lines in the waveshaped display are irregular and thinly drawn.
Activation problems
Problem: The entered code is incorrect (telephone activation)
Make sure your entry is correct; in most cases a typo is to blame.
If the code is entered correctly, dial the number of our Call Center. Our support staff
will help you personally.
The MAGIX website won't open
Check your Internet connection; you may have to use manual dial-up.
The form for ordering via post/fax won't open
• Check that an adequate text editing program is installed and activated (for
example, MS Word).
I still haven't received an email with the activation code
• Check that your inbox isn't full.
• Have a look in your spam folder.
You can always send questions via email to our support whenever you like. Please
have the following information at hand so that we can assist you as quickly and as
specifically as possible.
• Complete product name
• Exact version number (to be found in the about box in the "About" menu item of
the "Help" menu)
• Encoder/Decoder name
• Your user code (accessible via the "Activate via post/fax" dialog)
Problem: I have installed MAGIX Video Pro X5 on a new computer, installed a new
hard drive in my old computer (sound card, memory...), or installed it multiple times
on the same computer. My activation code is no longer accepted!
321
322
If the program cannot be activated again after it has been activated multiple times,
please contact the MAGIX customer service (view page 10).
Online functions
Integrated browser
The integrated browser offers many useful functions that help you collect material for
using in your project. All kinds of media can be collected – images, videos, sound or
simply text can be all integrated using the built-in browser with great results.
Tip: You must have an Internet connection to use the full range of options offered by
the integrated browser.
Open browser
The integrated browser is opened by clicking on
the "Internet media" button in the Media Pool
(see Media).
Navigation in the browser
One page back: Switches to the previous page.
One page forward: Switches back to the page before the "One page back"
button was pressed.
Stop: Stops loading the selected page.
Online functions
Reload: The current page will be reloaded.
Home: Returns to the home page.
In the address header, next to the navigation buttons, you can simply enter an Internet
address like http://http://pro.magix.com. Press the enter button and the
corresponding page will be loaded.
Loading Internet media
The buttons described here are used to collect and load media directly from the
Internet into the current film. The corresponding functions can be found in the context
menu of the browser.
Save selected text: The selected text will be saved. It can then be edited using
the title editor.
Start screen capture: Opens the capture dialog for starting screen capture.
Download selected images: The selected images will be saved to your
computer.
Import screen capture of the opened Internet page: The loaded Internet page
will be saved as an image file.
Start audio recording: A dialog for audio recording opens.
Hint: For recording from the Internet, it is important that the sound card is
selected as the sound source.
Accept media after download
This option makes sure that the downloaded media are loaded into the current movie
right away.
Define the path for saving Internet media.
To define the path for saving Internet media, simply click on the folder symbol and
navigate to the desired folder. Confirm your selection with OK.
323
324
MAGIX News Center
The MAGIX News Center features links to current online tutorials and tips & tricks on
the software application examples. The "News" is indicated by color according to
content:
• Green indicates practical tips & tricks for the software
• Yellow reports the availability of new patches and updates
• Red for special offers, contests and questionnaires
If no new messages are present, the button will appear gray. When the MAGIX News
Center is clicked, all of the available information will be displayed. Click the messages
to reach the corresponding website.
Embed Flash videos into your own web page
To do this, you will need a basic knowledge of HTML pages and all technical
requirements for uploading your files to your web page.
Tip: If you do not have HTML skills, we recommend using MAGIX Online Album.
Without any previous knowledge, you can present videos, photos and music on your
own web page – all completely for free. Videos from MAGIX Online Album can also
be embedded in other websites as well.
Please note that a Flash video cannot be directly embedded into an HTML page like a
picture in JPEG format. For a Flash video, you will need a Flash player embedded in the
website to play back your video.
MAGIX offers you a download package with some Flash player goodies. It can be
downloaded here http://support.magix.net/dl/flvplayer.php.
The package contains the following files:
• standalone_omk.swf - the Flash player
• demo.html - a sample website, which demonstrated how the player can be used
• demo.flv - a demo video, which will be played by the Flash player on the demo
website
To reach your target quickly, simply adjust the demo website to your own
requirements and replace the demo video with your own. At the end, upload all three
files to your website.
Online functions
If you need more information about the website's HTML code, we recommend that
you read an explanation of HTML documentation to better understand the structure
and functions of HTML.
If you understand HTML code, you will find another explanation of various parameters
using which you can influence the appearance and function of the Flash player.
url
The path to the video which is to be played back.
preview
The path to an image in JPEG format. It is displayed as a
preview in stopped state before the video is played back.
sound
The sound contained in the video will be played back if this
parameter is "true".
loop
The video will be automatically played back from the start
after reaching the end if this parameter is "true".
tooltip
Changing the position of the position cursor will display a
tooltip with position information if this parameter is "true".
swfborder
A limiting line will be drawn around the player if this
parameter is true.
autoplay
The video will be played back automatically when the page
or the player are loaded.
325
326
Keyboard shortcuts
Tip: In Windows, keyboard settings are changed using the Alt + Shift key
combination. Those who often use keyboard shortcuts can accidentally change their
keyboard settings, so that they keys don't correspond to the pictured symbols. To
prevent this, you can remove the check mark found by going to "Control panel" >
"Regional and language options" > "Languages" tab > "Details" > "Keyboard" >
"Change keyboard combination" under "Change input layout".
Playback functions
Start / Stop
Increase playback speed in stages
Stop playback (playback marker is stopped at
the current position)
Reduce playback speed in stages or rewind in
stages
Speed up fast forward
Space
L
Shift + L
K
Restart beginning at playback marker
Playback marker back to the beginning
Playback marker to end
1 frame back
1 Frame forwards
5 frames back
5 frames forward
Set project marker
Play from range start to range end
Playback at current frame
J
Shift + J
Shift + Right arrow
(Hold keys down)
Shift + Left arrow
(Hold keys down)
Reversed
Pos1
End
Left arrow
Right arrow
Ctrl + Left arrow key
Ctrl + Right arrow key
Ctrl + Enter
#
+
Activate smooth playback for preview
P
Speed up rewind
Keyboard shortcuts
Scroll and zoom
To zoom and scroll in the arranger, it is recommended to work with shortcuts + the
mouse wheel. This is a much more efficient way to work. Available functions are:
•
•
•
•
•
Mouse wheel: horizontal scrolling.
Alt + mouse wheel: vertical scrolling.
Ctrl + mouse wheel: horizontal zoom
Shift + mouse wheel: vertical zoom (all tracks are enlarged)
Ctrl + Alt + mouse wheel: Move window
Monitors
Program monitor
Other resolution
Adjust video monitor to movie settings
Adjust video monitor to selected video
Show/hide playing time
Time background transparent
Anaglyph view
View partially interlaced
Standard (2D)
Side-by-side display
Source monitor
Comparison image: selected object without
effects
Comparison image: selected object
Comparison image: in front of selected object
Comparison image: behind selected object
Comparison image: select object
Remove comparison image
Alt + G
Ctrl + G
Ctrl + Shift + G
Alt + I
Ctrl + Alt + I
Ctrl + .
Alt + .
.
Shift + .
Alt + Shift + ,
Alt + ,
,
Ctrl + Shift + ,
Ctrl + ,
Shift + ,
Arranger view
Zoom in
Reduce section
Play movie fullscreen
Show/hide movie overview in the video
monitor
Optimize movie view
Ctrl + up arrow / Ctrl + mousewheel up
Ctrl + down arrow / Ctrl + mousewheel
down
Alt + Enter
Shift + A
Ctrl + F
327
328
Zoom 1 frame / 5 frames
Zoom 1s / 10s / 1min
Zoom 10 min
Zoom to selected range
Zoom to complete movie length
Preview rendering
Alt + 1/2
Alt + 3/4/5
Ctrl + Alt + 6
Alt + F
F
Ctrl + R
Move view
To next object edge
To previous object edge
To movie start
To movie end
To beginning of range
To end of range
Page to right/left
Grid unit to right/left
To next/
previous project marker
To next/
previous scene marker
To next/
previous chapter marker
Go to previous/next marker
Go to next empty range
Go to previous empty range
Alt + W
Alt + Q
Home
end cap
Ctrl + Home
Ctrl+End.
Page Up/Down
Ctrl+PgDn/PgUp
Ctrl + Shift + PgDn/PgUp
To next/previously selected object
Shift + W
Shift + Q
Ctrl + W
Ctrl + Q
To next/previously object
Shift + PgDn/PgUp
Alt + PgDn/PgUp
Q/W
>
Shift + >
Mouse Modes
Mouse mode for individual objects
All tracks mouse mode
Single track mouse mode
Curve mode
Object stretch mode
Preview audio objects
Context Help
6
7
8
9
0
Alt + 6
Alt + F1
Keyboard shortcuts
Move contents of trimmed object
Alt + Shift + hold mouse and drag to
the right/left
Context Menu
Here you find some more functions among other functions of the menus:
Set Audio-Video-Offset
Object properties
Alt + O
Ctrl + E
Audio and waveform display
Create waveform display
Video/audio on one track
Video/audio on separate tracks
Shift + E
Ctrl + U
Ctrl + H
File menu
New project
Open project
Save project
Save project as...
Project folder -> Clean up project folder
Record audio/images/video...
Import edit list (EDL)...
Export to device...
Batch conversion...
Burn CD/DVD -> Manually compile files...
Clean-up wizard
Export to device
Load backup project
Exit
Ctrl + N
Ctrl + O
Ctrl + S
Shift + S
Alt + Shift + X
R
Ctrl + D
H
S
Ctrl + B
Ctrl + Shift + Y
H
Ctrl + Shift + O
Alt + F4
Manage movies
New
Remove from project
Export
Ctrl + Alt + N
Ctrl + F4
Ctrl + Alt + L
Export movie
Export as AVI
Export as DV AVI
Export movie as an MPEG
Video as MAGIX video
Video as QuickTime movie
Ctrl + Alt + A
Ctrl + Alt+ D
Ctrl + Alt + P
Ctrl + Alt + M
Ctrl + Alt + Q
329
330
Uncompressed movie
Video as MotionJPEG-AVI
Movie as a series of individual frames
Windows Media Export
Video as MPEG 4 video
Audio as wave
Export as transition
Single frame as BMP file
Single frame as JPEG
Animated GIF
Export movie information as EDL
Ctrl + Alt + U
Ctrl + Alt + O
Ctrl + Alt + E
Ctrl + Alt + V
Ctrl + Alt + G
Ctrl + Alt + W
Ctrl + Alt + T
Ctrl + Alt + B
Ctrl + Alt + J
Ctrl + Alt + F
Alt + D
Backup copy
Copy project and media into folder
Copy movie and media into folder
Alt + S
Shift + R
Settings
Movie
Program
Keyboard shortcuts
Preview rendering
E
Y
Ctrl + Shift + U
Alt + R
Edit menu
Back
Restore
Cut objects
Copy objects
Insert objects
Duplicate objects
Delete objects
Select all objects
Save object groups
Ctrl + Z
Ctrl + Y
Ctrl + X
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + V
D
Del
Ctrl + A
Ctrl + Alt + Shift + F
Cut
Cut scene
Remove scene start
Remove scene end
Remove scene
Split movie
T
Z
U
Ctrl + Del
Alt + Y
Musical cut adjustment
Ctrl + Shift + M
Edit range
Keyboard shortcuts
Cut range
Copy range
Delete range
Insert range
Extract range
Insert empty space into selected range
Shift + Del; Alt + X
Alt + C
Alt + Del
Alt + V
Shift + X
C
Group
Ungroup
G
Shift + G
Wizards
Slideshow Maker
Soundtrack Maker
Ctrl + M
Ctrl + Shift + S
Mixdown audio
Audio and video mixdown
Start preview rendering
Set snap point
Shift + D
Shift + M
Ctrl+R
Ctrl + P
Markers
Set project marker
Set chapter markers
Set chapter markers automatically
Delete chapter markers
Delete all chapter markers
Set range start
Set range end
Jump to range start
Jump to range end
Select range above blank space
Ctrl + Enter
Shift + Enter
Alt + Shift + Enter
Ctrl + Shift + Enter
Ctrl + Alt + Enter
I
O
Shift + I
Shift + O
X
Move view
see "Move view" (view page 328)
Search for gaps
Mute audio track
Ctrl + Shift + C
Alt + Shift + M
Effects menu
Movie effects settings
Video object effects
Scene recognition
Image stabilization
Edit with MAGIX Photo Designer
Ctrl + Shift + H
Shift + Z
Ctrl + L
Alt + Shift + D
331
332
Video effects
Brightness/contrast
Color
Color correction
Sharpness
Video effects plug-ins
Video mix effects
Alt + Shift + H
Alt + Shift + F
Alt + Shift + C
Ctrl + Alt + S
Ctrl + Shift + P
Ctrl + Alt + X
Movement effects
Position/size
Section
Camera/zoom
Rotation/mirror
Alt + Shift + I
Alt + Shift + P
Ctrl + Alt + Z
Alt + Shift + R
Audio object effects
Normalize
Volume reduction
Audio cleaning
Echo/reverb
Timestretch/resample
Load audio effects
Save audio effects
Reset audio effects
BPM wizard
Edit wave files externally
Volume curve
Alt + N
Alt + L
Alt + A
Shift + H
Ctrl + Shift + Q
Ctrl + +
Shift + +
Ctrl + Alt + +
Alt + Shift + K
Alt + Z
Ctrl + Shift + V
Title effects
Title editor
Load title effects
Save title effects
Ctrl + T
Alt + T
Ctrl + Shift + T
Effects libraries
Audio and video effects
Transition effects
Title effects
Ctrl + Shift + E
Ctrl + Shift + B
Alt + Shift + L
Windows menu
Edit trimmer
Object trimmer
Mixer
Master audio effects rack
N
Shift + N
M
B
Keyboard shortcuts
Program monitor
Media Pool
Project folder
Activate next window
Reset window arrangement
Display settings
Film overview
Optimize movie view
Zoom horizontally/vertically
Shift + V
Shift + P
Shift + B
Tab
F9
Alt + Shift + V
Shift + A
Ctrl + F
see "Arranger view (view page
327)"
Help menu
Help
Context help
Display tooltips
About MAGIX Video Pro X5
F1
Alt + F1
Ctrl + Shift + F1
Alt + Shift + F1
Edit keyboard shortcut
In this dialog you can specify keyboard shortcuts for all menu function of MAGIX
Video Pro X5. This allows you to adapt existing shortcuts to your requirements or to
add new ones.
The settings are automatically saved in a file upon closing the program, i.e. they will
be available the next time the program is used.
The display of the entire menu tree is the key function of MAGIX Video Pro X5.
Add keyboard shortcut
To add a keyboard shortcut, proceed as follows:
• Look for the required menu point and select it with a simple mouse click. Under
"Current menu point" the currently selected menu point will be displayed.
• Then, click on the "New keyboard shortcut" field.
• Type in the keyboard shortcut. You can also use combinations of any key with
"Shift", "Alt", and "Ctrl".
• Then click on "Assign shortcut". If the shortcut should already have been
assigned a corresponding warning will be displayed.
333
334
Note! Please do not use the space bar, "Esc", or "Insert" key ("0" in the number
block), since the functions of these keys are permanently assigned in MAGIX Video
Pro X5 and can not be changed.
Keyboard shortcut list
Reset: Activates all preset shortcuts again.
Load: Previously saved shortcuts are loaded and activated again.
Tip: MAGIX Video Pro X5 offers additional presets for those switching from other
programs. These settings make it considerably easier to switch to MAGIX Video Pro
X5.
If you have used MAGIX Video Pro X3 and want to use its keyboard shortcuts, load
Video_Pro_X3.ssc.
Warning: The current settings will be overwritten during loading! Save your current
keyboard shortcuts in advance if you would like to keep them.
Save: The current keyboard shortcuts can be saved after naming the file appropriately.
List: This button opens a window where a complete list of current keyboard shortcuts
appears. The included Copy button can be used to copy this list to the Windows
clipboard and then edit and print it using a text editor.
Activate codecs
Activate codecs
You may activate encoders/decoders for various file formats as required. The
corresponding activation dialog will appear automatically when the codec is used for
the first time, e.g. when a DVD is burned and the MPEG-2 codec is used.
Why does it have to be "activated"?
To import (decode) or export (encode) certain video and audio formats, you will
require a specific codec to be able to read in and export these formats. As soon as the
corresponding decoder or encoder is required, MAGIX Video Pro X3 will notify you
and ask you if you would like to activate it. Activation is only possible for a valid
registered version of MAGIX Video Pro X3. This is a copy protection mechanism
which ensures that only legal owners of the software may use it completely.
Free activation of codecs
To be able to use MPEG-2, MPEG-4, DolbyDigital stereo import, and DolbyDigital 5.1,
you will have to activate the codecs for free.
Activation can be done online via telephone or via post/fax. The quickest and easiest
way to order an activation code is via the Internet.
Order activation code online
Click on "Order online..." (Field 1). MAGIX Video Pro X5 will automatically contact the
MAGIX server and load the corresponding codec.
Note: Activation of the codec checks the registration data as required. Activation of
the codec only functions if your version of the program has already been registered
in your name. If you haven't registered MAGIX Video Pro X5, then you can do this at
any time.
If your computer has no Internet access, you have the following options for activation:
Order activation code in MAGIX Service Center
Use this option to conduct activation from a different computer which has Internet
access.
Enter activation code
After receiving your personal activation code, use the export or burn function to
reopen the activation dialog for the corresponding file format. Type or copy the
activation code into the input field in the dialog and click on "Activate...".
335
336
Fee-based DVCPRO and AVC-Intra activation
To use DVCPRO and AVC-Intra in MAGIX Video Pro X5, they must first be activated.
This involves a fee-based activation process.
Order activation code online
Click on "Order online..." (Field 1). The web browser will open for you to register
MAGIX Video Pro X5 first (if you have not already done so). You will then be
forwarded to a website where you can request the corresponding activation.
If your computer has no Internet access, then you have the following options for
activation:
Order activation code in MAGIX Service Center
Use this option to conduct activation from a different computer which has Internet
access.
Order activation code via post/fax
After clicking on "Order via post/fax" (field 2) your user code will appear. This
automatically assigns your personal activation code to your PC. Click on "Continue to
order form" to transfer your user code automatically to the post/fax form. Now send
the completed form as a printout to the address/fax no. mentioned. Once payment
has been processed successfully, your activation code will be sent to you in the
post/via fax in just a few days. Optionally, it can also be sent by email if an email
address is stated.
Enter activation code
After receiving your personal activation code use the export or burn function to
reopen the activation dialog for the corresponding file format. Type or copy the
activation code into the input field in the dialog and click on "Activate...".
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
MPEG Compression
MPEG means "Moving Picture Experts Group" and defines a workgroup which
cooperates with the International Standards Organization (ISO) as well as the
international Electro Technical Commission (ETC) to develop standards for video and
audio coding.
Generally, the graphic data rate of the digital video standard is 167 megabits per
second, which, when not compressed, requires a far higher storage capacity than a
DVD can offer. A one-sided DVD 5 with 4.7 GB storage capacity is enough for 4
Minutes. For this reason, the available pictorial material must be effectively
compressed – a function which is achieved with the MPEG procedure.
This procedure is based on the simple fact that up to 96% of digital video data
consists of repetition and can be compressed without visible degradation of the
pictorial quality.
Each MPEG compression is, however, a data reduction and as such connected with
information loss. If the video consists of very extensive details, or if the content
changes very fast, then the picture may blur (dependent on the strength of the
compression and the quality of the encoder).
Errors can also result from so-called compression artifacts such as small color defects
or images that are too dark.
At average compression rates under 3 megabits per second it is probable that you will
notice reduced quality. At rates around 6 megabit per second the degradation in
quality becomes almost invisible.
General notes on AVI videos
The AVI format (Audio Video Interleaved) isn't actually a proper video format!
Rather, it is a so-called "container", where the conventions for transferring audio and
video files to the program are only loosely defined. The codec (coder/decoder)
actually defines what storage format is used. A codec compresses audio/video data
into its own unique format which can only be read by the codec itself and is decoded
when the film is played.
In concrete terms, a computer-generated AVI file can only be loaded by and played
on a different computer if the same codec is installed on it.
337
338
Many codecs (e.g. Intel Indeo® video) have now become standard components of the
Windows™ installation. Others like the popular DivX codec are not standard. If you
are generating an AVI file for future play on another computer using one of these
codecs, you should first install this codec on the other PC. The best method available
is to copy the codec installer to your export directory and burn it every time you
create a video disc (slideshow disc) for play on computers.
You may encounter some problems when using older video editing cards with codecs
which only function with the card’s hardware. Such AVIs can only be used on the
computer which was used to create them. Try to avoid using this kind of codec.
Overview of the different disc types
MAGIX Video Pro X5 supports numerous disc types, and these depend on whether
you want to burn a movie or slideshow and which disc type you are using (CD, DVD,
or Blu-ray DiscTM), or the type of playback device or quality required.
The table below will explain which disc types are best for different cases, the
differences in quality, and how much storage space each format requires.
More detailed information, consult the chapters concerning the individual disc types.
Disc type
Storage media
Menu
Quality:
Length (optimal quality)
DVD
Blu-Ray disc
(view page 340)
AVCHD (view
page 340)
DVD
Blu-Ray disc
Yes
Yes
***
*****
98 min.
110 min.
DVD/Blu-ray
Disc
Yes
*****
30 min./DVD
160 min./Blu-ray Disc
* The display time for some DVD players can be determined in this menu. The
amount of image material that can be put onto a CD or DVD depends on the sizes of
the picture files.
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)
Quality
Featuring a resolution of 720 x 576 (PAL) and encoded with MPEG-2, 25 frames per
second provides very good results.
Writable data storage formats
The recordable DVD market is currently split into three types: "DVD-RAM",
"DVD+RW", and "DVD-RW".
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
DVD-R/+R: This medium may only be written to once. The DVD-R may be specified
with file structures for DVD video, DVD audio, or DVD-ROM.
DVD +RW: +RW drives allow re-writable DVDs to be created which may be read by
almost any commercial DVD-ROM or DVD player. The companies involved are
mainly Philips, Sony, HEWLETT PACKARD (as well as Ricoh, Yamaha and
Mitsubishi).
DVD-RW: This is a write/erase DVD technology promoted by Pioneer and Sharp.
This format was developed by the Pioneer company and should be compatible with
existing DVD players.
DVD-RAM: DVD-RAM technology is based on either Phase Change, MOs, or hard
disks, etc. and is now almost 100% incompatible with all available players.
Due to the small storage capacity and incompatibility with DVD players, setting on
this standard is not recommended.
Note: MAGIX Video Pro X5 supports DVD±R and DVD±RW, but not DVD-RAM.
Blank discs: Single-sided recordable blank discs featuring a capacity of 4.7 GB and a
duration of approx. 2 hours.
Copy Protection
Macrovision (APS): The movie industry claims that even DVD-ROM drives and
decoders or diagram cards with composite outputs or s-video outputs must support
the Macrovision analog copy protection (APS). Only some older DVD players do not
possess APS.
APS adds additional signals to a DVD’s stored graphical data. The data is almost
unchanged. These supplementary signals disturb the synchronization and the
automatic recording regulation of most video recorders to prevent recording of the
video. They are not noticeable on the television or the monitor, however.
Content Scrambling System (CSS): CSS prevents saving and duplication of DVD
video tracks to hard disk. The VOB streams of DVDs without CSS can otherwise (like
other video files) be loaded via the Import Video button
There are further types of copy protection besides APS and CSS which ensure that
retail DVDs cannot be copied without distortion
339
340
miniDVD
The miniDVD is nothing more than the DVD data format burned onto a CD-ROM.
Thus the MPEG-2 encoder and all other specifications of the DVD data format are
used, and only the data carriers are different. Because the CD-ROM can only save
about a sixth of the quantity of data a DVD can hold, the capacity of a miniDVD is
accordingly limited to approx. 20 minutes of movie.
MiniDVDs are particularly suitable for playing on the computer. For stand-alone
devices they must be tested on an individual basis as to whether the device can
handle the DVD format on a CD-ROM.
AVCHD disc
Use this format to create a high-resolution video. You can burn Blu-ray (BD-R/RE)
blanks as well as conventional DVD±R/RWs. In contrast to Blu-ray Discs (view page
340), MPEG-4/AVC codec (view page 341) is applied as the video format, which
requires less memory at a comparable image quality.
Compatibility
AVCHD disc on Blu-ray blank: Since this is a BD-conformant format, the disc created
can be played back in any conventional Blu-ray player. Playback problems can almost
always be traced to incompatibilities between Blu-ray blanks and Blu-ray players. In
this case, consult the instructions for your Blu-ray player or ask the manufacturer
which blanks are compatible with the device.
AVCHD disc on DVD blank: The DVDs created with AVCHD video are not supported
by all Blu-ray players. The behavior of the devices is quite different. Normal DVD
players cannot replay AVCHD discs, since the AVC format is not supported.
Blu-ray Disc
Since early 2008, Blu-ray Discs are viewed as successors to DVDs and offer
especially high storage capacity of up to 27 GB in a single layer (double-layer up to 54
GB) with very few write errors.
The term Blu-ray Disc comes from the blue color of the laser. Because a color cannot
be registered as a trademark, the letter "e" was removed from the word "blue".
The high storage capacity of the Blu-ray Disc suits high definition videos and
slideshows in high quality perfectly, since these are characterized by large file sizes
(depending on material approximately 40 MB/sec) and very high memory use. The
MPEG-2 codec is used to create video.
Companies that were involved in developing Blu-ray technology have united
themselves into the Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA).
MPEG-4 encoder
Blu-ray Discs come in three varieties:
• Only readable BD ROM (comparable to DVD video),
• rewritable BD-RE (comparable to DVD±RW or DVD-RAM),
• and as a disc that can be written to only once BD-R (comparable to DVD±R).
MPEG-4 encoder
MPEG-4 is actually a collection of highly efficient codecs for video and audio based on
the MPEG standard. Compared to MPEG-2, the same quality can be achieved with
smaller file size.
Recommendation: Check the presets that the program offers to find the right preset
for each application and the right playback device. These presets are optimized for
typical applications.
The advanced settings in "Advanced" are divided into "Video", "Audio", and
"Multiplexer".
Under „Video“ there is a choice between „MPEG-4 Simple“ (MPEG-4 Visual/MPEG4 Part 2) (view page 346)and „MPEG-4 H.264“ (AVC/MPEG-4 Part 10) (view page
342).
Depending on the purpose of application of the material to be exported, either one of
these encoder settings can be selected for compressing the video material. Refer to
the manual for the playback device to find out which encoder is supported.
Under „Audio“, „AAC“ (view page 349) is preset. If you have chosen an AVCHD
transport stream from the presets, "AC3 (Dolby Digital)" will be available.
Under „Multiplexer“ you can adjust certain presets, e.g. container format and
streaming properties. This is only recommended for experts.
The option "Export as website" also creates an HTML page in an integrated Flash
player that can play back the video created. Read the topic "Embed Flash videos into
your own web site (view page 324)".
Tip: First, check if there is a suitable preset in the export dialog for your purposes.
Advanced users can make specific adjustments to these three areas using the
advanced settings.
341
342
Video codec
MPEG-4 H.264
The MPEG-4 H.264/AVC codec is suitable for all types of material; however, it
requires relatively higher CPU power for later decoding.
In the advanced encoder settings of the AVC encoder the "Generic" options in "Main
Settings" are mainly interesting.
The AVC preset and video format can be adjusted here. For instance, if DVD quality is
desired you should select "DVD". The video format should be selected specific to the
country so that the material can be played on the devices most commonly available in
these countries. For instance, you should select PAL for Germany, SECAM for France
and NTSC for the US.
MVC
MVC: Multiview Video Coding (MVC) is an expansion for stereoscopic applications.
Activate this to export MVC files.
Note: MVC is only available in the Video deluxe Pro versions.
2-pass
The video to be exported will be encoded twice. The first run-through serves to
calculate the streaming rate for each section (for video this is per frame). The second
run-through is when the actual video is created with the streaming rates that were
calculated in the first run-through. The result is an improved image quality, but
encoding takes place approximately twice as long.
Smart Render and Smart Copy
Smart Render lowers the demand on the encoder for AVCHD material. In the
production of AVCHD files, only those parts of the movie that were changed in the
program (e.g. by video cleaning or effects) are re-encoded. Please note: The AVCHD
files contained in the movie must have the same format, i.e. the bit rates (variable or
constant), audio formats, image resolutions and video formats must match.
The Smart Rendering special mode „Smart Copy“ enables AVCHD material to be
transferred without having to encode it for the target medium which greatly increases
the encoding speed. The video material cannot appear to have been altered in any
way, only hard cuts (without fades) are permitted. These won't be executed precisely
to the frame, but rather take place at the next GOP borders. For this reason, cuts
should be set somewhat more generously.
MPEG-4 encoder
Hardware acceleration - CUDA, Quick Sync Video, OpenCL
MAGIX Video Pro X5 supports hardware acceleration for AVCHD exports, AVCHD
Disc and Blu-ray (H.264) Disc encoding (burning). This can noticeably speed up the
encoding process.
The following hardware acceleration technology is supported: Quick Sync Video
(Intel), OpenCL (AMD) and CUDA (NVIDIA).
Note: Ask your graphics card manufacturer whether your graphics card supports
hardware acceleration. Make sure that all the necessary drivers are installed.
If your system does support hardware acceleration, you can activate it through
"Advanced..." > "Hardware acceleration". The program will make the adjustments
according to the available technology.
Advanced video settings
Generic
AVC preset
This is where the actual video stream that will be exported is selected.
• Baseline: According to ISO/ICE 11172-1/2 standard
• Main: Corresponds with ISO/ICE 13818-1/2 standard
• High: High Profile
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SVCD: Corresponds with MPEG-2 Super VideoCD
D1: Corresponds with MPEG-2 DVD
DVD: DVD video
Blu-ray: Blu-ray-Disc
Blu-ray HD: Blu-ray-Disc in High Definition
Sony PSP: Sony PSP-compatible format
HD 1280x720p: High Profile with a resolution of 1280x720p (progressive)
HD 1440 x 1080i: High profile with a resolution of 1440 x 1080i (interlaced)
Apple iPod: Apple iPod-compatible stream.
Profiles
Profiles
Profiles define the encoder properties that are supported.
• Baseline profile: The basis of applications with limited computing performance,
especially for video conferences or videos on mobile telephones.
343
344
• Main profile: This profile was originally intended for the broadcast industry and
for backup purposes. It has become less popular since the development of the
"High Profile" for this purpose.
• High profile: This profile is used for broadcast and backup applications, and it is
also used sometimes in the HDTV industry (High Definition Television). This
profile is used for HD-DVD and Blu-ray Discs, for example.
Level
H.264 defines different levels. The level determines which bit rate and resolution are
possible for the video.
With the "Auto level" option, the encoder determines the level automatically on the
basis of the resolution of "AVC preset" video formats, the set bit rate and the profile.
Frame type
"Picture type" specifies which parts of a frame should be used as the basis for the
encoding:
• Progressive Frame: A single image from a video sequence, also called a fullscreen.
• Interlaced Field: This is half an image. Two of these are combined to produce a
frame. Read more about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 359)".
• Interlace Frame: The encoder creates a „Frame field“ which is the basis for the
encoding.
Field order
Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Field" is selected for "Frame
type".
In case of interlaced streams, the half-image sequence is set. Read more about this
explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 359)".
Slice count
A frame can be divided into multiple slices for encoding. Specify the maximum
number of slices are permitted. If set to "0", then the number will be determined
automatically.
Rate control
The bit rate indicates how much data per second is saved in the video (playback
speed). This makes the bit rate the deciding parameter with regard to the file size and
quality of the video to be encoded. A higher bit rate means more quality but also a
larger file size.
MPEG-4 encoder
Mode
• Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate should only be used if the device used to
play the video supports constant bit rates.
• Constant quantizer:
• Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies. For faster movements in the video, the bit
rate increases, and for still images or slow pans, a lower bit rate is sufficient for
creating the video in constant quality.
Pass
Here you can choose whether you want to manually perform one-pass or multi-pass
encodings (2-pass, multi-pass)
Note: The 2-pass option in the main dialog of the MPEG-4 export is recommended.
This automatically performs two encoder passes.
If you want to perform 2-pass encoding manually, you must select "Multi-pass
analysis" in the first pass and "Multi-pass encode" in the second pass.
• Single pass: The encoder process takes place without prior analysis. This requires
the least amount of time.
• Multi-pass analysis: Analysis data is calculated during encoding and used for
multi-pass encoding.
• Multi-pass encode: Assumes that an analysis has already been performed The
analysis data is used during encoding to optimize the results.
Bit rate (Bits/s)
• In "Constant bit rate" mode: Exactly those values entered are applied to be able to
calculate the size of the video precisely.
• In "Variable bit rate" mode: The values entered here are applied to the video as an
average as a guideline. The size of the video to be exported can only be
approximated.
HSS rate
This is the maximum bit rate that should be present in the video stream, i.e. maximum
number of bits that may be transferred to the decoder.
Note: This option is only available in "Variable bit rate" mode. "Use HRD" must also
be activated.
345
346
Aspect ratio
In the film industry, this is an indication of the ratio between width and height of a
rectangle, monitor, or screen.
There are 3 different sizes available:
• Picture Aspect Ratio (also Display Aspect Ratio, DAR): This indicates the desired
aspect ratio of the video to be exported. Here are some examples of typical
aspect ratios: at home 4:3, 16:9 (typical for TV sets) or 16:10 (widescreenflatscreens, widescreen notebooks), 3:2 for 35mm films and photos. In cinemas
you mostly find 1.85:1.
• Pixel Aspect Ratio (PAR, pixel aspect ratio: Indicates the aspect ratio of individual
pixels. The majority of computer monitors have quadratic pixels (PAR=1:1), for
analog television monitors (PAL at 4:3) 128:117.
• Sample Aspect Ratio (SAR, also Storage Aspect Ratio): Aspect ratio of the saved
resolution (number of pixels), e.g. 720:576 at PAL. It also calculates picture
aspect ratio and pixel aspect ratio: SAR = DAR / PAR.
Note: In the standard case, the "Aspect ratio" remains set the way it is. You should
only change the settings if the resulting video is exported distorted or stretched or if
you need to correct the video because it is in the wrong aspect ratio.
GOP structure
Max GOP length
Determines the maximum GOP (view page 359) length. High values mean improved
compression. Lower values create stronger security protection and enable improved
access to individual frames for processing the video.
Max b-frames count
The maximum number of b-frames (view page 361). Several cases of application, e.g.
video conferences require "no b-frames" in order to achieve the shortest possible
reaction times during transfer.
Scene change detection
If this option is activated the scenes will be detected during encoding, thus allowing
you to insert an I frame (view page 359) after a scene change.
MPEG-4 simple
If MPEG-4 H.264 cannot be played back on your device, use MPEG-4 Simple.
MPEG-4 encoder
Note: We recommend that only advanced users make adjustments to the advanced
settings. You can use the technical specifications of your playback device to help
with this.
Advanced video settings
Generic
MPEG-4 preset
Different presets located within the encoder.
(A)SP@L0-L5: (Advanced) Simple Profile in Level 0-5
(Q)CIF (Common Intermediate Format): CIF is a video format produced as soon as
1990 with the video compression format H.261. At that time, the format was used for
video telephone conferences.
The "Q" in QCIF stands for "Quarter", and since resolution is halved in terms of height
and width compared to CIF, the entire size is only a quarter of CIF.
QCIF was popular with mobile telephone manufacturers, since the resolution of 176 x
144 pixels was sensible for the first affordable SmartPhones (144 x 176).
(Half)D1: D1 corresponds with MPEG-2 DVD. HalfD1 has exactly half of the entire
number of pixels, meaning that the pixel number of the height and weight is 2/3 of D1.
720p: Video stream with a resolution of 1280 x 720p (progressive).
Apple iPod: Apple iPod-compatible stream.
Sony PSP: Sony PSP-compatibler stream.
Profile/Level
Profiles: Profiles define the encoder properties that are supported.
Level: The level determines which bit rate and resolution are possible for the video.
Picture type
"Picture type" specifies which parts of a frame should be used as the basis for the
encoding:
• Frame: A frame is a single image from a video sequence, also called a full image.
• Field: A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame. Read more about
this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 359)".
347
348
Field order
Note: This parameter is only available if the setting "Field" is selected for "Frame
type".
In case of interlaced streams, the half-image sequence is set. Read more about this
explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 359)".
Slice count
A frame can be divided into multiple slices for encoding. Specify the maximum
number of slices are permitted. If set to "0", then the number will be determined
automatically.
Rate control
The bit rate indicates how much data per second is saved in the video (playback
speed). This makes the bit rate the deciding parameter with regard to the file size and
quality of the video to be encoded. A higher bit rate means more quality but also a
larger file size.
Mode
• Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate should only be used if the device used to
play the video supports constant bit rates.
• Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies. For faster movements in the video, the bit
rate increases, and for still images or slow pans, a lower bit rate is sufficient for
creating the video in constant quality.
• Constant quality: Similar to the "Variable bit rate" mode, the bit rate varies
according to the video material. The quality depends on the selected profile and
can be changed.
• Constant quantizer: In this mode, a fixed colour quantization is used for the
macro blocks. Under Advanced settings, a value between 1 and 32 can be set
independent of the respective frame (I-Frame (view page 359), P-Frame, or BFrame (view page 361)). The higher the value, the stronger the quantization:
small values produce qualitatively high-quality images and the data rate
increases, and larger values produce a reduction in data, but the quality suffers.
Bit rate (Bits/s)
• In "Constant bit rate" mode: Exactly those values entered are applied to be able to
calculate the size of the video precisely.
• In "Variable bit rate" mode: The values entered here are applied to the video as an
average as a guideline. The size of the video to be exported can only be
approximated.
MPEG-4 encoder
Max. rate
This is the maximum bit rate that should be present in the video stream, i.e. maximum
number of bits that may be transferred to the decoder.
Note: This option is only available in "Variable bit rate" mode.
Pixel aspect ratio
Specifies the page ratio of the individual image points (pixels).
Meaning: Different television norms and the standard pixel ratio. Select a setting and
the results are displayed as "X" and "Y".
X/Y: The actual pixel ratio. If under "Meaning" the setting "Custom" is selected, then
a custom ratio can be set.
GOP structure
Max key interval
Determines the maximum GOP (view page 359) length. High values mean improved
compression. Lower values create stronger security protection and enable improved
access to individual frames for processing the video.
B-frames count
The number of B-Frames (view page 361). Several applications, e.g. video
conferences, require a setting of "0" for this, i.e. no B-Frames, in order to enable the
shortest possible reaction times for transfer.
Scene change detection
If this option is activated the scenes will be detected during encoding, thus allowing
you to insert an I frame (view page 359) after a scene change.
Audio codec
Under „Audio“, „AAC“ (view page 349) is preset. If you have chosen an AVCHD
transport stream from the presets, "AC3 (Dolby Digital)" will be available.
AAC
AAC was developed by MPEG, the Moving Picture Experts Group (Dolby, Fraunhofer
Institut für Integrierte Schaltungen in Erlangen, AT&T, Nokia, Sony) as an audio data
compression process that was specified as a further development of MPEG-2
Multichannel in the MPEG-2 standard.
349
350
AAC is equally suitable for encoding general audio information and not especially
optimized for certain types of audio material.
AAC audio can be encoded with a sample rate of 8000, 16000, 24000, 32000 or
48000 Hz in either mono or stereo. By default, the sound is set to 48000 Hz stereo.
The higher the sample rate is, the larger the resulting file and higher the audio quality.
You can use the technical specifications of your playback device to help with this.
Advanced audio settings:
• The bit rate can be set between 6 and 512 kbit/s. 160 kbits/s is active by default.
The higher the value is, the larger the resulting file and higher the audio quality.
After a certain limit, additional improvements to audio quality will not be
perceived. Bit rates under 64 kb/s are not recommended.
• As an MPEG version, set MPEG-4 or the older, proven MPEG-2 format.
• For the File Header Type, choose either RAW or ADTS. The "Header" indicates an
explanatory head for the beginning of the file segment, which in fact takes up
extra space, but is required for decoding under circumstances.
-
RAW indicates material which does not include a file header in audio format.
The audio material is therefore transferred directly without any special
additional information (raw).
This requires that decoding routines are able to process the material without
the explanatory file header. Especially in case "exotic" sample rates are set,
this can lead to problems during RAW encoding.
-
ADTS indicates a file header type which contains information for encoded
audio material. In case of doubt, select this file header type, since fewer
problems can be expected in this case.
Profiles:
• Low complexity: Data is present in a form that hinders different decoding
algorithms (noise replacement), but enables others (temporal adjustment noise
formation).
Note: For example, Apple iPod requires "low complexity encoding". However, you
don't need to worry if you select the right preset for Apple iPod in the export dialog.
AC3
If you have chosen an AVCHD, AVCHD transport stream or Blu-ray (H.264) from the
presets, "AC3 (Dolby Digital)" will be available.
MPEG-4 encoder
Note: AC3 (Dolby Digital) Surround is only available in the PLUS and Pro versions of
Video deluxe.
Multiplexer
The Multiplexer combines audio and video streams so they can be played back
together on playback devices.
Output format
MPEG-4 file: This is an MPEG standard (ISO/IEC-14496) with the original goal of
supporting devices with less computing performance. Currently, MPEG-4 has reached
a wide bandwidth of application, from HD video to support for mobile telephones.
JPEG2000 file: DCI (Digital Cinema Initiative) has been replaced by the JPEG2000
format for encoding movies. The current distribution and presentation of films has
been taken over by digital projectors that play back high-resolution Mj2 streams in
outstanding image and sound quality.
3GPP file: A standard supported by plenty GSM and UMTS mobile telephones. 3GPP
is very similar to the MPEG-4 standard, but also supports formats that are not
permitted by MPEG-4.
Streamable format
Activate this option if you would like to create files that can be integrated into and
played back on websites. This way the file can be played back without having to be
completely preloaded.
Note: This setting is recommended if you choose the option "Export as website".
For Sony PSP
Switch on this option if the video should be played back with the Sony PSP.
For iPod
Switch on this option, if the video should be played back with the Apple iPod.
351
352
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
General settings
MPEG type: Set the output type of the created MPEG file. You can adjust the encoder
settings freely (to export your video in the corresponding format, for instance) for
further use in other programs or on your own website.
If you open the encoder from a burn dialog, or intend to use the exported material for
VCDs, SVCDs or DVDs, then select the corresponding option. This will adjust the
settings of the encoder according to the standards required for the corresponding
discs to be played in a compatible player.
Video format: Automatically specifies the video format, aspect ratio, and frame rate
(see video settings (view page 353)). You can choose between PAL or NTSC.
Interlace mode: The movie is encoded interlaced (i.e. in two half-screens, so-called
fields). This is essential for later playback on TV screens. If you want to view the
exported movie on your PC only and like a "cinemascope" view, you can also encode
by frame (progressively). Some video projectors also support playback of
progressively encoded image material. See Interlace (view page 359).
Bit rate: The bit rate determines the memory requirement by the completed video.
The amount of data available can be used differently for different display modes. 20
MB can be 4 seconds of DVD video, or 5 minutes of Internet streaming at the
thumbnail size. The quality of an MPEG video is measured by the width of the created
data stream, i.e. the bit rate. This is the amount of transmitted data per time unit and
is indicated in kBit/s or bit per second.
Quality: Determines the quality of the encoding process, or the quality of the
movement (view page 357) to be more precise. The higher the quality, the better the
finished video will look, but encoding will take considerably longer. The preset value
"10" is a good compromise between speed and quality.
Smart Rendering: Smart Rendering can considerably reduce the encoding/processing
strain of MPEG files. The production of MPEG files re-encodes only those parts of the
movie that were changed in the program (e.g. by video cleaning or effects). Please
note: The MPEG files contained in the movie must have the same format, i.e. the bit
rates (variable or constant), audio formats, image resolutions, and video formats must
match.
Quick, GOP-precise copying: This special Smart Rendering mode enables MPEG
material to be transferred without having to encode it for the target medium, thereby
greatly increasing the encoding speed. The video material cannot appear to have been
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
altered in any way; only hard cuts (without fades) are permitted. These won't be
executed precisely to the frame, but will rather take place at the next GOP borders.
For this reason, cuts should be set somewhat more generously.
To burn DVDs in original 5.1 Surround Sound (Dolby Digital Audio) without having to
re-encode, this option has to be activated.
Allows you to rip the necessary settings from an existing MPEG file. This can be
useful if you want to merge MPEG files together without re-rendering via Smart
Rendering.
Video settings
Frame rate: PAL requires 25 frames/sec, NTSC 29.97 frames/sec. Please note:
encoding NTSC material as PAL or vice versa may be possible; however, it will result
in jittery images.
Aspect ratio: Lets you set the image side or pixel ratio. With MPEG-2 the image
format is displayed as image ratio; correspondingly there is 1:1 (square screen, not
recommended), 4:3 (regular video), 16:9 (widescreen) and 2.21:1 (cinemascope). This
applies irrespectively of the selected video format.
For MPEG-1 the pixel format is set; the options here are 1:1, CCIR601 (represents
normal 4:3 video) for 625 lines = PAL and 525 lines = NTSC and the same for 16:9.
The option Auto is set as default. Here you can adjust the Movie settings (view page
288) accordingly.
Resolution: Width and height of the video corresponds with the settings in the export
dialog.
GOP structure: Here you can change the settings of the GOP (view page 359)
sequence, i.e. the number of P frames and B frames per I frame within a GOP. Please
note that the total length of the GOP must not exceed 15 frames, which corresponds
to the default setting (1 I frame + 4 P frames + 5*2 B frames = 15 frames).
However, you can reduce the length of the GOP sequence (while compromising the
image quality at the same bit rate). This speeds up the encoding process considerably
as the motion estimation while encoding P and B frames requires high CPU
performance. The speed of decoding, i.e. playback, is also increased.
If I frame is set to 1, each frame is an I frame. If the value is set higher, the setting
describes the total length of the GOP.
Auto GOP: Closed GOPs do not contain relations to frames from subsequent GOPs.
MPEGs where all GOPs are closed, make MPEG editing easier as the I frames only can
353
354
be edited alone if the GOP is closed. Auto GOP closes GOPs at scene changes,
whereby two different and complex procedures ("fast" and "VCSD") are used.
Bit rate mode
In "constant bit rate" mode a bit rate that constantly remains the same is used. With a
constant bit rate the full power of MPEG compression can not be used properly as
bandwidth for non-moving scenes is lost.
"Variable bit rate" mode attempts to adjust the available storage space to the
requirements of the video you want to encode. The actual bit rate fluctuates around a
mean value. During calm sections of the video it may drop to a minimum value, if
there are movements in the scene it may rise to the maximum value. There are two
different regulation processes (mode 1 and mode 128).
Advanced video settings
MPEG profile and level: The MPEG-2 standard defines various "profiles" and "levels".
For creating DVDs you can use the "Main profile & Main level". The high profile adds
additional properties to the data stream, such as the option of displaying an image at
a reduced resolution for restricted transmission quality (SNR scalable profile) or
locally scaled, for instance an HDTV data stream on a standard TV set). The 4:2:2
profile is used if the image data is to be encoded for alternative chroma scanning
(view page 358). However, these profiles are only supported by very few encoders,
mainly for professional use.
The different levels define the restrictions to the image resolution and the maximum
data rate. Low level can only reach a reduced resolution (352 x 2888 = CIF), high
level or High -1440 enables encoding in HDTV format.
Estimate movement: These parameters are controlled by the quality controller (see
General Settings).
Other
Noise sensitivity: This factor defines how sensitive the encoder will react to noise in
the source material. If your source material only contains little noise (digital
recordings, computer animations or already de-noised by video cleaning), you don't
have to change the default value 4, or you can even reduce it in order to increase the
quality further.
However, if you want to encode noisy material, a factor that is too low will
considerably increase the encoding time without producing higher quality. For an
unedited analog video you can increase the factor to 8-14.
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
Noise reduction (click on noise sensitivity): A noise filter is used which has adjustable
settings from 1-31.
Advanced parameters
Additional expert settings are available in the tree to the right of the window. These
should only be changed by experienced users. They have been optimized for general
applications to such an extent that adjustment is only necessary in exceptional cases.
Audio settings
Audio Type: You can use MPEG -1/-2, PCM (WAV), or Dolby® Digital. You can also
select "No audio" in the export dialog.
Sample rate: You can set a sample rate of 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz for the audio track.
VCDs and SVCDs require 44.1 kHz, DVDs require 48 kHz. To reduce the size of audio
data it is recommended to lower the bit rate instead of the sample rate.
Mode: You can use mono, stereo, joint stereo, or dual channel. If audio type "Dolby®
Digital" is used, then "5.1 Surround" mode may also be selected.
• Dual channel enables encoding of two mono tracks (e.g. different language sound
tracks) that can be switched during playback.
• Joint stereo is an optimized stereo encoder which takes advantage of the fact that
the signal of both stereo channels is largely identical. Use joint stereo if you can
only use small audio bit rates, but still require a stereo signal.
• 5.1 Surround is available only for surround projects for burning DVDs. During this
process, all 6 surround channels in the audio stream are encoded.
Note! For Surround projects "Dolby® Digital" should be selected under "Audio type",
and "5.1 Surround" under "Mode".
Bit rate: Here you can set the audio signal bit rate. The higher the bit rate, the better
the playback quality. VCD requires 224 kBit/s, and for SVCDs and DVDs select a
value between 384 kBit/s and 448 kBit/s.
Dolby® Digital Details
Hint: These functions are available only in the "5.1 Surround" mode.
Dialog normalization: Set the dB level of spoken dialog. This value will be used to
adjust the total volume of DVD movies and different programs that can be received
by the DVB. To do this, you must first measure the volume of spoken dialogs in your
movies. The values 1-31 correspond to volume levels of -1 to -31 dB.
355
356
Hint: Use the mixer's peakmeter to set the volume level. This process produces only
approximate results, because the exact measurement requires a mean value and this
cannot be easily measured with MAGIX Video Pro X5.
The displayed value serves also as a reference value for "Dynamic Range Control".
Some areas are softer so that speech can be made louder, and louder areas will be
made softer to avoid overmodulations.
Background: Action-filled movies have larger volume differences between spoken
dialogs and loud scenes (during explosions, for example). Because of this dialogs are
softer than in quieter films which can be modulated higher.
Surround mix level / Center mix level: These settings lead to an additional damping
of the surround channels and the central channel. Usually both settings are set to -3
dB.
LFE channel: Switch off the LFE channel (Low Frequency Effect), e.g. if you want to
eliminate undesirable rumbling sounds in the low frequency range. Normally, you
should leave this option activated.
LFE filter: The LFE filter is a low pass filter, which lets through only the lowest
frequencies. If you are dubbing a project in Samplitude/Sequoia, and have applied the
LFE filter, you can switch off this function here, since this filtering has already been
accomplished.
MPEG glossary
MPEG glossary
Motion estimation
Motion estimation is a further element for reducing data used in MPEG encoding.
Motion estimation also occurs in the B and P frames. The image difference that still
exist after prediction (view page 361) are examined. Complex algorithms are used to
search for an original occurrence of the macro block in the reference frame of each
macro block of the P or B frame (these are units of 2x2 blocks specially combined for
this purpose), which have been moved either by movement or by camera pan. They
can then be left out in the P and B frame. Only the information by how far and to
where the macro block has been moved is saved instead. This vector is called the
motion detector.
In the General encoder settings (view page 352), you can specify the quality of the
final MPEG video. This factor also influences the time required for encoding. The
longer it takes, the better the quality.
Bit rate
MPEG is a format used for storage and transferring. With older formats (e.g. AVI) you
could predict that 20 seconds of movie would result in 20 MB of data. The file size is
this a direct measurement of quality.
This is different for MPEG: The amount of data available can be used differently for
different display modes. 20 MB can be 4 seconds of DVD Video or 5 minutes Internet
streaming in thumbnail format. The quality of an MPEG video is measured by the
width of the created data stream, the bit rate. This is the amount of the transmitted
data per time unit; it is stated in kBit/s or bit per second.
Bits, not bytes are used, since the data word width has to address the transmission
restrictions.
The file size can be calculated from the average bit rate, if its length is known:
F = (BRV + BRA) * t
F=File size
BRV=
Video bit rate
BRA=
Audio bit rate
t=Length in s
357
358
Block
For almost all image file editing techniques the image is subdivided into 8 x 8 pixel
blocks (image points). This should be noted if you would like to used user-defined
image resolutions (width/height), and they should always be a multiple of 8.
Chroma format
The color value of each image point consists of the color values for the primary colors
red, green, and blue (RGB), and for traditional and technical reasons it is transformed
into one brightness value (Y = 0.299*R = 0.587*G + 0.114*B) and two color
difference values (U = R - Y, V = G -Y).
The Y value alone produces the black and white picture. These signal components
allow brightness and color information to be handled separately. The first data
reduction occurs when single rows comprising a picture are read. Because the human
eye has a lower color resolution than a brightness resolution, the color components
are recorded only for every other point of a row (4:2:2) for each four pixels grouped
(4:1:0), i.e. color signal under-reading.
4:2:2 This corresponds to the established TV standard. One piece of color information
is transmitted per row for two pixels which corresponds to a 2/3 compression of the
output data.
4:1:0 This is the color coding used for DVDs and most other consumer video
applications. For each 4 pixels grouped together on two rows, one unit of color
information is saved. This corresponds to a output data compression of 1/2.
Field
A half-image, i.e. two halves which combine to produce a frame (see de-interlacing
(view page 359)).
Frame
A frame is a single image from a video sequence which also called a full image. PAL
video, for example, contains 25 frames per second, NTSC 29.97 frames.
Video recordings, with the exception of computer animations and still frames, don't
contain full images. Instead, they have double numbers of half-images (fields) which
are transmitted in an interlaced state. However, we still refer to frames, since many
predecessors of MPEG compression are based on such frames. Video editing
literature usually refers to frames.
MPEG glossary
GOP
Group of Pictures: The sequence of I frames and the P and B frames that belong to
them.
e.g. I B B P B B P B B I ...
(This GOP has a length of 9, with 2 P frames and 2 B frames)
I frames contain the entire image information of a frame, while P and B have part of
the information. So-called prediction (view page 361) and movement approximation
are methods used for reduction.
The combination P B B is called a subgroup.
I frames must appear in regular intervals in the data stream for image and sound to be
synchronized. Between the I frames only a limited count of P and B frames is allowed.
This explains a few things: Since P and B frames contain only differential information,
these differences will be larger with time, since more and more changes takes place
from frame to frame. A large count does not make much sense, since GOP has a
maximum length of 15 (4P, 2B) in PAL and 18 (5P, 2B) in NTSC. (More than 2 B
frames between P frames is not allowed).
In a closed GOP, B frames of the last subgroup may contain only backward
predictions or references to the preceding P frame, but no references to the following I
frame, since it belongs to the next GOP.
I frames
Intra-frames: In these pictures, the entire image information of a frame is saved and
only information from this frame is used ("intra-frame encoded"). In contrast to the I
frame, P and B frames save only the differences between the current frame, and
preceding and/or following frame are also found in MPEG video (P frame = "predicted
frame", B frame = "bidirectional frame", see Prediction (view page 361)).
Interlace
For historical reasons, pictures in a movie are always recorded and transmitted in the
form of two fields, first the lines with even numbers and then those with odd numbers.
These fields are alternatively displayed with a double-frame rate. The (lazy) eye of the
viewer or the processing of the TV tube puts the two frames together to form one.
359
360
The output image
First field
Second field
You normally don’t have to worry about field processing. The video material goes
through the entire processing chain as fields and is exported again as fields or burned
onto DVD or shown on TV when played back on a DVD as a full picture. Only in
certain rare conditions is it necessary to delve deeper into this process. Two problems
can occur:
Interlace artifacts
To be displayed on a computer monitor the two fields must be combined to form a full
screen.
These two fields are not the same, since two fields are created during the recording
(between which a 1/50 of a second gap is evident). Moving objects can therefore
produce artifacts at the vertical edges.
Typical interlacing errors
You can use so-called "de-interlacing" to avoid these artifacts. A picture in between
the two fields is created (interpolated). So if you want to create stationary pictures
from movies, then you should definitely use a de-interlace filter.
In the system settings (File menu-> Program settings) you can set the preview
monitor display to use hardware de-interlacing during video recordings, for the video
recorder, and for display in the arranger.
Incorrect field rate
If you move around the series of fields in a movie data stream you can see strong jitter
and flicker effects. Picture objects move in a backward movement - two steps
forwards, one back - since a delayed field is shown before the previous one. This can
happen in the processing chain if you export video material improperly with the wrong
field order and then import it into different material.
We use MXV or MPEG "Top field first" format for all analog recordings ("odd" in
other programs). DV-AVI on the other hand is saved with “Bottom Field First”.
MPEG glossary
You can correct the field series for each video object in its object settings. See: Menu > Effects -> Object properties
P frames and B frames
P frames save only the difference between the current picture and the preceding I
frame. The "P" comes from the term "prediction" which describes this process.
B frames save the differences between the current picture and the I or P frame
preceding and following. This includes the information that was the same before and
remained the same after the current frame. Both directions are analyzed (indicates
the "B" in the name, i.e. "bidirectional-predicted"). You can read more under
prediction (view page 361).
Prediction
Prediction is a method of data reduction used by the MPEG format. The image
elements already known from the previous or following frames are removed from the
data stream.
How does it work?
The encoder has a precisely defined GOP, for example IBBPBBPBB. This sequence is
transmitted together with the encoder, which always knows exactly which kind of
frame comes next. I, P, and B frames are differentiated.
Hint: When we talk about pictures, we mean frames of the video output, and I, P an
dB frames are the frames of the encoded video. Just as in movement approximation,
blocks (8x8 pixels) are united into macroblocks (16x16 pixels) during prediction.
The first frame is always the I frame. It is completely encoded from the first picture.
Afterwards, the 4th picture is analyzed for the creation of the first P frame. (As
already said, the encoder, and later the decoder, will know that two B frames belong
between them.) This image will also be completely encoded, and afterwards all
macroblocks that haven't changed in comparison to the I frame will be deleted. They
will be replaced by corresponding references for the decoder that tell it "you already
know what should be shown here, and you can get it from the last I frame".
Now, the 2nd will be completely encoded, and all macroblocks identical to the first I
frame and the following P frame will be removed. References to previous frames are
called backward predictions, and references to following frames are called forward
predictions. The third picture will be edited in exactly the same fashion.
361
362
The fourth picture we have already explained, and now we need the next P frame, or
picture number 7. Pictures 5 and 6 are B frames again, which are compared to P
frames to both sides of them (picture 4 and 7); these are followed by the last two B
frames. These have a special place, since in closed GOPs, they may contain only
backward predictions, and no references to the next I frame, because it belongs to
the next GOP.
Something else: Since the decoder is no prophet, the P frames are always transmitted
before the B frames! The GOP explained above will be encoded and transmitted in the
order it is written.
Original
GOP
I0 B01 B02 P01 B11 B12 P02 B21 B22 I1
Data stream I0 P01 B01 B02 P02 B11 B12 B21 B22 I1 ...
I0 P01 B01 B02 P02 B11 B12 I1 B21 B22 P11...
for closed GOPs
For open GOPs
Due to this nested structure, it is easy to see that during direct editing of MPEG
material, complicated computations have to take place! These are made easier using a
frame table. A frame table contains a list, where the information of every frame in the
data stream is found, identifying the type of frame it is.
Using Movement prediction (view page 357) P and B frames are likewise reduced.
Quantization scaling
The single pictures in MPEG are saved using a compression method comparable to
JPEG with bitmaps and associated with quality loss. For this single images are divided
into 8 x 8 blocks (view page 358).
Each one of these blocks is then transformed into an 8 x 8 matrix (a table with rows
and columns) using a DCT (discreet cosinus transformation) mathematical method.
Each of these values is produced using all 64 individual pixels of the block, but the
values in the matrix are ordered in such a way that the image information is ordered
according to its importance.
This matrix will then be multiplied by another matrix, i.e. the quantization matrix.
Exactly how and why this matrix must be created is the biggest secret of encoder
programmers, since this determines the quality of the whole encoding process. What
is known is that the result should contain as many zeros as possible! These zeros
correspond to the "unimportant" image elements mentioned and will not be
transmitted in the data stream.
Depending on the encoder parameters regarding the target bit rate, fewer or more
values of the matrix will be declared unimportant by dividing the quantization matrix
MPEG glossary
by the quantization scaling factor. Since only whole numbers are used, a division can
produce a zero is the remainder is discarded.
This factor is also a direct measure of the sought image quality of the MPEG data
stream, since the "Q" in "Q" factor stands for quantization and quality.
363
364
Glossary
Symbols & Numeric
720p
This is the "small" HD resolution, which is sized at 1280 pixels x 720 pixels. The "p"
stands for "progressive", i.e. full images are always displayed.
A
Aliasing
Aliasing, or alias effects, are mistakes that appear during digital scanning of sounds,
videos or images when the sample frequency (in audio editing) or resolution (in video
editing) used are too low.
ATN:
This abbreviation stands for "Absolute Track Number". Which is the actual time code
of DV and HDV recordings recorded using the helical scan method.
Audio
This is then referred to as "audio" when the sound signal is saved directly as such on
the PC. The actual sound is recorded or played back here.
audioid
audioid is a process used to determine the title and artist name base on musical
properties. An Internet connection is required to access the audioid database.
AVCHD
Stands for "Advanced Video Codec Definition". It is an HD format for video cameras
which has been developed by Panasonic and SONY. In comparison to the HDV
format, a meaningful quality improvement can be seen here.
For the video recording MPEG 4 AVC/H.264, and for audio recording Dolby® Digital
or Linear PCM are used. The maximum bit rate is 25 Megabits/sec.
AVI
The AVI format (Audio Video Interleaved) isn't actually a proper video format!
Rather, it is a so-called "container" for which the conventions for transferring audio
and video files to the program are only loosely defined. More in this topic can be
found in General notes on AVI videos. (view page 337)
Glossary
B
Backup disc
Copying of files to a different file storage medium to secure these files is called
backing up, or creating a backup.
Browser
A browser (also known as web browser, or Internet browser) is a computer program
that displays websites. The best-known browsers are Internet Explorer, Firefox, Safari,
and Opera.
Button
Refers to an element of the graphic user interface of a program. The button initiates
an action in the program via left mouse click.
Button
Refers to an element of the graphic user interface of a program. The button initiates
an action in the program via left mouse click.
C
Cache
Simply stated, this is a temporary folder where frequently accessed files are saved so
that they can be quickly launched while you are working.
CC
CC stands for "Connectivity Co-ordination" and describes how the change of a
domain name from one provider to another occurs (domain transfer).
Clip level
Signifies the volume level at which the recorded signal is overmodulated, or "clipped".
Clipboard
The clipboard is used to temporarily store objects during execution of commands like
"copy" and "cut".
Clipboard
The clipboard is used to temporarily store objects during execution of commands like
"copy" and "cut".
365
366
Compatible
Different devices are compatible with each other if they operate together without any
errors occurring.
Context menu
Context menu can be reached by right clicking on a selected object. It offers functions
which are available and can be expected in the given context.
Copyright
Protection of intellectual and creative property against unauthorized copying.
Copyright
Protection of intellectual and creative property against unauthorized copying.
CPU
Central processing unit: The name for the main processor of the computer (CPU).
Modern computers have even two or more processors, or one processor with several
cores.
Crossfade
Transitions, crossfades. Can be used to fade between objects.
D
Dialog
A dialog opens in a new window and lets the user interact with the program. This
means that the dialog can present information to the user and/or expects to receive
input from the user.
A dialog can contain various user elements which can be manipulated by a simple
mouse click. Keyboard entries are also possible.
Disc project
A "Disc project" includes everything that you want to put on your CD and DVD.
This normally contains one or more movies and includes a menu structure/menu
design which allows you to choose a movie later on the CD or DVD.
Disc types
The disc types determines the format and medium (CD, DVD, Blu-ray disc, etc.) to
which the current project will be burned.
Glossary
DNS
The abbreviation DNS stands for Domain Name Service and refers to a provider of
Internet services that registers domain names for customers.
Domain
A domain is the website's Internet address. It consists of the name of the Internet
protocol (usually http://), the computer or network name (such as www), the
second-level domain (such as magix), and the top level domain (like .com, .net).
Altogether we have: protocol://networkname.second-level-domain.top-level-domain
(such as "http://www.magix.com").
Domains are allocated by a country's so-called NIC (Network Information Center). In
Germany the DENIC is responsible for the release of domains.
Domain transfer
See CC. If you already have a domain, you can move it from your previous provider to
another provider.
Downmix
A method developed for audio technology to turn a Surround Sound recording into a
version with fewer channels. Most often (as is the case with MAGIX Video Pro X5)
this will be a stereo version.
Drag & drop
Enables files and objects to be moved freely between various applications (or within
an application) by dragging the object and letting it drop using the mouse cursor.
F
Fader
Used for visual input of values. Similar to volume control on a mixing board, you can
control various parameters by sliding the fader. A very common example for this is
the zoom slider that lets you see a picture in more detail.
Field
A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame (see interlace).
Flip menu
Drop down menus create menus consisting of lists of selectable choices. They look
very similar to text input fields, but have a button with a downward-pointing symbol
on the right-hand side.
367
368
Frame
A frame is a single image from a video sequence which also called a full image.
A PAL video contains 25 frames per second; NTSC contains 29.97 frames.
H
Handles
Handles are the five little rectangles at the edges of selected objects. All curve points
can be moved by holding down the left mouse button.
Length handles: Bottom right and bottom left. You can use them to change the length
of an object.
Fade handles: Top right and top left. These can be used to softly fade an object in or
out.
Volume/Brightness handle: Above-center. You can use it to adjust the volume or the
brightness.
Hard disk
Storage medium with the largest storage capacity where the operating system(s),
programs, and files are saved. A hard disk can be built into the computer, but there
are also external hard disks which can be used with different computers via a USB
connection (portable drives or external hard disk).
Hard disk drive
Storage medium with the largest storage capacity where the operating system(s),
programs, and files are saved. A hard disk can be built into the computer, but there
are also external hard disks which can be used with different computers via a USB
connection (portable drives or external hard disk).
Hardware
The all-encompassing name for all internal components of a computer. For example
hard disk, graphics card, mainboard, etc. External peripheral devices are also
considered hardware, i.e. printer, scanner, monitor, etc. The synchronization of single
hardware components is coordinated by the software.
HDD
Storage medium with the largest storage capacity where the operating system(s),
programs, and files are saved. A hard disk can be built into the computer, but there
are also external hard disks which can be used with different computers via a USB
connection (portable drives or external hard disk).
Glossary
HDTV
This acronym stands for "High Definition Television.
HTTP
Stands for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol and is used for transferring websites onto the
Internet (from web server to the browser). For this reason, the abbreviation http://
always comes before the Internet address. This is automatically inserted and does not
have to be entered when entering the Internet address.
Hyperlink
Hyperlinks (or in short "links") are references to other websites/online documents (or
other computer networks). They build the base of the World Wide Web (WWW) as
it is only via these hyperlinks that networking or interlinking between the billions of
website out there is actually possible.
I
ID3 tags
ID3 tags contain title information that can be added to a music title. This includes the
title, artist, album, as well as the genre, year of release, and other criteria that can help
searching through a database. The database is created using this information.
Info: Title information will only be saved for MP3s in the so-called ID3 tags (Identify
an MP3), but other formats offer similar possibilities, like "Vorbis comment" for the
OGG Vorbis format, for example.
Image
An image is a representation of a CD, DVD, hard drive, or another storage medium
that is saved as a file.
The difference from a copy or backup is that an image contains information about the
structure of the original storage medium, and not just individual files. This enables
01:01 copies of complete storage media to be created.
Caution! Copyright laws forbid copying of commercial CDs/DVDs, and for this
reason, this process can be prohibited by copy protection.
IMAP
Stands for Internet Message Access Protocol and is an advanced process of receiving
emails.
369
370
Interlace
Describes the creation of a full image from 2 half-images (fields).
In this process, even and odd lines are alternately assigned to one of the two fields.
The human eye perceives both of the projected half-images as a single full image, so
that despite the slow image repetition rate (25 Hz for PAL, 29.97 for NTSC) a
subjectively fluid image is seen.
Intro
"Intro" means the introduction or opening credits of a movie.
J
jpx
A format developed by MAGIX which is used for photo editing. It enables free
experimentation with effects without altering the original file. The effects settings are
also displayed when the photos are opened using a different MAGIX program.
M
Menu
Menus contain practically all function of a program. They can be opened using a
simple mouse click on the corresponding menu. Keyboard shortcuts, if available, are
also found at the end of menu entries.
The graphical surface of a CD/DVD will also be represented as a menu.
Menu bar
Almost every program has a menu bar. It can normally be found underneath the title
line of the program. A simple mouse click opens a corresponding menu.
MIDI
MIDI files do not contain the actual sounds like audio files, but only the note control
information which can be interpreted during playback by the synthesizer chip on the
sound card or an external synthesizer.
MMC
MMC stands for MIDI Machine Control and is part of the MIDI protocol. Transport
control and position data is conveyed using MMC.
Glossary
Motherboard
This is the centerpiece of hardware components of a computer. All other hardware
components like CPU, RAM, hard disk, additional drives, graphics cards, as well as
other cards for specialized uses are connected to the motherboard.
Motherboard
This is the centerpiece of hardware components of a computer. All other hardware
components like CPU, RAM, hard disk, additional drives, graphics cards, as well as
other cards for specialized uses are connected to the motherboard.
Motherboard
This is the centerpiece of hardware components of a computer. All other hardware
components like CPU, RAM, hard disk, additional drives, graphics cards, as well as
other cards for specialized uses are connected to the motherboard.
MOV
MOV is a video and audio format developed by Apple, which has since become
widely used with Windows. QuickTime supports lots of compression technology,
which make it possible to optimize audio and video and even graphics for the Internet
and multimedia/video applications. Conventional (hardware) DVD players are not
able to play this format.
Movie
In MAGIX Video Pro X5, an arrangement of various objects (videos, photos, text,
sound, etc.) is called a movie. A movie file has an "mvm" extension.
MP3
MP3 (actually MPEG-1 layer 3) is currently the most important standard for
compressing audio files.
MPEG
MPEG is short for "Moving Picture Experts Group" and refers to a committee
concerned with the standardization of video and audio data compression as well as
container formats.
MS audio
A process developed by Microsoft for compressing audio files with properties similar
to those of MP3.
MTC
MTC stands for MIDI Time Code and it transmits the exact playback position via
MIDI. In this way, programs and devices can be synchronized with each other.
371
372
MXV
This is the MAGIX video format for quicker processing with MAGIX products. It offers
very low loss of quality, but it cannot be played via conventional DVD players.
N
Noise Sample
Sample of a noise that is to be removed
NTSC (USA, Japan)
NTSC stands for "National Television Systems Committee". This is a US institution
that defined the first color carrier system for TV which is now used in most of
America and some East Asian countries.
The image repetition rate for NTSC is 29.97 Hz.
Numeric keypad
Also known as the numpad, or the number block.
O
Offset
With an offset of 60:00:00 (1 hour) you can, for example synchronize a tape whose
time code that starts at 1 hour, MAGIX Video Pro X5 however, still starts the tape
beginning at 0.
OGG VORBIS
This is a new, royalty-free format with similar properties to MP3.
P
PAL (Europe)
Phase Alternating Line, or PAL, is a process for color transmission for analog TV that
is primarily used in Europe, but also in Australia, South America, and many African
and Asian countries.
The image repetition rate for PAL is 25 Hz.
Play marker
The play marker is a red vertical line which moves from left to right during playback. It
indicates the current play position.
Glossary
Playlist
Arrange your songs in playlists from various sources in different formats and in
whatever way you like, sometimes updated daily.
Important: Playlists are only links to songs on your hard drive or in your CD drive.
When you add a song to your playlist whose real source is a CD in your computer's
drive, the song will no longer be playable when the CD is removed from the drive.
Similarly, when you move a folder on your hard drive, the playlist will no longer be
able to play the song, since the link is no longer valid.
For the latter, however, there is a simple solution: If you know where the song has
been saved, then you can redefine the path. A corresponding dialog window is
provided for this purpose. You can reset the path by navigating through the Explorer
folders. The playlist is now correct once again.
Plug-in
Plug-ins are additional programs that expand the functionality of the main program.
They are inserted into the main program.
POP3
Stands for Post Office Protocol (version 3) and is used in standard email programs for
receiving email (for example, Outlook Express). POP3 enables email to be collected
by the provider's email server and loaded into your email program.
Project
A "Disc project" includes everything that you want to put on your CD and DVD.
This normally contains one or more movies and includes a menu structure/menu
design which allows you to choose a movie later on the CD or DVD.
Provider
A provider or ISP (Internet Service Provider) offers Internet services like webhosting
or domains (DNS). In relation to the MAGIX Website Service, MAGIX is the provider.
R
RAM (Random Access Memory)
This is a hardware component of a computer. RAM is needed to temporarily save
files. This type of storage is erased when the computer is shut down or reset. The
larger this storage is, the faster you can work with programs to change and save files.
373
374
Ratio:
The aspect ratio is the ratio between the height and width of a rectangle. In practice
these are photos, screens or projection screens. This method can also be used to
describe the aspect ratio of pixels.
Here are some examples of typical aspect ratios: at home 4:3, 16:9 (typical for TV
sets), or 16:10 (widescreen flat screens, widescreen notebooks), 3:2 for 35 mm films
and photos. In cinemas you mostly find 1.85:1
Red Book
Specific standards have been established for the different CD types in order to unify
their data structure and to make them compatible with the different CD drives. Their
names refer to the color of the books where these standards were written.
The term "Red Book" is common language for the Compact Disc Audio Standard. The
requirements listed here have to be observed for industrial CP production. Audio CD
players only read CDs created according to the Red Book format. It is therefore
necessary to first convert PC files into this format before writing them onto an audio
disc compatible with any audio CD player.
Restore
Restoration of files originating from a backup will be called "Restoring".
RM
RealMedia includes all of the media formats from software developer RealNetworks.
RealMedia especially refers to the "RealVideo" video format and the "RealAudio"
sound format. The quality of RealVideo files is comparably good at high compression
rates, but does have some loss of quality. These formats cannot be played back by
(hardware) DVD players.
S
Scene
Freely definable section of a video in MAGIX Video Pro X5.
In general, a scene is a segment of a film that is a product of various settings and
conveys a certain action.
Screenshot
A screenshot is an image composed of all visible screen elements (messages, open
dialogs, etc.) at a certain time. By pressing the "Print screen" key on the keyboard, this
image is saved into the clipboard. Next, open a program which can edit images and
select "Insert" (shortcut "Ctrl+V") in a new document to add the screenshot for
editing and saving.
Glossary
Note: Press "Alt + Print screen" on the keyboard to capture the active window only.
Slider
Used for visual input of values. Similar to volume control on a mixing board, you can
control various parameters by sliding the fader. A very common example for this is
the zoom slider that lets you see a picture in more detail.
SMTP
Stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol and enables the exchange of emails across
computer networks.
Software
The name for all non-physical functional components of a computer. This primarily
includes computer programs and files that are meant to be used by computer
programs.
Storyboard mode
The Storyboard mode is the default edit screen view. This view offers an easy,
streamlined interface to simplify the editing process. The alternative Timeline mode
offers a more detailed interface for more extensive editing and scene arrangements,
the scene overview mode offers a complete overview of all scenes on a small scale.
You can toggle between the three view modes using the Tab key.
Submenu
Besides normal entries, a menu can contain submenus that offer additional functions.
This makes menus more comprehensive.
Super Video CD (SVCD)
The Super Video CD (SVCD) is a technological advancement of the video CD. SVCDs
are also like VCD-specified CD-ROMs which can be played using either a Super Video
CD player (connected to the television), or directly with the CD-ROM drive of a
computer. Many DVD players can also play SVCDs. MPEG-2 and the increase of the
data transfer rate makes it hard to tell videos from videos in DVD quality apart.
Resolution: SVCDs use the better MPEG-2 encoder in a standardized resolution of
480 x 576 (PAL). The MPEG-2 format offers a maximum resolution of up to 720 x
576 points and improved compression methods characterized by excellent image
definition and homogeneity.
Hard disk capacity: An average 90-minute movie must be spread across 3 CDs. On
one SVCD you can get about 30 minutes of good-quality movie.
375
376
Encoder setting: Compared to the VCD with 1.3, the data transfer rate is doubled to
2.6 Mbit/s.
MPEG-2 format introduces the so-called variable bit rate (VBR). In contrast to the
constant bit rate (CBR) of the MPEG-1 encoders, this encoder has the option of using
more bits for movement-intensive sections, as well as saving bits if picture content
remains the same.
T
Toolbar
Here you will find small buttons that provide a function when clicked. For example,
you can cut out a selected object by clicking on the scissors.
Toolbar
All basic functions of the corresponding program can be found here. The
corresponding functions can be called up via mouse click.
Top-level domain
Top-level domains (TLD) are always those separated by a dot at the end of an
Internet address (for example, "http://www.magix.com" < here, .com is the top-level
domain). Among these are also country top-level domains, such as .co.uk, .us, .de as
well as so-called generic top-level domains like .net, .org, .biz, and so on.
Traffic
Traffic (data transmission) occurs within your MAGIX Website Service as soon as
data is transferred across the Internet: for example, when uploading or downloading
files to your website or when someone else opens your website.
U
Universal Plug & Play; UPnP
Universal Plug ‘n’ Play (UPnP) is a network protocol which enables data exchange
between different devices (PCs, hi-fi systems, video cameras, PDAs, and webservers).
UPnP allows various devices to participate in network-wide communication, i.e. the
initialization of functions and other device functions. Long-winded configuring or
installing of drivers is not required as the devices can handle their own functions and
data sources by themselves. Find out more at www.upnp.org.
Hint: To work with UPnP you have to activate it first. This can be found under
"Options" ("Y" -> UPnP).
Glossary
URL
URL stands for Uniform Resource Locator and describes where a source can be found
online (for example, a website). The address or the path to the storage location of a
file on your computer is known as a URL. Often the term URL is used as a term for the
domain. The URL for the MAGIX website is: http://www.magix.co.uk
V
VirtualDub plug-in
Plug-ins are additional programs that expand the functionality of the main program.
They are inserted into the main program.
VirtualDub plug-ins are also referred to "VirtualDub filters" and have the "VDF" file
extension. You can use them to apply additional video effects to video objects.
VST and DirectX plug-ins
Plug-ins are additional programs that expand the functionality of the main program.
They are inserted into the main program.
Two standards exist for audio editing: VST (Steinberg) and DirectX (Microsoft). VST
has asserted itself stronger in the current market.
W
WAV
Wave (*.WAV) is a standard uncompressed audio format.
Wave
Wave (*.WAV) is a standard uncompressed audio format.
Wave file
Wave (*.WAV) is a standard uncompressed audio format.
Webhosting
This means that an Internet Service Provider makes domains and webspace available
to its customers. With the MAGIX Website Service, MAGIX provides webhosting to
its customers.
Webmail
Webmail enables the customer to view and receive the contents of their email inbox
without having to install email software on their computer. Customers of the MAGIX
Website Service can use MAGIX Webmail for this.
377
378
Webmaster
A webmaster is responsible for the administration and maintenance of a website.
Often, the webmaster is also the owner of the website as well as the domain that
belongs to it. Once you have registered a domain in the MAGIX Website Service, an
email account will automatically be set up, for example:
"mailto:webmaster@domainname.co.uk".
Webserver
Webserver refers to the computer on which your host saves your website's pages and
which makes your pages accessible on the Internet 24-hours a day.
WMA
A process developed by Microsoft for compressing audio files with properties similar
to those of MP3.
WMV
Windows Media Video (WMV) is a trademark video codec from Microsoft. If you
have Windows installed on your PC, then playing WMV files shouldn't be a problem.
Only a few (hardware) DVD players are able to play this format. Read more about this
in your DVD player's manual.
This video format is very good for web videos as it allows relatively high compression
rates.
World Wide Web (WWW)
WWW stands for "World Wide Web" and is the most used service of the Internet.
On the WWW, web browsers (for example, Internet Explorer) are used to display
information via websites. The process is colloquially called "Surfing the Internet".
If you still have questions
If you still have questions
Tips for program help
The "Help" file features hints on how to use the program and additional information.
Many important terms are indicated in the text in italics and clicking on them displays
an explanation.
Context help: Press the "F1" key at any point in the opened program and the help file
will open with the matching topic (context help).
Search function: Use the search function to find out information about specific words.
Enter either the individual word or use logical operators (OR, AND, NEAR) to refine
your search if you have several search words.
• "OR" (between two words): All topics which contain both words or one of the
words will be listed.
• "AND" (between two words): Only those topics will be listed which contain both
words.
• "NEAR" (between two words): Only those topics will be listed which contain both
words. A maximum of six other words may be added between the search terms.
• "NOT" (before a word): Topics which contain this word will not be listed.
Print: Use the help program's print function to make a printout of individual topics or
entire sections. The print button is located at the top of the help window in the
toolbar.
379
380
Index
3
3D............................................................................................................................................... 164
3D morph ..................................................................................................................................142
3D series................................................................................................................................... 102
3D transitions........................................................................................................................... 101
5
5.1 Surround....................................................................................................................193, 200
A
Abbreviations..........................................................................................................................326
Adapt length to music ..........................................................................................................266
Add music .................................................................................................................................. 82
Additional effects................................................................................................................... 144
Adjust brightness .................................................................................................. 128, 161, 190
All tracks mouse mode.............................................................................................30, 33, 45
Alpha keying....................................................................................................................101, 232
Analog video recording........................................................................................................... 79
Animate effects .......................................................................................................................147
Animated GIF .......................................................................................................................... 233
Anti-flicker filter ......................................................................................................................162
Anti-interlace filter .................................................................................................................163
Arranger...................................................................................................................50, 246, 327
Artistic filter..............................................................................................................................134
Attach to picture position in the video..............................................................................158
Audio cleaning .........................................................................................................................174
Audio effects ..................................................................................................................... 61, 173
Audio recording ........................................................................................................................ 82
Audio track export ................................................................................................................. 232
Audiomenü ..............................................................................................................................207
Automate ..................................................................................................................................192
Automatic scene detection .................................................................................................259
Automatic volume damping.................................................................................................. 85
Automatically cut......................................................................................................... 259, 266
Automation......................................................................................................................192, 196
AVCHD................................................................................................................................. 17, 69
AVCHD disc ........................................................................................................................... 340
AVC-Intra................................................................................................................................... 69
Index
B
Background music .................................................................................................................. 173
Backup .............................................................................................................................255, 256
Backup copy ............................................................................................................................ 255
Basic view .................................................................................................................................. 50
Batch Capturing.........................................................................................................................75
Batch recording .........................................................................................................................75
Beat detection.........................................................................................................................260
Blu-ray.......................................................................................................................................340
BMP-Export ............................................................................................................................. 233
Border cropping adjustment ................................................................................................163
Burn ....................................................................................................................................67, 220
Burn CD ....................................................................................................................................280
C
Camera/zoom .........................................................................................................................139
Chapter markers..................................................................................................... 49, 110, 207
Chroma key .............................................................................................................................. 132
Clean-up wizard ..................................................................................................................... 257
Codec ...............................................................................................................................335, 337
Color...................................................................................................................................129, 161
Color correction........................................................................................................................131
Compare.................................................................................................................................... 125
Compressor ..................................................................................................................... 177, 182
Computer ................................................................................................................................... 58
Context menu ............................................................................................................................28
Continue ................................................................................................................................... 222
Continue burning ................................................................................................................... 222
Contrast.............................................................................................................................128, 161
Copy ............................................................................................................................................ 94
Create disc menu ......................................................................................................... 203, 205
Create menus................................................................................................................ 203, 205
Create new project .........................................................................................................43, 238
CUDA........................................................................................................................................ 226
Curve mouse mode ................................................................................................................. 46
Curves ............................................................................................................................... 147, 192
Customer service ....................................................................................................................... 11
Cut ........................................................................................................................................30, 46
Cut trimmer............................................................................................................................... 99
D
DeClipper .................................................................................................................................. 175
Decorate................................................................................................................................... 297
DeHisser....................................................................................................................................176
Deinstallation ..............................................................................................................................13
Deinterlace .............................................................................................................................. 253
381
382
Delete ........................................................................................................................................285
DeNoiser....................................................................................................................................175
Design .......................................................................................................................................266
Design buttons....................................................................................................................... 209
Design elements.....................................................................................................................297
Design page ............................................................................................................................ 208
DirectX Plug Ins...................................................................................................................... 190
Disc formats ............................................................................................................................... 18
Distortion ..................................................................................................................................135
Dolby Surround........................................................................................................................193
Driver selection.......................................................................................................................246
Dub .............................................................................................................................................. 82
Ducking..................................................................................................................... 85, 173, 295
DV ................................................................................................................................................ 72
DV as MPEG.............................................................................................................................. 77
DV-AVI.....................................................................................................................................228
DVCPRO..................................................................................................................................... 69
DVD ...........................................................................................................................................338
Burn DVD............................................................................................................................ 280
DVD with surround sound ...............................................................................................193
Import DVD........................................................................................................................... 92
E
Edit ..................................................................................................................... 42, 91, 284, 330
Edit after recording .................................................................................................................. 89
Edit list ............................................................................................................................ 233, 256
EDL................................................................................................................................... 233, 256
Effects.................................................................................... 60, 123, 173, 193, 267, 292, 331
Effects curves .......................................................................................................................... 149
Effects masks ...........................................................................................................................152
Effects settings.................................................................................................................124, 161
Equalizer ........................................................................................................................... 177, 182
Exchange .................................................................................................................................... 48
Export ........................................................................................................................35, 194, 227
Export formats ........................................................................................................................ 227
Export movie .................................................................................................................... 35, 227
Export video...................................................................................................................... 35, 227
F
File.................................................................................................................................... 277, 329
File formats ........................................................................................................................17, 337
File import .................................................................................................................................. 56
Film menu.................................................................................................................................207
Film overview ............................................................................................................................ 65
Folder.........................................................................................................................................248
Four-point cut ......................................................................................................................... 107
Full screen .................................................................................................................................. 64
Index
G
Grid .............................................................................................................................................. 49
Group ...................................................................................................................................49, 94
H
H.264 .......................................................................................................................................... 69
Handles................................................................................................................................ 28, 96
Hard drive camera ................................................................................................................... 69
HDV..............................................................................................................................................72
Help .................................................................................................................................. 301, 333
Hints ..........................................................................................................................................250
I
Image stabilization..................................................................................................................159
Import ................................................................................................................................ 56, 194
Import Formats...........................................................................................................................17
In point........................................................................................................................ 32, 93, 109
Insert ............................................................................................................................................92
Insert date..................................................................................................................................121
Installation ...................................................................................................................................13
Interfaces ............................................................................................................................ 42, 67
Interlace....................................................................................................................................249
Interpolation for interlace material ....................................................................................163
J
JPEG export ............................................................................................................................. 233
K
Kapitelmenü ............................................................................................................................207
Key frames................................................................................................................................147
Keyboard shortcuts ............................................................................................................... 326
L
Limiter........................................................................................................................................186
Load ............................................................................................................................ 43, 92, 246
Load CD titles ......................................................................................................................... 279
Load project......................................................................................................................43, 246
Logging ........................................................................................................................................78
M
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro............................................................................................................ 18
383
384
MAGIX tools ............................................................................................................................. 59
MAGIX Video CD ..................................................................................................................228
Mastering ................................................................................................................ 174, 183, 192
Mastering Suite .......................................................................................................................183
Mirror ......................................................................................................................................... 141
Mixer ................................................................................................................. 50, 181, 190, 195
MMC .........................................................................................................................................243
Modes (Storyboard/Timeline/Overview)......................................................................... 38
MotionJPEG-AVI....................................................................................................................229
Mouse modes ..................................................................................................................45, 328
Move............................................................................................................................................ 95
Move objects on all tracks..................................................................................................... 45
Movement effects........................................................................................................... 60, 137
MPEG .............................................................................................................................. 228, 337
Multicam editing ......................................................................................................................113
Multicam mode ................................................................................................................. 17, 113
Multisound tracks .................................................................................................................. 198
Mute ............................................................................................................................................ 50
My Media................................................................................................................................... 58
N
Navigation ............................................................................................................................... 206
News Center..............................................................................................................................44
O
Object editing............................................................................................................................. 91
Object grid ................................................................................................................................. 49
Object handles .......................................................................................................................... 96
Object mouse mode ................................................................................................................ 45
Object trimmer ......................................................................................................................... 98
One track mouse mode ............................................................................................30, 33, 45
Open files ............................................................................................. 17, 246, 256, 279, 282
OpenCL .....................................................................................................................................226
Optimize image ......................................................................................................128, 161, 163
Out point .................................................................................................................... 32, 93, 109
Output video............................................................................................................................236
Overview .......................................................................................................................... 50, 300
Overview mode..................................................................................................................50, 93
Overwrite ................................................................................................................................... 49
P
Package contents ...................................................................................................................... 13
Panorama .................................................................................................................................270
Panorama automation ...........................................................................................................192
Personalized templates......................................................................................................... 144
Pitch shift.................................................................................................................................. 180
Index
Play ..................................................................................................................................... 23, 326
Playback markers ....................................................................................................................108
Polarizing filter.........................................................................................................................167
Prelisten mouse mode ............................................................................................................ 46
Preview .....................................................................................................................................202
Preview rendering .................................................................................................................. 253
Program monitor ...................................................................................................................... 64
Project folder..............................................................................................................................63
Project markers........................................................................................................................108
Projects............................................................................................................................. 58, 244
PSD ............................................................................................................................................206
Q
Quick Start ..................................................................................................................................22
R
Real time.................................................................................................................................... 173
Record ......................................................................................................................................... 68
Record sound .............................................................................................................................82
Recording ................................................................................................................................... 68
Redo............................................................................................................................................. 44
Remote control .......................................................................................................................202
Remove end............................................................................................................................... 47
Remove scene........................................................................................................................... 47
Remove start ............................................................................................................................. 47
Rewrite...................................................................................................................................... 222
Rotation ......................................................................................................................................141
Rotation & Mirror.....................................................................................................................141
Run of the panorama and volume curve ...........................................................................192
RW ............................................................................................................................................. 222
S
Save ............................................................................................................................................. 43
Save project......................................................................................................................43, 246
Scene recognition .................................................................................................................. 259
Screen capture.......................................................................................................................... 88
Scroll.............................................................................................................................................53
Scrubbing ..................................................................................................................................201
Search function...................................................................................................................23, 57
Secondary color correction ...................................................................................................131
Section & zoom .......................................................................................................................138
Serial number ............................................................................................................................. 14
Settings.....................................................................................................................................245
Sharpness......................................................................................................................... 136, 162
Shortcuts .................................................................................................................................. 326
Show grid ................................................................................................................................... 49
385
386
Show text....................................................................................................................................60
Shutter mode............................................................................................................................167
Single frame export................................................................................................................229
Single-frame recording .................................................................................................... 76, 85
Size..............................................................................................................................................137
Size & position .........................................................................................................................137
Slideshow Maker....................................................................................................................266
Snap to other audio objects...........................................................................................116, 311
Sound restoration....................................................................................................................174
Soundtrack ......................................................................................................................172, 264
Source monitor ....................................................................................................... 64, 109, 125
Spacebar ...................................................................................................................................246
Specify TV image ....................................................................................................................162
Speed..........................................................................................................................................136
Split .............................................................................................................................................. 47
Split movie ................................................................................................................................. 47
Start dialog................................................................................................................................. 22
Stereo FX ...................................................................................................................................177
Stereo3D................................................................................................................................... 164
Storyboard Mode ..................................................................................................................... 38
StoryMaker ................................................................................................................................60
Stretch mouse mode ............................................................................................................... 46
Support ......................................................................................................................................... 11
Suppress flickering..................................................................................................................162
Surround ..........................................................................................................................193, 200
Synchronization ..................................................................................................................... 240
System requirements ............................................................................................................... 15
Szenemarker..............................................................................................................................112
T
The burn dialog ........................................................................................................................221
Three-point cut....................................................................................................................... 105
Timeline mode .......................................................................................................................... 28
Timer ........................................................................................................................................... 86
Timestretch/pitchshift ......................................................................................................... 180
Title ...................................................................................................................................... 60, 117
Title Editor.................................................................................................................................. 49
Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 43
Track effects automation .............................................................................................192, 196
Tracks........................................................................................................................................ 190
Transitions .................................................................................................... 60, 100, 232, 266
Transport functions ................................................................................................................. 65
Trimmer ...................................................................................................................................... 97
Two-point cut.......................................................................................................................... 103
U
Uncompressed video.............................................................................................................229
Index
Undo ............................................................................................................................................ 44
Use plug-ins .......................................................................................................... 144, 174, 190
Using MAGIX Video Pro X5...................................................................................................22
V
Video Comping.........................................................................................................................113
Video effects .................................................................................................................... 60, 128
View ..........................................................................................................................61, 300, 328
Vimeo.............................................................................................................................. 234, 282
Volume automation ...............................................................................................................192
Volume reduction ............................................................................................................85, 173
VST plug-ins.............................................................................................................................190
W
Wave (WAV) ......................................................................................................................... 232
Window.......................................................................................................................... 298, 332
Windows Media video ......................................................................................................... 229
Workshop ...................................................................................................................................22
Workspaces................................................................................................................................67
Y
YouTube ......................................................................................................................... 234, 282
Z
Zoom.................................................................................................................................. 53, 140
387
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Create Date : 2013:01:29 14:42:39+01:00 Modify Date : 2013:01:29 14:52:59+01:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00 Creator Tool : Acrobat PDFMaker 9.0 für Word Metadata Date : 2013:01:29 14:52:59+01:00 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.0.0 (Windows) Format : application/pdf Creator : Title : MAGIX Video Pro X5 Document ID : uuid:2f7d81cb-6832-41e5-a991-c293cb169389 Instance ID : uuid:0e2fa42b-7fa1-4ad3-9dd4-8ba1a9491e2d Page Layout : OneColumn Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 387EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools